pochette MUSE 15/11/01 17:12 Page 1

GIVE WINGS TO
YOUR IDEAS

AT Commands Interface Guide for X51

Revision: 005
Date: June 2005

PLUG IN TO THE WIRELESS WORLD

confidential © Page : 1 / 180

This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
Ce document est la propriété exclusive de WAVECOM. Il ne peut être communiqué ou divulgué à
des tiers sans son autorisation préalable.
 AT Commands Interface Guide
for x51

Revision 005h
Date 28th June 2005
Reference WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016

All rights reserved

© 2003-2004 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 1 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Overview
The aim of this document is to provide WAVECOM customers with a full
description of the AT commands associated with X51 AT software release.
This is the second release of the document for this software revision.

Trademarks

®, WAVECOM®, WISMO®, MUSE Platform®, Open ATTM and certain other

trademarks and logos appearing on this document, are filed or registered
trademarks of WAVECOM S.A. in France or in other countries. All other
company and/or product names mentioned may be filed or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 2 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Document History

Revision Date History of the evolution

001 15 July 2004 First edition for X50 AT software.

002 18 Oct 2004 Various adjustments

003 9 Dec 2004 Updates for AT X50a software release

Various presentation updates.

004 22 Feb 2005 Updates for AT X50a software: precisions related to

Q2501 modules (UART2 and battery charge
availability), WAP examples updates, +WBHV
command explanations rewriting; AT+WUSS and
AT+WMSN commands updated; AT+COPS
parameter description updated

005 31sMarch Updates for AT x51 software

2005

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 3 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Contents

1 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................... 13

1.1 Scope of this document.........................................................................13

1.2 Related documents................................................................................13
1.3 ETSI secretariat .....................................................................................14
1.4 Abbreviations and Definitions................................................................14
1.5 Presentation rules .................................................................................16

2 AT COMMANDS FEATURES .................................................................. 17

2.1 WAVECOM line settings........................................................................17

2.2 Command line .......................................................................................17
2.3 Information responses and result codes ................................................17

3 GENERAL BEHAVIORS ........................................................................... 18

3.1 SIM Insertion, SIM Removal ..................................................................18

3.2 Background initialization .......................................................................19
3.3 Length of phone numbers .....................................................................20
3.4 BAD SOFTWARE message ....................................................................20

4 GENERAL COMMANDS ......................................................................... 21

4.1 Manufacturer identification +CGMI ......................................................21

4.2 Request model identification +CGMM ..................................................22
4.3 Request revision identification +CGMR ................................................23
4.4 Product Serial Number +CGSN.............................................................23
4.5 Select TE character set +CSCS .............................................................24
4.6 WAVECOM Phonebook Character Set +WPCS .....................................25
4.7 Request IMSI +CIMI .............................................................................26
4.8 Card Identification +CCID .....................................................................27
4.9 Capabilities list +GCAP.........................................................................28
4.10 Repeat last command A/ ......................................................................28
4.11 Power off +CPOF..................................................................................29
4.12 Set phone functionality +CFUN ............................................................29

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 4 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.13 Phone activity status +CPAS ................................................................31

4.14 Report Mobile Equipment errors +CMEE ..............................................32
4.15 Keypad control +CKPD .........................................................................33
4.16 Clock Management +CCLK ...................................................................34
4.17 Alarm Management +CALA .................................................................35
4.18 Ring Melody Playback +CRMP .............................................................36
4.19 Ringer Sound Level +CRSL ...................................................................38
4.20 Generic SIM Access: +CSIM..................................................................39
4.21 Restricted SIM access +CRSM ..............................................................41
4.22 Mobile equipment control mode +CMEC ...............................................43
4.23 Indicator control +CIND.........................................................................44

5 CALL CONTROL COMMANDS................................................................ 46

5.1 Dial command D....................................................................................46

5.2 Hang-Up command H...........................................................................49
5.3 Answer a call A ....................................................................................50
5.4 Remote disconnection ...........................................................................50
5.5 Extended error report +CEER................................................................51
5.6 DTMF signals +VTD, +VTS ..................................................................52
5.7 Redial last telephone number ATDL......................................................54
5.8 Automatic dialing with DTR AT%Dn ......................................................55
5.9 Automatic answer ATS0 ......................................................................57
5.10 Incoming Call Bearer +CICB .................................................................58
5.11 Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS .......................................................59
5.12 Gain control +VGR, +VGT.....................................................................60
5.13 Microphone Mute Control +CMUT .......................................................63
5.14 Speaker & Microphone selection +SPEAKER ........................................64
5.15 Echo Cancellation +ECHO ....................................................................64
5.16 Side Tone modification +SIDET ............................................................71
5.17 Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP ...........................................................72

6 NETWORK SERVICE COMMANDS ......................................................... 73

6.1 Signal Quality +CSQ.............................................................................73

6.2 Operator selection +COPS ....................................................................74
6.3 Network registration +CREG ................................................................77
6.4 Read operator name +WOPN ...............................................................78

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 5 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6.5 Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS................................................82

6.6 Preferred operator list +CPOL ...............................................................83
6.7 Read operator name +COPN ................................................................86

7 SECURITY COMMANDS......................................................................... 87

7.1 Enter PIN +CPIN ...................................................................................87

7.2 Enter PIN2 +CPIN2 ...............................................................................90
7.3 PIN remaining attempt number +CPINC ...............................................91
7.4 Facility lock +CLCK ...............................................................................92
7.5 Change password +CPWD ...................................................................95

8 PHONEBOOK COMMANDS.................................................................... 97

8.1 Parameters definition ............................................................................97

8.2 Select phonebook memory storage +CPBS...........................................99
8.3 Read phonebook entries +CPBR .........................................................101
8.4 Write phonebook entry +CPBW..........................................................104
8.5 Find phonebook entries +CPBF ..........................................................109
8.6 Phonebook phone search +CPBP .......................................................111
8.7 Move action in phonebook +CPBN .....................................................113
8.8 Subscriber number +CNUM ...............................................................117
8.9 Avoid phonebook init +WAIP..............................................................118
8.10 Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP..........................................................119
8.11 Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM...........................................................120
8.12 Contact Selector +WCOS ....................................................................121
8.13 Create and delete a phonebook group +WPGW...................................122
8.14 Read a phonebook group +WPGR .......................................................123
8.15 Settings of a group +WPGS ................................................................125

9 SHORT MESSAGES COMMANDS ........................................................ 126

9.1 Parameters definition ..........................................................................126

9.2 Select message service +CSMS .........................................................127
9.3 New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA.........................................128
9.4 Preferred Message Storage +CPMS ....................................................131
9.5 Preferred Message Format +CMGF ....................................................133
9.6 Save Settings +CSAS .........................................................................135
9.7 Restore settings +CRES......................................................................135

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 6 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.8 Show text mode parameters +CSDH..................................................136

9.9 New message indication +CNMI ........................................................137
9.10 Read message +CMGR ......................................................................140
9.11 List message +CMGL .........................................................................142
9.12 Send message +CMGS ......................................................................144
9.13 Write Message to Memory +CMGW ..................................................145
9.14 Send Message From Storage +CMSS ................................................147
9.15 Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP ....................................................148
9.16 Delete message +CMGD ....................................................................150
9.17 Service center address +CSCA ...........................................................152
9.18 Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB ....................................153
9.19 Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM ......................................155
9.20 Message status modification +WMSC ...............................................156
9.21 Message overwriting +WMGO...........................................................157
9.22 Un-change SMS Status +WUSS..........................................................159
9.23 Copy Messages +WMCP.....................................................................160
9.24 More Messages to Send +CMMS .......................................................163

10 SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES COMMANDS.......................................... 164

10.1 Call forwarding +CCFC .......................................................................164

10.2 Call barring +CLCK .............................................................................166
10.3 Modify SS password +CPWD.............................................................167
10.4 Call waiting +CCWA...........................................................................168
10.5 Calling line identification restriction +CLIR..........................................170
10.6 Calling line identification presentation +CLIP ......................................171
10.7 Connected line identification presentation +COLP ..............................172
10.8 Advice of charge +CAOC ....................................................................174
10.9 Accumulated call meter +CACM ........................................................175
10.10 Accumulated call meter maximum +CAMM.......................................176
10.11 Price per unit and currency table +CPUC............................................177
10.12 Call related supplementary services +CHLD .......................................178
10.13 List current calls +CLCC ......................................................................179
10.14 Supplementary service notifications +CSSN .......................................181
10.15 Unstructured supplementary service data +CUSD ..............................183
10.16 Closed user group +CCUG..................................................................185

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 7 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11 DATA COMMANDS ............................................................................. 186

11.1 Using AT Commands during a data connection...................................186

11.2 Bearer type selection +CBST ..............................................................186
11.3 Select mode +FCLASS........................................................................188
11.4 Service reporting control +CR.............................................................189
11.5 Cellular result codes +CRC .................................................................190
11.6 DTE-DCE local rate reporting +ILRR ....................................................191
11.7 Radio link protocol parameters +CRLP................................................192
11.8 Others radio link parameters +DOPT ..................................................193
11.9 Select data compression %C...............................................................194
11.10 V42 bis data compression +DS ..........................................................195
11.11 V42 bis data compression report +DR ................................................196
11.12 Select data error correcting mode \N ..................................................197

12 FAX COMMANDS ................................................................................ 198

12.1 Transmit speed +FTM ........................................................................198

12.2 Receive speed +FRM..........................................................................199
12.3 HDLC transmit speed +FTH................................................................199
12.4 HDLC receive speed +FRH..................................................................200
12.5 Stop transmission and wait +FTS ......................................................200
12.6 Receive silence +FRS..........................................................................201
12.7 Setting up the PC fax application: .......................................................201

13 FAX CLASS 2 COMMANDS.................................................................. 202

13.1 Transmit Data +FDT...........................................................................202

13.2 Receive Data +FDR.............................................................................202
13.3 Transmit page punctuation +FET .......................................................203
13.4 Page transfer status parameters +FPTS .............................................203
13.5 Terminate Session +FK ......................................................................204
13.6 Page transfer bit order +FBOR............................................................204
13.7 Buffer size report +FBUF ....................................................................205
13.8 Copy quality checking +FCQ ..............................................................205
13.9 Capability to receive +FCR..................................................................206
13.10 Current sessions parameters +FDIS ...................................................207
13.11 DCE capabilities parameters +FDCC ...................................................209
13.12 Local ID string +FLID..........................................................................210

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 8 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.13 Page transfer timeout parameter +FPHCTO........................................210

13.14 Fax Class 2 indication messages .........................................................211

14 V24-V25 COMMANDS ......................................................................... 213

14.1 Fixed DTE rate +IPR ...........................................................................213

14.2 DTE-DCE character framing +ICF .......................................................215
14.3 DTE-DCE local flow control +IFC .......................................................216
14.4 Set DCD signal &C ..............................................................................218
14.5 Set DTR signal &D ..............................................................................219
14.6 Set DSR signal &S ..............................................................................220
14.7 Back to online mode O .......................................................................220
14.8 Result code suppression Q .................................................................221
14.9 DCE response format V .....................................................................222
14.10 Default configuration Z .......................................................................223
14.11 Save configuration &W .......................................................................223
14.12 Auto-tests &T .....................................................................................224
14.13 Echo E .......................................................................................225
14.14 Restore factory settings &F .................................................................225
14.15 Display configuration &V ....................................................................226
14.16 Request identification information I ....................................................227
14.17 Data / Commands Multiplexing +WMUX ............................................228

15 SPECIFIC AT COMMANDS................................................................... 230

15.1 Cell environment description +CCED ..................................................230

15.2 General Indications +WIND ................................................................233
15.3 Analog digital converters measurements +ADC .................................237
15.4 Mobile Equipment event reporting +CMER.........................................239
15.5 Read Language Preference +WLPR ....................................................241
15.6 Write Language Preference +WLPW...................................................242
15.7 Read GPIO value +WIOR ....................................................................243
15.8 Write GPIO value +WIOW ..................................................................244
15.9 Input/Output Management +WIOM....................................................245
15.10 Abort command +WAC ......................................................................248
15.11 Play tone +WTONE ............................................................................249
15.12 Play DTMF tone +WDTMF .................................................................251
15.13 WAVECOM Downloading +WDWL.....................................................252

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 9 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.14 WAVECOM Voice Rate +WVR ............................................................253

15.15 WAVECOM Data Rate +WDR ..............................................................256
15.16 Hardware Version +WHWV ................................................................257
15.17 Date of Production +WDOP................................................................258
15.18 WAVECOM Select Voice Gain +WSVG ................................................259
15.19 WAVECOM Status Request +WSTR ....................................................260
15.20 WAVECOM Scan +WSCAN .................................................................261
15.21 WAVECOM Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM ............................................262
15.22 WAVECOM 32kHz Power down Mode +W32K ...................................264
15.23 WAVECOM Change Default Melody +WCDM......................................265
15.24 WAVECOM Software version +WSSW ...............................................266
15.25 WAVECOM Custom Character Set +WCCS .........................................267
15.26 WAVECOM LoCK +WLCK ...................................................................269
15.27 CPHS command: +CPHS.....................................................................271
15.28 Unsolicited result: WAVECOM Voice Mail Indicator: +WVMI ...............275
15.29 Unsolicited result: WAVECOM diverted call indicator: +WDCI .............276
15.30 WAVECOM network operator name: +WNON .....................................277
15.31 WAVECOM CPHS information: +WCPI ................................................278
15.32 WAVECOM customer service profile: +WCSP......................................280
15.33 WAVECOM Battery Charge Management +WBCM ............................281
15.34 Unsolicited result: WAVECOM Battery Charge Indication +WBCI ........285
15.35 Features Management +WFM............................................................286
15.36 Commercial Features Management +WCFM ......................................290
15.37 WAVECOM Customer storage mirror +WMIR ....................................291
15.38 WAVECOM Change Default Player +WCDP ........................................292
15.39 WAVECOM CPHS Mail Box Number: +WMBN....................................293
15.40 WAVECOM Alternate Line Service: +WALS .........................................295
15.41 WAVECOM Open AT control command +WOPEN ..............................296
15.42 WAVECOM Reset +WRST .................................................................299
15.43 Set Standard Tone +WSST.................................................................300
15.44 WAVECOM Location +WLOC .............................................................301
15.45 WAVECOM Bus Read +WBR..............................................................304
15.46 WAVECOM Bus Write +WBW ............................................................306
15.47 WAVECOM Bus Management +WBM................................................308
15.48 WAVECOM Hang-up +WATH ............................................................314
15.49 Write IMEI +WIMEI ............................................................................315

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 10 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.50 Write IMEI SVN: +WSVN.....................................................................316

15.51 WAVECOM multi-band selection command: +WMBS .........................317
15.52 Module Serial Number +WMSN ..........................................................319
15.53 Cellular Text telephone Modem +WCTM.............................................320
15.54 Modem Behavior Configuration +WBHV .............................................321
15.55 Hardware Configuration AT+WHCNF ..................................................323
15.56 Multi-flow Management +WMFM.......................................................325
15.57 Open AT tasks resume command +WOPENRES..................................327

16 AGENDA COMMANDS ........................................................................ 328

16.1 Parameters definition ..........................................................................328

16.2 Read agenda entries +WAGR .............................................................329
16.3 Write agenda entry +WAGW ..............................................................330
16.4 Delete agenda entries +WAGD ...........................................................331

17 SIM TOOLKIT....................................................................................... 332

17.1 Overview of SIM Application ToolKit ...................................................332

17.2 Messages exchanged during a SIM ToolKit operation. ........................334
17.3 SIM TOOLKIT COMMANDS.................................................................335

18 GPRS COMMANDS ............................................................................. 353

18.1 Define PDP Context +CGDCONT .........................................................353

18.2 Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ .................................355
18.3 Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) +CGQMIN.................360
18.4 GPRS attach or detach +CGATT ..........................................................361
18.5 PDP context activate or deactivate +CGACT........................................362
18.6 Enter data state +CGDATA..................................................................364
18.7 GPRS mobile station class +CGCLASS ................................................365
18.8 Select service for MO SMS messages +CGSMS ..................................367
18.9 GPRS event reporting +CGEREP ..........................................................368
18.10 GPRS network registration status +CGREG .........................................370
18.11 Request GPRS IP service 'D' .................................................................372
18.12 Network requested PDP context activation..........................................373
18.13 Automatic response to a network request for PDP context activation
+CGAUTO 374
18.14 Manual response to a network request for PDP context activation
+CGANS 376

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 11 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.15 Show PDP address +CGPADDR ..........................................................378

18.16 Cellular result codes +CRC ..................................................................379
18.17 Service reporting control +CR.............................................................380
18.18 Extended error report +CEER..............................................................381
18.19 GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS.........................................382
18.20 Full AT GPRS commands examples.....................................................386

19 OTHER AT COMMANDS ...................................................................... 388

19.1 V.25 ter recommendation ....................................................................388

19.2 GSM 07.05 recommendation ..............................................................388
19.3 GSM 07.07 recommendation ..............................................................388

20 CODES AND VALUES........................................................................... 389

21 EXAMPLES .......................................................................................... 390

22 TECHNICAL APPENDIXES .................................................................... 391

23 COMMAND EXECUTION AND DEPENDENCE TO SIM........................... 392

24 INTEROPERABILITY ............................................................................. 393

25 ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR AT COMMANDS AND RESPONSES .......... 394

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 12 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

1 Introduction

1.1 Scope of this document

This document describes the AT-command based messages exchanged

between an application and the WAVECOM products in order to manage GSM
related events or
services.

Wavecom Module

External AT
Application

Send AT command

Serial Link
Receive AT response

1.2 Related documents

This interface specification is based on the following recommendations:

[1] ETSI GSM 07.05: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);
Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast
Service (CBS)

[2] ETSI GSM 07.07: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);
AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment (ME)

[3] ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and
control

[4] ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 13 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Technical implementation of the Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point

(PP)

[5] ETSI GSM 03.38: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);
Alphabets and language-specific information

[6] ETSI GSM 04.80: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2):
Mobile radio interface layer 3, Supplementary service specification, Formats
and coding

[6] 3GPP 05.02: 3rd Generation Partnership Project ; Technical Specification

Group GSM/EDGE- Radio Access Network ; Multiplexing and multiple access
on the radio path – 3GPP TS 05.02 V6.9.2 (2001-04)

1.3 ETSI secretariat

The following addresses may be of use in obtaining the latest GSM

recommendations:
Postal address: F-06921 Sophia Antipolis CEDEX – France
Office address: 650 Route des Lucioles – Sophia Antipolis – Valbonne – France
e-mail: [email protected]
Tel: +33 4 92 94 42 00
Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16

1.4 Abbreviations and Definitions

1.4.1 Abbreviations
ADN Abbreviated Dialing Number (Phonebook)
AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate
AMR-FR AMR Full Rate (full rate speech version 3)
AMR-HR AMR Half Rate (half rate speech version 3)
AOC Advice Of Charge
ASCII Standard characters table (1 byte coding)
AT Modem Hayes commands prefix (for “ATtention”)
BCCH Broadcast Channel
BER Bit Error Rate
CLI Client Line Identification
CSD (GSM data call)
CTS Clear To Send signal
CUG Closed User Group

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 14 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

DTR Data Terminal Ready
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programming Only Memory
EFR Enhanced Full Rate (full rate speech version 2)
E-ONS Enhanced Operator Name Service
FDN Fixed Dialing Number (Phonebook)
FR Full Rate (full rate speech version 1)
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GSM Global System for Mobile communication
HR Half Rate (half rate speech version 1)
IMEI International Mobile Equipment Identity
IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity
MCC Mobile Country Code
ME Mobile Equipment
MNC Mobile Network Code
MOC Mobile Originated Call (outgoing call)
MS Mobile Station
MTC Mobile Terminated Call (incoming call)
NITZ Network Information and Time Zone
OPL Operator PLMN List
PC Personal Computer
PIN Personal Identification Number
PLMN Public Land Mobile Networks
PNN PLMN Network Name
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PUK PIN Unlock Key
RIL Radio Interface Layer
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication
RTS Ready To Send signal
SIM Subscriber Information Module
SMS Short Message Service
SPN Service Provider Name
TE Terminal Equipment
UCS2 Characters table (2 bytes coding)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 15 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

1.4.2 Definitions
The words “Mobile Station” (MS) or “Mobile Equipment” (ME) are used for
mobile terminals supporting GSM services.
Terminal Equipment is the Man-Machine Interface of a GSM device (modem or
handset). A TE can be a handset MMI or the AT command line interface.

WAVECOM product

User TE ME GSM network

A call from a GSM mobile station to the PSTN is called a “mobile originated
call” (MOC) or “outgoing call”, and a call from a fixed network to a GSM mobile
station is called a “mobile terminated call” (MTC) or “incoming call”.
In this document, the word “product” refers to any WAVECOM product
supporting the AT commands interface.

1.5 Presentation rules

In the following, the AT commands are presented with as much precision as

possible, through three paragraphs. A “Description” paragraph provides
general information on the AT command (or response) behavior. A “Syntax”
paragraph describes the way to use it, the possible answers, through a
readable format. A “Defined values” paragraph provides parameters values, as
well for the AT command as for the corresponding responses.
Schemas are provided where necessary.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 16 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

2 AT commands features

2.1 WAVECOM line settings

A serial link handler is set with the following default values (factory settings):
o speed according to customer choice at order time,
o 8 bits data,
o 1 stop bit,
o no parity,
o RTS/CTS flow control.
Please use the +IPR, +IFC and +ICF commands to change these settings.

2.2 Command line

Commands always start with AT (which means ATtention) and finish with a
<CR> character.

2.3 Information responses and result codes

Responses start and end with <CR><LF> (except for the ATV0 DCE response
format) and the ATQ1 (result code suppression) commands.
• If command syntax is incorrect, the “ERROR” string is returned,.
• If command syntax is correct but transmitted with wrong parameters,
the +CME ERROR: <Err> or +CMS ERROR: <SmsErr> strings is returned
with adequate error codes if CMEE was previously set to 1. By default,
CMEE is set to 0, and the error message is only “ERROR”.
• If the command line has been executed successfully, an “OK” string is
returned.
In some cases, such as “AT+CPIN?” or (unsolicited) incoming events, the
product does not return the “OK” string as a response.
In the following examples <CR> and <CR><LF> are intentionally omitted.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 17 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

3 General behaviors

3.1 SIM Insertion, SIM Removal

SIM card Insertion and Removal procedures are supported. There are software
functions relying on positive reading of the hardware SIM detect pin. This pin
state (open/closed) is permanently monitored.
When the SIM detect pin indicates that a card is present in the SIM connector,
the product tries to set up a logical SIM session. The logical SIM session will
be set up or not depending on whether the detected card is a SIM Card or not.
The AT+CPIN? command delivers the following responses:

• If the SIM detect pin indicates “absent”, the response to AT+CPIN? is

“+CME ERROR 10” (SIM not inserted).
• If the SIM detect pin indicates “present”, and the inserted card is a SIM
card, the response to AT+CPIN? is “+CPIN: xxx” depending on SIM PIN
state.
• If the SIM detect pin indicates “present”, and the inserted card is not a
SIM card, the response to AT+CPIN? is “+CME ERROR 10”.
• These last two states are not provided immediately due to background
initialization. Between the hardware SIM detect pin indicating “present”
and the final results, the AT+CPIN? sends “+CME ERROR: 515” (Please
wait, init in progress).

When the SIM-detect pin indicates card absence, and if a SIM Card was
previously inserted, an IMSI detach procedure is performed, all user data is
removed from the product (Phonebooks, SMS etc.). The product then switches
to emergency mode.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 18 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

3.2 Background initialization

After entering the PIN (Personal Identification Number), some SIM user data
files are loaded into the product (phonebooks, SMS status, etc.). Please be
aware that it might take some time to read a large phonebook.
The AT+CPIN? command response occurs after the PIN checking. After this
response user data is loaded in background. This means that some data may
not be available just when PIN entry is confirmed by ’OK’. The reading of
phonebooks will then be refused by “+CME ERROR: 515” or “+CMS ERROR:
515” meaning, “Please wait, service is not available yet, init in progress”.

This type of answer may be sent by the product at several points:

• when trying to execute another AT command before the previous one is
completed (before response),
• when switching from ADN to FDN (or FDN to ADN) and trying to read
the relevant phonebook immediately,
• when asking for +CPIN? status immediately after SIM insertion and
before the product has determined if the inserted card is a valid SIM
card.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 19 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

3.3 Length of phone numbers

Phone numbers can be made of up to 60 digits. The 20 first digits are stored in
SIM, in the phonebook file (EFADN, EFFDN or EFLND) corresponding to the selected
phonebook. The next digits are stored in other extension SIM files (EFEXT1 or
EFEXT2).
As an example:
Number of digits Nb of records in EFADN Nb of records in EFEXT1
1 to 20 1 0
21 to 40 1 1
41 to 60 1 2

If there is no more free records in the EF(EXT1), the behavior is:

-> if user tries to store an entry which number exceeds 20 digits: +CME
ERROR: 20
-> if user tries to dial a number which number exceeds 20 digits: +CME
ERROR: 20

As the maximum length for the numbers (in ADN, FDN, LND) phonebooks is 60
digits:
-> if user tries to dial a number which number exceeds 60 digits: +CME
ERROR: 3

Before to perform a call, the number of free records in the EFEXT1 is checked, to
be able to store the dialed number.
-> If there are free records left, the call is setup.
-> otherwise, +CME ERROR: 20 error in returned (Memory full).
Please refer to Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 for more details.

3.4 BAD SOFTWARE message

Wavecom module is designed to be downloaded with a specific software.

When the user has to take in charge the software download, it is necessary to
be sure that the compatible software is downloaded. If the software
downloaded is either corrupted or non-compatible, the message BAD
SOFTWARE is displayed. To remedy, reinstall the initial specific software
version.
Remark: If the module is still displaying BAD SOFTWARE, only Wavecom or a
distributor can recover it.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 20 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4 General commands

4.1 Manufacturer identification +CGMI

4.1.1 Description
This command gives the manufacturer identification.

4.1.2 Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CGMI

Command Possible responses

AT+CGMI WAVECOM MODEM
OK
Note: Get manufacturer identification Note: Command valid, WAVECOM modem

4.1.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 21 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.2 Request model identification +CGMM

4.2.1 Description
This command is used to get the supported frequency bands. With multi-band
products the response may be a combination of different bands.

4.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CGMM

Command Possible responses

AT+CGMM MULTIBAND 900E 1800
OK
Note: Get hardware version Note: Multi-band: GSM 900 MHz extended band and
DCS 1800 (default configuration).
AT+CGMM 900E
Note: Get hardware version OK
Note: 900 Extended
AT+CGMM 1800
Note: Get hardware version OK
Note: DCS
AT+CGMM 1900
Note: Get hardware version OK
Note: PCS
AT+CGMM G850
Note: Get hardware version OK
Note: GSM 850
AT+CGMM MULTIBAND G850 1900
Note: Get hardware version OK
Note: Multi-band: GSM 850 and PCS

4.2.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 22 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.3 Request revision identification +CGMR

4.3.1 Description
This command is used to get the revised software version.

4.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CGMR

Command Possible responses

AT+CGMR 440_09gm.Q2406A 1266500 020503 17:06
OK
Note: Get software version Note: Software release 4.40, generated on the 05th of
February 2003

4.3.3 Defined values

No parameter

4.4 Product Serial Number +CGSN

4.4.1 Description
This command allows the user application to get the IMEI (International Mobile
Equipment Identity, 15 digits number) of the product.

4.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CGSN

Command Possible responses

AT+CGSN 012345678901234
OK
Note: Get the IMEI Note: IMEI read from EEPROM
AT+CGSN +CME ERROR: 22
Note: Get the IMEI Note: IMEI not found in EEPROM

4.4.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 23 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.5 Select TE character set +CSCS

4.5.1 Description
This command informs the ME which character set is used by the TE. The ME
can convert each character of entered or displayed strings. This is used to
send, read or write short messages. See also +WPCS for the phonebooks’
character sets.

4.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSCS=<Character Set>

Command Possible responses

AT+CSCS=”GSM” OK
Note: GSM default alphabet Note: Command valid
AT+CSCS=”PCCP437” OK
Note: PC character set code page 437 Note: Command valid
AT+CSCS=? +CSCS:
(“GSM”,”PCCP437”,”CUSTOM”,”HEX”)
OK
Note: Get possible values
Note: Possible values

4.5.3 Defined values

<Character Set>
“GSM” GSM default alphabet.
“PCCP437” PC character set code page 437.
“CUSTOM” User defined character set (cf. +WCCS
command).
“HEX” Hexadecimal mode. No character set used ; the
user can read or write hexadecimal values.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 24 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.6 WAVECOM Phonebook Character Set +WPCS

4.6.1 Description
This specific command informs the ME which character set is used by the TE
for the phonebooks and the agenda. The ME can convert each character of
entered or displayed strings. This is used to read or write phonebook entries
(parameters <text>, <address> and <mail>) and <description> parameter of
agenda entries. See also +CSCS in §4.5 for the short messages character sets.

4.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WPCS=<Character Set>

Command Possible responses

AT+WPCS=”TRANSPARENT” OK
Note: Transparent mode Note: Command valid
AT+WPCS=”CUSTOM” OK
Note: Custom character set Note: Command valid
AT+WPCS=? +WPCS: (“TRANSPARENT”,”HEX”,”CUSTOM”)
OK
Note: Get possible values Note: Possible values

4.6.3 Defined values

<Character Set>
“TRANSPARENT” Transparent mode. The strings are displayed and
entered as they are stored in SIM or in ME.
“CUSTOM” User defined character set (cf. +WCCS command).
“HEX” Hexadecimal mode. No character set used ; the
user can read or write hexadecimal values.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 25 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.7 Request IMSI +CIMI

4.7.1 Description
This command is used to read and identify the IMSI (International Mobile
Subscriber Identity) of the SIM card. The PIN may need to be entered before
reading the IMSI.

4.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CIMI

Command Possible responses

AT+CIMI 208200120320598
Note: Read the IMSI OK
Note: IMSI value (15 digits), starting with MCC (3 digits) /
MNC (2 digits, 3 for PCS 1900)
See appendix 20 Codes and values for MCC / MNC description.

4.7.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 26 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.8 Card Identification +CCID

4.8.1 Description
This command orders the product to read the EF-CCID file on the SIM card.

4.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CCID

Command Possible responses

AT+CCID +CCID: “123456789AB111213141”
Note: Get card ID OK
Note: EF-CCID is present, hexadecimal format
AT+CCID? + CCID: “123456789AB111213141”
Note: Get current value OK
Note: Same result as +CCID
AT+CCID=? OK
Note: Get possible value Note: No parameter but this command is valid

Note: if there is no EF-CCID file present on the SIM, the +CCID answer will not
be sent, but the OK message will be returned.

4.8.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 27 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.9 Capabilities list +GCAP

4.9.1 Description
This command gets the complete list of capabilities.

4.9.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+GCAP

Command Possible responses

AT+GCAP +GCAP: +CGSM, +FCLASS
OK
Note: Get capabilities list Note: Supports GSM and FAX commands

4.9.3 Defined values

No parameter

4.10 Repeat last command A/

4.10.1 Description
This command repeats the previous command. Only the A/ command itself
cannot be repeated.

4.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: A/

Command Possible responses

A/
Note: Repeat last command

4.10.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 28 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.11 Power off +CPOF

4.11.1 Description
This specific command stops the GSM software stack as well as the hardware
layer, or the module activity. The AT+CFUN=0 command is equivalent to
+CPOF.

4.11.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPOF[=1]

Command Possible responses

AT+CPOF OK
Note: Stop GSM stack Note: Command valid
AT+CPOF=1 OK
Note: Stop the module Note: Command valid

Note: After AT+CPOF=1, the module will not respond to AT commands. To

reset it, use the hard reset.

4.11.3 Defined values

No parameter

4.12 Set phone functionality +CFUN

4.12.1 Description
This command selects the mobile station’s level of functionality.
When the application wants to stop the product with a power off, or if the
application wants to force the product to execute an IMSI DETACH procedure,
then it must send:
AT+CFUN=0 (equivalent to AT+CPOF)
This command executes an IMSI DETACH and makes a backup copy of some
internal parameters in SIM and in EEPROM. The SIM card cannot then be
accessed.
If the mobile equipment is not powered off by the application after this
command has been sent, a re-start command (AT+CFUN=1) will have to
issued to restart the whole GSM registration process.
If the mobile equipment is turned off after this command, then a power on will
automatically restart the whole GSM process.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 29 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

The AT+CFUN=1 command restarts the entire GSM stack and GSM
functionality: a complete software reset is performed. All parameters are reset
to their previous values if AT&W was not used.
If you write entries in the phonebook (+CPBW) and then reset the product
directly (AT+CFUN=1, with no previous AT+CFUN=0 command), some entries
may not be written (the SIM task does not have enough time to write entries in
the SIM card).
In addition, the OK response will be sent at the last baud rate defined by the
+IPR command. With the autobauding mode the response can be at a different
baud rate, it is therefore preferable to save the defined baud rate with AT&W
before directly sending the AT+CFUN=1 command.

4.12.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CFUN=<functionality level>

Command Possible responses

AT+CFUN? +CFUN: 1
Note: Ask for current functionality level OK
Note: Full functionality
AT+CFUN=0 OK
Note: Set minimum functionality, IMSI Note: Command valid
detach procedure
AT+CFUN=1 OK
Note: Set the full functionality mode with a Note: Command valid
complete software reset

4.12.3 Defined values

<functionality level>
0: Set minimum functionality, IMSI detach procedure
1: Set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 30 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.13 Phone activity status +CPAS

4.13.1 Description
This command returns the activity status of the mobile equipment.

4.13.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPAS

Command Possible responses

AT+CPAS +CPAS: <pas>
Note: Current activity status OK

4.13.3 Defined values

<pas>
0 ready (allow commands from TA/TE)
1 unavailable (does not allow commands)
2 unknown
3 ringing (ringer is active)
4 call in progress
5 asleep (low functionality)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 31 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.14 Report Mobile Equipment errors +CMEE

4.14.1 Description
This command disables or enables the use of the “+CME ERROR: <xxx>” or
“+CMS ERROR:<xxx>” result code instead of simply “ERROR”. See appendix
19.1 for +CME ERROR result codes description and appendix 19.2 for +CMS
ERROR result codes.

4.14.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CMEE=<error reporting flag>

Command Possible responses

AT+CMEE=? +CMEE: (0,1)
OK
AT+CMEE=0 OK
Note: Disable ME error reports, use only « ERROR »
AT+CMEE=1 OK
Note: Enable «+CME ERROR: <xxx>» or
«+CMS ERROR: <xxx>»
AT+CMEE? +CMEE: 1
OK

4.14.3 Defined values

<error reporting flag>
0: Disable ME error reports, use only « ERROR »
1: Enable «+CME ERROR: <xxx>» or «+CMS ERROR: <xxx>»

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 32 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.15 Keypad control +CKPD

4.15.1 Description
This command emulates the ME keypad by sending each keystroke as a
character in a <keys> string.
The supported GSM sequences are listed in the appendix.
If emulation fails, a +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
If emulation succeeds, the result depends on the GSM sequence activated:
Note: In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the sequences
concerning “call forwarding” are allowed only if the entire sequence is written
in the FDN.

4.15.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CKPD=<keys>

Command Possible responses

AT+CKPD=”*#21#” +CCFC: 0,7
Note: Check every call forwarding status
AT+CKPD=”1234” +CME ERROR 3
Note: Sequence not allowed

4.15.3 Defined values

<keys>
Keyboard sequence: string of the following characters (0-9,*,#).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 33 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.16 Clock Management +CCLK

4.16.1 Description
This command is used to set or get the current date and time of the ME real-
time clock.

4.16.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CCLK=<date and time string>

Command Possible responses

AT+CCLK=”00/06/09,17:33:00” OK
th
Note: set date to June 9 , 2000, and time Note: Date/Time stored
to 5:33pm
AT+CCLK=”00/13/13,12:00:00” +CME ERROR 3
Note: Incorrect month entered
AT+CCLK? +CCLK: “00/06/09,17:34:23”
Note: Get current date and time OK
Note: current date is June 9th, 2000
current time is 5:34:23 pm

4.16.3 Defined values

<date and time string>
String format for date/time is: “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss”.
Valid years are 98 (for 1998) to 97 (for 2097). The seconds field is not
mandatory. Default date/time is “98/01/01,00:00:00” (January 1st, 1998 /
midnight).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 34 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.17 Alarm Management +CALA

4.17.1 Description
This command is used to set alarms date/time in the ME.
The maximum number of alarms is 16.
Note: The date/time should be already set with AT+CCLK command before
using AT+CALA.

4.17.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CALA=<date and time string> (set alarm)
AT+CALA=””,<index> (delete alarm)

Command Possible responses

AT+CALA=”00/06/09,07:30” OK
th
Note: set an alarm for June 9 , 2000 at Note: Alarm stored
7:30 am
AT+CALA=”99/03/05,13:00:00” +CME ERROR 3
th
Note: set an alarm for March 5 , 1999 at Note: Invalid alarm (date/time expired)
1:00 pm
AT+CALA? +CALA: “00/06/08,15:25:00”,1
+CALA: “00/06/09,07:30:00”,2
Note: list all alarms +CALA: “00/06/10,23:59:00”,3
Note: three alarms are set (index 1, 2, 3)
+CALA: “00/06/08,15:25:00”,1
Note: an alarm occurs (index 1)
AT+CALA=””,3 OK
Note: delete alarm index 3 Note: Alarm index 3 deleted
AT+CALA? +CALA: “00/06/09,07:30:00”,2
Note: list all alarms Note: Only one alarm (index 2)

4.17.3 Defined values

<date and time string>
String format for alarms: “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss” (see +CCLK).
Note: Seconds are taken into account.
<index>
offset in the alarm list, range 1 to 16.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 35 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.18 Ring Melody Playback +CRMP

4.18.1 Description
This command allows a melody to be played. All melodies are manufacturer
defined.
For incoming voice, data or fax calls, 10 manufacturer-defined melodies can be
played back (in a loop).
For an incoming short message, 2 manufacturer-defined sounds can be played
back (once). Melody #1: short beep / Melody #2: long beep.
Note: loop melodies (for voice/data/fax call) must be stopped by a +CRMP
command with the <index> field set to 0 (example: +CRMP=0,,,0).
When the <volume> parameter is given, this overwrites the <sound level>
value of the +CRSL command. If the <volume> parameter is not given, the
<sound level> value of +CRSL is used as default value.

4.18.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CRMP=<call type>[,<volume>,<type>,<index>]

Command Possible responses

AT+CRMP=0,7,0,2 OK
Note: Play voice call melody index 2 with volume Note: Melody Playback.
level 7.
AT+CRMP=0,,,0 OK
Note: Stop the melody. Note: The melody is stopped.
AT+CRMP=? +CRMP: (0-3),(0-15),0,(0-10)
Note: supported parameters OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 36 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.18.3 Defined values

<call type>
0 Incoming voice call
1 Incoming data call
2 Incoming fax call
3 Incoming short message (SMS)
<volume>
0 Min volume
…
6 Default volume
15 Max volume
<type>
0 Manufacturer Defined (default)
<index>
0 Stop Melody Playback
1-10 Melody ID (default: 1)
Note: range of values is 1 to 10 for voice/data/fax call type, and 1 to 2 for
short messages.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 37 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.19 Ringer Sound Level +CRSL

4.19.1 Description
This command is used to set/get the sound level of the ringer on incoming
calls. The set command changes the default <volume> value of the +CRMP
command.

4.19.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CRSL=<sound level>

Command Possible responses

AT+CRSL=0 OK
Note: Set volume to Min. Note: Current ring playing with Min. volume.
AT+CRSL=15 OK
Note: Set volume to Max. Note: Current ring playing with Max. volume.
AT+CRSL? +CRSL: 15
OK
Note: get current ringer sound level Note: Current level is 15 (max.)
AT+CRSL=? +CRSL: (0-15)
Note: supported parameters OK

4.19.3 Defined values

<sound level>
0 Min volume
6 Default volume (default)
15 Max volume

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 38 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.20 Generic SIM Access: +CSIM

4.20.1 Description
This command allows a direct control of the SIM by a distant application on
the TE. The <command> is sent without any modification to the SIM. In the
same manner the SIM <response> is sent back by the ME as it is.
The user shall then take care of processing SIM information within the frame
specified by GSM as specified in GSM 11.11(or 3GPP TS 51.011).
If operation mode is not allowed by the ME, +CME ERROR: <error> is returned.
Between two successive +CSIM commands, there is no locking of the interface
between the SIM and the GSM application. Since in this situation some
command types and parameters can modify wrong SIM ’s files , some
operations, described below, are not allowed for CSIM command. However, it
is possible to process them with the CRSM command.

4.20.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSIM=<length>,<command>

Command Possible responses

AT+CSIM=<length>,<command> +CSIM: <length>,<response>
+CME ERROR: <err>
AT+CSIM? OK
AT+CSIM=? OK

4.20.3 Defined values

<length>: integer type
Length of the characters that are sent to TE in <command> or
<response> (two times the actual length of the command or response).
For command sent to TE, This value must be in the range [ 10 – 522 ],
else a CME_ERROR=3 is returned.
<command>: hexadecimal type
Command passed on by the MT to the SIM in the format as described in
GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011) (hexadecimal character format; refer
+CSCS)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 39 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Second Byte Value not supported:

Due to the absence of locking, a CME_ERROR=3 is returned for the
following instructions ( See CRSM commands):

• D6 : UPDATE BINARY
• DC : UPDATE RECORD
• 32 : INCREASE
• 44 : REHABILITATE
• 04 : INVALIDATE
• 88 : RUN GSM ALGORITHM
• 20 : VERIFY CHV
• 24 : CHANGE CHV
• 26 : DISABLE CHV
• 28 : ENABLE CHV
• 2C : UNBLOCK CHV
• FA : SLEEP
• C0 : GET RESPONSE

Second Byte Value warning:

Due to the absence of locking, the right response may not be returned for
the following instructions (See CRSM commands).

• C2 : ENVELOPE
• A2 : SEEK
• A4 : SELECT

Fifth Byte Value Restriction:

For the following instructions ( Second Byte ):

• A4 : SELECT
• 10 : TERMINAL PROFILE
• C2 : ENVELOPE
• 14 : TERMINAL RESPONSE
• A2 : SEEK
the user must make sure that the value of the fifth Byte of the instruction
corresponds of the length of bytes (data starting from 6th byte) which
follow it.
The value of the Fifth Byte must be equal of the value: <length>/2 – 5,
else the command is not send to the SIM and CME_ERROR=3 is returned.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 40 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<error>: integer type

3: Wrong format or parameters of the command
13: SIM no response
<response>: hexadecimal type
Response to the command passed on by the SIM to the MT in the format
as described in GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011) (hexadecimal character
format; refer +CSCS)

4.21 Restricted SIM access +CRSM

4.21.1 Description
By using this command instead of Generic SIM Access +CSIM TE application
has easier but more limited access to the SIM database. This command
transmits to the MT the SIM <command> and its required parameters.
As response to the command, MT sends the actual SIM information
parameters and response data. MT error result code +CME ERROR may be
returned when the command cannot be passed to the SIM, but failure in the
execution of the command in the SIM is reported in <sw1> and <sw2>
parameters.
As for the CSIM command , there is no locking between two successive
commands. The user should be aware of the precedence of the GSM
application commands to the TE commands.

4.21.2 Syntax
Command syntax:
AT+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid>[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>]]]

Command Possible responses

+CRSM=<command>[,<fileid> +CRSM: <sw1>,<sw2>[,<response>]

[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>[,<data>]]] +CME ERROR: <err>
AT+CRSM? OK
AT+CRSM=? OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 41 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.21.3 Defined values

<command>: integer type
Command passed on by the MT to the SIM; refer GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS
51.011):
176 READ BINARY
178 READ RECORD
192 GET RESPONSE
242 STATUS
all other values are reserved and the command will return +CME
ERROR=3
NOTE 1: The MT internally executes all commands necessary for selecting the
desired file, before performing the actual command.
<fileid>: integer type
This is the identifier of a elementary data file on SIM. Mandatory for every
command except STATUS.
NOTE 2: The range of valid file identifiers depends on the actual SIM and is
defined in GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011). Optional files may not be present
at all. This value must be in the range [0 – 65535] else a CME_ERROR=3 is
returned.
<P1>, <P2>, <P3>: integer type
Parameters passed on by the MT to the SIM. These parameters are
mandatory for every command, except GET RESPONSE and STATUS. The
values are described in GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011).
<data>: hexadecimal type
information which shall be written to the SIM (hexadecimal character
format; refer +CSCS).
<sw1>, <sw2>: integer type
Information from the SIM about the execution of the actual command.
These parameters are delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or
failed execution of the command.
<response>: hexadecimal type
response of a successful completion of the command previously issued
(hexadecimal character format; refer +CSCS). STATUS and GET
RESPONSE return data, which gives information about the current
elementary data field. This information includes the type of file and its size
(refer GSM 11.11 (or 3GPP TS 51.011)). After READ BINARY or READ
RECORD command the requested data will be returned.
<error>: integer type
3: Wrong format or parameters of the command
13: SIM no response

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 42 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.22 Mobile equipment control mode +CMEC

4.22.1 Description
This command selects the equipment which operates ME keypad, writes to ME
display and sets ME indicators. If operation mode is not allowed by the ME,
+CME ERROR: <err> is returned

4.22.2 Syntax
Command Syntax: AT+CMEC=[<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>]]]
Response syntax: +CMEC: <keyp>,<disp>,<ind>

Command Possible responses

AT+CMEC=[<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>]]] +CME ERROR: <err>

AT+CMEC=[<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>]]] OK
AT+CMEC? +CMEC: 2,0,0
OK
AT+CMEC=? +CMEC: (2),(0),(0)
OK
Note: no change allowed

4.22.3 Defined values:

<keyp>:
0: ME can be operated only through its keypad (execute command of
+CKPD cannot be used)
1: ME can be operated only from TE (with command +CKPD)
2: ME can be operated from both ME keypad and TE
<disp>:
0: only ME can write to its display (command +CDIS can only be used to
read the display)
1: only TE can write to ME display (with command +CDIS)
2: ME display can be written by both ME and TE
<ind>:
0: only ME can set the status of its indicators (command +CIND can only
be used to read the indicators)
1: only TE can set the status of ME indicators (with command +CIND)
2: ME indicators can be set by both ME and TE

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 43 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.23 Indicator control +CIND

4.23.1 Description
This command is used to read or set the values of ME indicators. If ME does
not allow setting of indicators or ME is not currently reachable, an error code is
returned.

4.23.2 Syntax
Command Syntax: AT+CIND=[<ind>[,<ind>[,…]]]
Response syntax:
+CIND: <ind>[,<ind>[,…]] or
+CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)) [,(<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s)) [,…]]

Command Possible responses

AT+CIND=[<ind>[,<ind>[,…]]] +CME ERROR: <err>

Note: ME not reachable
AT+CIND? +CIND: <ind>[,<ind>[,…]]
OK
Note: read ME indicators current
values
AT+CIND? +CIND: 2,2,1,0,0,0,0
AT+CIND=? +CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s))[,(<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s))
[,…]]
Note: read ME indicators possible
values OK

AT+CIND? +CIND: 1,2,1,1,0,0,0

Note: battchg:1 – max=5, signal:2 – max=5,
service:1 - we are registered on the network,
message:1 - a SMS has been received, call:0 - no
call in progress, roam:0 - not roaming, smsfull:0 -
SIM card is not full of SMS
AT+CIND=? +CIND: ("battchg",(0-5)),("signal",(0-5)),
("service",(0-1)), ("message",(0-1)), ("call",(0-1)),
("roam",(0-1)), ("smsfull",(0-2))
Note: read possible value for ME
indicators OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 44 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

4.23.3 Defined values

<ind> integer type value, which shall be in range of corresponding <descr>:
0: indicator is OFF or in state which can be identified as “OFF” state
1: indicator is ON or in a state that is more substantial than “OFF” state
2: this value is more substantial than 1, and so on.
Note: If the indicator is a simple ON/OFF style element, it has values 0 and 1.

<descr>:
"battchg": battery charge level (0 - 5)
"signal": signal quality (0 - 5)
"service": service availability (0 - 1)
"message": message received (0 - 1)
"call": call in progress (0 - 1)
"roam": roaming indicator (0 - 1)
"smsfull": SMS memory storage status in the MT (0 - 2)
0: memory locations are available
1: memory full
2: one SMS has been received in Service Center (SC) but the sms
storage where this SMS tried to be stored is full.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 45 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5 Call Control commands

5.1 Dial command D

5.1.1 Description
The ATD command is used to set a voice, data or fax call. As per GSM 02.30,
the dial command also controls supplementary services.
For a data or a fax call, the application sends the following ASCII string to the
product (the bearer must be previously selected with the +CBST command):
ATD<nb> where <nb> is the destination phone number.
Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data
call) is not supported.
For a voice call, the application sends the following ASCII string to the product:
(the bearer may be selected previously, if not a default bearer is used).
ATD<nb>; where <nb> is the destination phone number.
Emergency calls
The following Emergency Numbers are available without a SIM card :
000, 08, 110, 112, 118, 119, 911 and 999.
The following Emergency Numbers are available with a SIM card:
• when EF_ECC file is missing from SIM: 112 and 911
when SIM includes an EF_ECC file: 112, 911 and any Emergency Numbers
available in the EF_ECC file
Please note that for an international number, the local international prefix does
not need to be set (usually 00) but does need to be replaced by the ‘+’
character.
Example: to set up a voice call to WAVECOM offices from another country, the
AT command is: “ATD+33146290800;”
Note that some countries may have specific numbering rules for their GSM
handset numbering.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 46 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

The response to the ATD command is one of the following:

Verbose result code Numeric code Description

(with ATV0
set)
OK 0 if the call succeeds, for voice call only
10, 11, 12, 13, if the call succeeds, for data calls only,
CONNECT <speed> 14, 15 <speed> takes the value negotiated by the
product.
7 If the called party is already in
BUSY
communication
8 If no hang up is detected after a fixed
NO ANSWER
network time-out
3 Call setup failed or remote user release. Use
NO CARRIER the AT+CEER command to know the failure
cause

Direct dialing from a phonebook (stored in the SIM card) can be performed
with the following command:
ATD> <index>; to call <index> from the selected phonebook (by the
+CPBS command)
ATD> “BILL”; to call “BILL” from the selected phonebook
ATD> mem <index> (mem is “SM”,”LD”,”MC”,”ME”,”RC”,”MT” or “SN”,
see +CPBS command) allows direct dialing from a phonebook number. Does
not function with “ON” mem.

5.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATD<nb>[<I>][;]
ATD>[<mem>]<index>[<I>][;]
ATD>[<mem>]<name>[<I>][;]

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBS? +CPBS:”SM”,8,10
Note: Which phonebook is selected ? Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 8
locations are used and 10 locations are
available
ATD>SM6; OK
Note: Call index 6 from ADN phonebook Note: Call succeeds

When the FDN phonebook has been locked, only numbers beginning with the
digits of FDN phonebook entries can be called.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 47 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

For example, if “014629” is entered in the FDN phonebook all the phone
numbers beginning with these 6 digits can be called.
The CLIR supplementary service subscription can be overridden for this call
only.
“I” means “invocation” (restrict CLI presentation).
“i” means “suppression” (allow CLI presentation).
Control of CUG supplementary service information by “G” or “g” is allowed for
this call only. The index and info values set with the +CCUG command are
used.
An outgoing call attempt could be refused if the AOC service is active and
credit has expired (NO CARRIER).
When trying to set up an outgoing call while there is an active call, the active
call is first put on hold, then the call set up is carried out.
As per GSM 02.30, GSM sequences may be controlled using dial commands.
These sequences can contain “*”, “#”, but “;” is forbidden.
If the sequence is not supported or fails, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning
call forwarding are allowed only if there are written in the FDN.
See paragraph 20 Codes and values to have the list of supported sequences.

Command Possible responses

ATD*#21# +CCFC: 0,7

Note: Check any call forwarding status Note: No call forwarding
ATD**61*+33146290800**25# OK
Note: Register call forwarding on no reply, Note: done
with no reply timer fixed at 25 s.
ATD*2# +CME ERROR 3
Note: Bad sequence

5.1.3 Defined values

<nb>
destination phone number
<I> (optional parameter)
“I” means “invocation” (restrict CLI presentation).
“i” means “suppression” (allow CLI presentation).
<mem>
phonebook (one of “SM”,”LD”,”MC”,”ME”,”RC”,”MT” or “SN”). A default
value can be selected by +CPBS command.
<index>
call number at indicated offset from the phonebook selected by the
+CPBS command

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 48 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<name>
call number corresponding to given name from the phonebook selected by
the +CPBS command

5.2 Hang-Up command H

5.2.1 Description
The ATH (or ATH0) command is used by the application to disconnect the
remote user. In the case of multiple calls, all calls are released (active, on-hold
and waiting calls).
The specific WAVECOM ATH1 command has been appended to disconnect the
current outgoing call, only in dialing or alerting state (i.e. ATH1 can be used
only after the ATD command, and before its terminal response (OK, NO
CARRIER, ...). It can be useful in the case of multiple calls.

5.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATH<n>

Command Possible responses

ATH OK
Note: Ask for disconnection Note: Every call, if any, are released
ATH1 OK
Note: Ask for outgoing call disconnection Note: Outgoing call, if any, is released

5.2.3 Defined values

<n>
0: Ask for disconnection (default value)
1: Ask for outgoing call disconnection

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 49 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.3 Answer a call A

5.3.1 Description
When the product receives a call, it sets the RingInd signal and sends the
ASCII “RING” or “+CRING: <type>” string to the application (+CRING if the
cellular result code +CRC is enabled). Then it waits for the application to accept
the call with the ATA command.

5.3.2 Syntax:
Command syntax: ATA

Command Possible responses

RING
Note: Incoming call
ATA OK
Note: Answer to this incoming call Note: Call accepted
ATH OK
Note: Disconnect call Note: Call disconnected

5.3.3 Defined values

No parameter

5.4 Remote disconnection

This message is used by the product to inform the application that an active
call has been released by the remote user.
The product sends “NO CARRIER” to the application and sets the DCD signal.
In addition, for AOC, the product can release the call if credit has expired
(release cause 68 with +CEER command).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 50 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.5 Extended error report +CEER

5.5.1 Description
This command gives the cause of call release when the last call set up
(originating or answering) failed.

5.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CEER

Command Possible responses

ATD123456789; NO CARRIER
Note: Outgoing voice call Note: Call setup failure
AT+CEER +CEER: Error <xxx>
OK
Note: Ask for reason of release Note: <xxx>is the cause information element values
from GSM recommendation 04.08 or specific Call
accepted

For the cause information element from GSM 04.08 see chapter 18.4 or 18.5.
“NO CARRIER” indicates that the AT+CEER information is available for failure
diagnosis.

5.5.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 51 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.6 DTMF signals +VTD, +VTS

5.6.1 +VTD Description

The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM
network. This command is used to define tone duration (the default value is 70
ms ± 5 ms, according to 3GPP 23.014)..

5.6.2 +VTD Syntax

Command syntax: AT+VTD=<n>

Command Possible responses

AT+VTD=6 OK
Note: To define 600 ms tone duration Note: Command valid
AT+VTD=0 OK
Note: To set the default value (70±5 ms)
AT+VTD? +VTD: <n>
Note: interrogate current tone duration OK
AT+VTD=? +VTD: (0-255)
OK

5.6.3 Defined values

<n>: tone duration
This refers to an integer <n> that defines the length of tones emitted as a
result of the +VTS command. This does not affect the D command.
Value different than zero causes a tone of duration <n>*100 milliseconds.
Value zero (default value) causes a tone duration of 70 ± 5 ms.
Note: The value is used modulo 256.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 52 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.6.4 +VTS Description

The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM
network. This command enables tones to be transmitted, only when there is
an active call.

5.6.5 +VTS Syntax

Command syntax: AT+VTS=<Tone>

Command Possible responses

AT+VTS=”A” OK
Note: Command valid
AT+VTS=”11” +CME ERROR: 3
Note: If the <Tone> is wrong
AT+VTS=”4” +CME ERROR: 3
Note: If there is no communication
AT+VTS=”1”;+VTS=”3”;+VTS=”#”
OK
Note: send tone sequence 13#

5.6.6 Defined values

<Tone>: DTMF tone to transmit
<Tone> is in {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 53 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.7 Redial last telephone number ATDL

5.7.1 Description
This command is used by the application to redial the last number used in the
ATD command. The last number dialed is displayed followed by “;” for voice
calls only

5.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATDL

Command Possible responses

ATDL 0146290800;
Note: Redial last number OK
Note: Last call was a voice call. Command valid

5.7.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 54 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.8 Automatic dialing with DTR AT%Dn

5.8.1 Description
This command enables and disables:
• automatic dialing of the phone number stored in the first location of the
ADN or FDN phonebook,
• automatic sending of the short message (SMS) stored in the first
location of the SIM.
The number is dialed when DTR OFF switches to ON.
The short message is sent when DTR OFF switches to ON.

5.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT%D<n>[ ;]

Command Possible responses

AT%D1; OK
Note: Activates DTR voice number dialing Note: Command has been executed
DTR is OFF
DTR switches ON OK
Note: The number in the first location of the
ADN is dialed automatically
DTR switches OFF
Note: The product goes on-hook
AT%D2 OK
Note: Activates DTR short message Note: Command has been executed
sending
DTR is OFF
DTR switches ON +CMGS: x
Note: The first short message is sending
AT%D1; OK
DTR is OFF
DTR switches ON +CME ERROR: 21
Note: no phone number in the first location
in the ADN or FDN phonebook
AT%D2 OK
DTR is OFF
DTR switches ON +CMS ERROR: 321
Note: no short message in the first location
of the SIM.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 55 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.8.3 Defined values

<n> (0-2) To enable or disable automatic message transmission or number

dialing. Informs the product that the number is a voice number,
rather than a fax or data number.

AT%D0 Disables automatic DTR number dialing / message transmission.

AT%D1; Enables automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON;
Dials the phone number in the first location of the ADN or FDN
phonebook. Voice call (with semi-colon).

AT%D1 Activates automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON;
Dials the phone number in the first location of the ADN or FDN
phonebook. Data or Fax call (without semi-colon).

AT%D2 Activates automatic DTR short message transmission if DTR

switches from OFF to ON. Sends the short message in the first
location of the SIM.

If the first location is empty:

• AT%D1 and AT%D2 commands will receive an OK response
• The DTR ON event will trigger a CME ERROR: 21 or a CMS ERROR: 321.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 56 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.9 Automatic answer ATS0

5.9.1 Description
This S0 parameter determines and controls the product automatic answering
mode.

5.9.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATS0=<value>

Command Possible responses

ATS0=2 OK
Note: Automatic answer after 2 rings
ATS0? 002
OK
Note: Current value Note: always 3 characters padded with
zeros
ATS0=0 OK
Note: No automatic answer Note: Command valid

All others S-parameters (S6,S7,S8 …) are not implemented.

5.9.3 Defined values

<value>
number of rings before automatic answer (3 characters padded with
zeros). Range of values is 0 to 255.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 57 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.10 Incoming Call Bearer +CICB

5.10.1 Description
This specific command is used to set the type of incoming calls when no
incoming bearer is given (see +CSNS).
Note: setting the +CICB command affects the current value of +CSNS.

5.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CICB=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+CICB=1 OK
Note: If no incoming bearer, force a fax call Note: Command accepted
AT+CICB=2 OK
Note: If no incoming bearer, force a voice Note: Command accepted
call
AT+CICB? +CICB: 2
Note: Interrogate value OK
Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call
AT+CICB=? +CICB: (0-2)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Speech, data or fax default
incoming bearer

5.10.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Data
1: Fax
2: Speech

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 58 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.11 Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS

5.11.1 Description
This command selects the bearer to be used when an MT single numbering
scheme call is set up (see +CICB).
Note: setting the +CSNS command affects the current value of +CICB.

5.11.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSNS

Command Possible responses

AT+CSNS=2 OK
Note: force a fax call Note: Command accepted
AT+CSNS=0 OK
Note: force a voice call Note: Command accepted
AT+CSNS? +CSNS: 0
Note: Interrogate value OK
Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call
AT+CSNS=? +CSNS: (0,2,4)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Voice, data or fax default incoming bearer

5.11.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Voice
2: Fax
4: Data

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 59 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.12 Gain control +VGR, +VGT

5.12.1 Description
This command is used by the application to tune the receive gain of the
speaker and the transmit gain of the microphone.

5.12.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+VGR=<Rgain>
AT+VGT=<Tgain>

Command Possible responses

AT+VGR=25 OK
Note: Command valid
AT+VGT=45 OK
Note: Command valid
AT+VGR? +VGR: 64
Note: Interrogate value OK
Note: Default receive gain
AT+VGR=? +VGR: (0-255)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Possible values
AT+VGT? +VGT: 64
Note: Interrogate value OK
Note: Default transmit gain
AT+VGT=? +VGT: (0-255)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Possible values

Note: For the AT+VGT ? command with controller 1 set, the value is the lower
value of range, where as with controller 2, value correspond to the entered
value with AT+VGT=xx.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 60 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.12.3 Defined values

<Rgain>: reception gain
<Tgain>: transmission gain
The application sends:
For Q24x6, Q24X0, Q25XX and P32x6 modules
AT+VGR=<val> for receive AT+VGT=<val> for transmit AT+VGT=<val> for transmit
gain gain gain
Controller 1 Controller 1 Controller 2 Controller 2

0 to 15 +6 db 0 to 31 +30 db 0 +0 db

16 to 31 +4 db 32 to 63 +33 db 1 +0,5 db

32 to 47 +2 db 64 to 95 +36 db 2 +1 db

48 to 63 +0 db 96 to 127 +39 db 3 +1,5 db

64 to 79 -2 db 128 to 159 +42 db … …

80 to 95 -4 db 160 to 191 +45 db 19 +9,5 db

96 to 111 -6 db 192 to 223 +48 db 20 +10 db

112 to 127 -8 db 224 to 255 +51 db 21 +10.5 db

128 to 143 -10 db 22 +11 db

144 to 159 -12 db 23 +11.5 db

160 to 175 -14 db …

176 to 191 -16 db 58 +29 db

192 to 207 -18 db 59 +29.5 db

208 to 223 -20 db 60 +30 db

224 to 255 -22 db 61 +30,5 db

62 +31 db
… …
101 +50,5 db
102 +51 db
103 to 127 reserved
128 to 242 reserved
243 -6,5 db
244 -6 db
245 -5,5 db
246 -5 db
… …
255 -0,5 db

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 61 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

For P5186 module:

AT+VGR=<val> For the receive AT+VGT=<val> For the transmit gain
gain
controller 1
Controller 1

0 to 15 +6 db 0 to 31 +29 db

16 to 31 +3 db 32 to 63 +32 db

32 to 47 +0 db 64 to 95 +35 db

48 to 63 +0 db 96 to 127 +38 db

64 to 79 -3 db 128 to 159 +41 db

80 to 95 -6 db 160 to 191 +44 db

96 to 111 -6 db 192 to 223 +47 db

112 to 127 -9 db 224 to 255 +47 db

128 to 143 -12 db

144 to 159 -12 db

160 to 175 -15 db

176 to 191 -18 db

192 to 207 -18 db

208 to 223 -21 db

224 to 239 -21 db

240 to 255 -21 db

The gain values listed here are relative, for absolute (electrical) values please
refer to the specific hardware documentation of the module used in the
application.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 62 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.13 Microphone Mute Control +CMUT

5.13.1 Description
This command is used to mute the microphone input on the product (for the
active microphone set with the +SPEAKER command). This command is only
allowed during a call.

5.13.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CMUT=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+CMUT=? +CMUT: (0,1)

OK
Note: Test command Note: Enable / disable mute
AT+CMUT? +CMUT: 0
OK
Note: Ask for current value Note: Current value is OFF
AT+CMUT=1 OK
Note: Mute ON (call active) Note: Command valid
AT+CMUT? +CMUT: 1
OK
Note: Ask for current value Note: Mute is active (call active)
AT+CMUT=0 +CME ERROR:3
Note: Mute OFF (call not active) Note: Command not valid

5.13.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: microphone mute off (default value).
1: microphone mute on.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 63 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.14 Speaker & Microphone selection +SPEAKER

5.14.1 Description
This specific command is used to select the speaker and the microphone set.

5.14.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+SPEAKER=<ActiveSpkMic>

Command Possible responses

AT+SPEAKER=0 OK
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE Note: Command valid
AT+SPEAKER? +SPEAKER: 0
OK
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE are active
AT+SPEAKER=? +SPEAKER: (0,1)
OK

5.14.3 Defined values

<ActiveSpkMic>
0: Speaker ONE, Micro ONE
1: Speaker TWO, Micro TWO

5.15 Echo Cancellation +ECHO

5.15.1 Description
This specific command is used to enable, disable or configure the Echo
Cancellation functions for voice calls (in rooms, in cars, etc.).
It is necessary to tune the Microphone gain (AT+VGT) and the Speaker gain
(AT+VGR) before activating the Echo Cancellation.
Note:
• You can activate/deactivate the echo cancellation during a call without
resetting the product if the <AlgoId> parameter is not changed. But you
have to use the syntax with all parameters: AT+ECHO=1,3,30,8000,256
for instance.
• To use Echo cancellation 3 and 6, the ECHO feature must be activated.
• Please remind that echo cancellation algorithms may be not available on
some WISMO modules:

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 64 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

WISMO module Algorithm 6 support Algorithm 3 support

P51xx No Yes
Q2400 Yes Yes
Q2406 Yes Yes
Q2426 Yes No
Q31xx Yes No

5.15.2 Syntax

Command syntax:
For AlgoId=1:
AT+ECHO=<mode>[,<Algold>[,<VolOut>,<Step>,<PcmThRel>,
<PcmThMax>]]
For AlgoId=3:
AT+ECHO=<mode>[,<Algold>[,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>
]]
For AlgoId=6:
AT+ECHO=<mode>[, <Algold>[, <AlgoParam>, <NoiseThres>,
<NmbTaps>, <ConvergenceTime1>, <ConvergenceTime2>,
<NoiseLevelMAX>, <DetectionThreshold>, <CNGAdjust>,
<CNGParam1>,<CNGParam2>, <CNGGain>,<NmbDelay>]]
Response syntax:
For AlgoId=1:
ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<VolOut>,<Step>,<PcmThRel>,<PcmThMax>
For AlgoId=3:
+ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>
For AlgoId=6:
+ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>,
<ConvergenceTime1>,<ConvergenceTime2>,<NoiseLevelMAX>,
<DetectionThreshold>,<CNGAdjust>,<CNGParam1>,<CNGParam2>,
<CNGGain>,<NmbDelay>,<NoiseEstimate>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 65 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CMEE=1 OK
Note: Enables the use of result code
AT+SPEAKER? + SPEAKER: 0
OK
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE are
active
AT+SIDET=0 OK
Note: Deactivate the Sidetone
AT+SIDET? +SIDET: 0,0
AT+ECHO? +ECHO: 0,1,0,3,10,7
Note: Read current settings OK
AT+ECHO=1,1,0,3,10,7 OK
Note: Active Echo cancellation 1 for
Mic/Spk one.
AT+ECHO? +ECHO: 1,1,0,3,10,7
Note: Read current settings OK
AT+ECHO=1,3,30,8000,256 +CME ERROR: 519
Note: Activate the Echo cancellation 3 Note: The new algorithm will be activated
after a reset of the product
AT+ECHO? +ECHO: 3,3,30,8000,256
Note: Read the Echo cancellation settings OK
AT+CFUN=1 OK
Note: Reset the product
AT+ECHO? +ECHO: 1,3,30,8000,256
Note: Read current settings OK
AT+ECHO=0 OK
Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation
AT+ECHO=0 OK
Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 66 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+ECHO= +CME ERROR: 519

1,6,30,50,256,200,550,15,32767,32767, Note: The new algorithm will be activated
27484,38697,7311,2 after a reset of the product
Note: Activate the Echo cancellation 6
AT+ECHO? +ECHO: 3, 6, 30, 50, 256, 200, 550, 15,
Note: Read the Echo cancellation settings 32767,32767, 27484,38697,7311,2,65535
OK
AT+CFUN=1 OK
Note: Reset the product
AT+ECHO? +ECHO: 1, 6, 30, 50, 256, 200, 550, 15,
Note: Read current settings 32767, 32767, 27484,38697,7311,2,65535
OK

5.15.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Deactivate Echo
1: Activate Echo

When mode = 1 is chosen, AlgoId is mandatory.

<Status>
0 Echo Deactivated.
1 Echo Activated for Mic/Spk one.
2 Echo Activated for Mic/Spk two.
3 Reset the product.
Note: <Status> does not indicate the currently selected speaker. If echo is
activated, it indicates the speaker for which echo parameters are set. Echo
can be activated on a non-selected speaker.
<AlgoId>
1: Echo cancellation 1 (Not supported on WISMO P51x6)
3: Echo cancellation 3
6: Echo cancellation 6: AEC algorithm
Please remind that echo cancellation algorithms may be not available on
some WISMO modules. Refer to table in Description paragraph.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 67 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Echo cancellation 1 (4 parameters):

• The parameter <Volout> specifies the maximum attenuation of the
switch
<Volout>
0: 31 db (default)
1: 29 db
2: 27 db
3: 25 db
…
14: 3 db
15: 1 db
• The parameter <Step> specifies the attenuation step between
attenuation and no attenuation.
<Step>
0: 1 db
1: 2 db
2: 3 db
3: 4 db (default)
• The <PcmThRel> parameter specifies the relative threshold between
max and min energy information.
The allowed range is [ 0 ; 31 ]. (10 by default)
• The <PcmThMax > parameter specifies threshold of max energy
information.
The allowed range is [ 0 ; 31 ]. (7 by default)

Echo Cancellation 3 (3 parameters):

• <AlgoParam> high value leads to high echo attenuation but the full-
duplex quality will be less efficient.
The allowed range is [ 0 ; 63 ]. (30 by default)
• <NoiseThres> indicates the noise threshold. Low value leads to high
noise attenuation. The threshold 32767 indicates no noise attenuation.
The allowed range is [0 ;32767]. (8000 default)
• <NmbTaps> indicates the Number of Taps of the Adaptive Filter. The
allowed range is [64 ;256]. (256 by default)-64 taps is for short Echo-
256 taps is for long Echo.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 68 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Echo Cancellation 6 (12 parameters):

• <AlgoParam> high value leads to high echo attenuation but the full-
duplex quality will be less efficient.
The allowed range is [ 0 ; 63 ]. (30 by default)
• <NoiseThres> indicates the noise threshold. Low value leads to high
noise attenuation. The threshold 32767 indicates no noise attenuation.
The allowed range is [0 ;32767]. (50 default). Values above 512 have no
effect (noise reduction will be disabled).
• <NmbTaps> indicates the Number of Taps of the Adaptive Filter. The
allowed range is [2 ;256]. (256 by default)-64 taps is for short Echo-256
taps is for long Echo.
• <ConvergenceTime1> Convergence time in quiet condition:
This parameter expresses duration as the number of GSM speech
frames (20 ms each) containing far end speech, upon which the switch
only mechanism must run, in quiet conditions. The allowed range is
[162; 32767]. (200 default)
• <ConvergenceTime2> Convergence time in noise condition:
This parameter is the same as ConvergenceTime1 but noisy condition.
The allowed range is [162; 32767]. (550 default)
Important note: <ConvergenceTime2> must be greater than or equal to
<ConvergenceTime1>
• <NoiseLevelMAX> Upper bound of the noise floor estimate
This parameter is expressed an integer on 16bits, and corresponds to
the rounded value of the noise floor estimate expressed in dB (log2). The
allowed range is [NOISE_LEVEL_MIN+1, 31], NOISE_LEVEL_MIN being a
constant (NOISE_LEVEL_MIN=4 in the current implementation). Default
value is 15 .
• <DetectionThreshold> Far-end speech detection threshold:
In order to detect far end speech on the loudspeaker’s signal, the SNR is
computed regarding to the far end signal power and the far end signal
noise floor level. This parameter specifies a threshold on the SNR above
which the switch mechanism will be activated.
This parameter is expressed as an integer on 16bits, and must be in the
range [0, 32767]. (32767 default)
• <CNGAdjust>: Comfort noise volume gain
Although the comfort noise volume will self adjust to the estimated
ambient noise level, it is possible to artificially reduce its level. This
parameter is expressed in fixed point as a signed Q15, meaning that
32767 stands for 1.0, and 0 for 0.0. It ranges from 0 to 32767. Setting
this value to 0 will mean no comfort noise. (32767 default).

• <CNGParam1>, <CNGParam2>: 16 bits Comfort noise AR2 coefficients:

The user will set the AR2 coefficients for a specific car. Their value will
be estimated on a recorded noise sequence by mean of a tool provided

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 69 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

by Wavecom (C or Matlab source code). The recorded sequence shall be

made in the noisy conditions and contain noise only. The allowed range
is [0; 65535]. (27484 by default for CNG Param1 and 38697 by default
for CNGParam2)
• <CNGGain>: 16 bits Comfort noise AR2 gain coefficient.
It specifies the gain of the AR2 filter used for comfort noise generation. It
will be estimated by the same tool used to estimate CNGParam1 and
CNGParam2.
It is represented as a Q15 on 16 bits. The allowed range is [0; 32767].
(7311 default)
• <SOMValue>: Switch attenuation value at the beginning of the call
This parameter will range from 1 to 16 and set the depth of the
attenuation of the transmit audio signal when speech is detected on the
distant side (4 default)
• <NoiseEstimate>: value of the noise floor estimate written by the DSP
(only in case of active communication)
The allowed range is [0, 32] when a communication is active. Otherwise
the returned value is 65535.

Notes:
o The field <NoiseEstimate> is present only for the AlgoId 6 and
only in the response to AT+ECHO?
When a new algoid is selected, AT+ECHO? returns 3 for the mode. The
changes will be taken into account after a reset.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 70 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.16 Side Tone modification +SIDET

5.16.1 Description
This specific command is used to set the level of audio feedback in the speaker
(microphone feedback in the speaker).

5.16.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+SIDET=<val1>[,<val2>]

Command Possible responses

AT+SIDET=1,0 OK
Note: Command valid
AT+SIDET? +SIDET: 1,0
Note: Current value OK
Note: Command valid
AT+SIDET=? +SIDET: (0-1),(0-3)
OK

5.16.3 Defined values

<val1>
0: Side Tone is disabled
1: Side Tone is enabled
<val2> ( default value 0 will be used if this parameter is not given)
0: 0 db
1: - 6 db
2: - 12 db
3: - 18 db

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 71 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

5.17 Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP

5.17.1 Description
This command allows factory settings for voice parameters to be restored from
EEPROM.
These voice parameters include:
• Gain control (+VGR & +VGT commands),
• Gain controller (+WSVG command),
• Microphone mute control (+CMUT command),
• Speaker & Microphone selection (+SPEAKER command),
• Echo cancellation (+ECHO command),
• Side tone modification (+SIDET command).

5.17.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+VIP=<n>

.Command Possible responses

AT+VIP? +VIP: 1
OK
AT+VIP=2 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Syntax error
AT+VIP=1 OK
Note: Restore the factory settings from Note: The command has been executed
EEPROM
AT+VIP=1 CME ERROR: 519
Note: Restore the factory settings from Note: Reset the product to accept the new
EEPROM with the current Echo algorithm.
cancellation algorithm (different of the
default algorithm).
AT+VIP=? +VIP: (1)
Note: List of supported <n>s OK

5.17.3 Defined values

<n>
1: Restore all voice parameters
Other values are not supported.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 72 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6 Network service commands

6.1 Signal Quality +CSQ

6.1.1 Description
This command is used to ascertain the received signal strength indication
(<rssi>) and the channel bit error rate (<ber>) with or without a SIM card
inserted.

6.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSQ

Command Possible responses

AT+CSQ +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
OK
Note: <rssi> and <ber> as defined below

6.1.3 Defined values

<rssi>:
0 -113 dBm or less
1 -111 dBm
2 to 30 -109 to –53 dBm
31 -51dBm or greater
99 not known or not detectable
<ber>:
0…7 as RXQUAL values in the table GSM 05.08
99 not known or not detectable

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 73 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6.2 Operator selection +COPS

6.2.1 Description
There are three possible ways of selecting an operator (PLMN):
• The product is in manual mode. It then tries to find the operator
specified by the application and if found, tries to register.
• The product is in automatic mode. It then tries to find the home operator
and if found, tries to register. If not found, the product automatically
searches for another network.
• The product enters into manual/automatic mode, and then tries to find
an operator as specified by the application (as in manual mode). If this
attempt fails it enters automatic mode. If this is successful, the operator
specified by the application is selected. The mobile equipment then
enters into automatic mode.
Note: The read command returns the current mode and the currently selected
operator. In manual mode, this PLMN may not be the one set by the
application (as it is in the search phase).
These commands are not allowed during communication.

6.2.2 Syntax
To force an attempt to select and register on a network, the application must
send the following command:
Command syntax: AT+COPS=<mode>, [<format> [ , <oper> ] ]
Possible responses for AT+COPS=<mode>:
OK Network is selected with full service
+CME ERROR: 30 No network service
+CME ERROR: 32 Network not allowed – emergency calls only
+CME ERROR: 3 Not allowed during Communication
+CME ERROR: 4 Incorrect parameters
+CME ERROR: 527 Please wait, and retry your selection later
+CME ERROR: 528 Location update failure – emergency calls only
+CME ERROR: 529 Selection failure – emergency calls only

Response syntax for AT+COPS?:

+COPS: <mode> [, <format>, <oper> ]
Response syntax for AT+COPS=?:
+COPS: [list of supported (<stat>, long alphanumeric <oper>, short
alphanumeric <oper>s, numeric <oper>) s]

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 74 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Notes:
• If an incoming call occurs during a PLMN list request, the operation is
aborted (+CME ERROR: 520) and the unsolicited RING appears.
• If SPN (Service Provider Name) is present in the SIM, it will be returned
in both long and short alphanumeric <oper> fields. The string in the
“short” field will be the SPN truncated to the appropriate character
number (10).

Command Possible responses

AT+COPS? +COPS: 0,2,20801

Note: Ask for current PLMN OK
Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom
Orange
AT+COPS=? +COPS: (2,”F SFR”,”SFR”,”20810”),
(3,”F–BOUYGUES
TELECOM”,”BYTEL”,”20820”),(3,”Orange
F”,”Orange”,”20801”)
Note: Ask for PLMN list OK
Note: Home PLMN is SFR, BYTEL and
Orange networks have been detected
AT+COPS=1,2,20810 +CME ERROR: 32
Note: Ask for registration on SFR network Note: Network not allowed – emergency
calls only
AT+COPS=1,2 ,23433 +CME ERROR: 529
Note: Ask for registration on UK Orange Note: Selection failed – emergency calls
network only
AT+COPS=0 OK
Note: Ask for registration in automatic Note: Succeeded
mode
AT+COPS=3,0 OK
Note: Set <format> to long alphanumeric
AT+COPS? +COPS: 0,0,”Orange F”
OK
Note: Ask for current PLMN Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom
Orange
AT+COPS=2 OK
Note: Ask for deregistration from network Note: Succeeded
AT+COPS? +COPS: 2
Note: Ask for current PLMN Note: ME is unregistered until <mode>=0
or 1 is selected

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 75 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6.2.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: automatic (default value)
1: manual
2: deregistration ; ME will be unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is
selected.
3: set only <format> (for read command AT+COPS?)
4: manual / automatic (<oper> shall be present), if manual selection fails,
automatic mode is entered.
<format>: format of <oper> field
0: long alphanumeric format <oper>
1: short alphanumeric format <oper>
2: numeric <oper> (default value)
<stat>: status of <oper>
0: unknown
1: available
2: current
3: forbidden
<oper>: operator identifier (MCC/MNC in numeric format only for operator
selection)
The long alphanumeric format can be up to 16 characters long (see
appendix 20 Codes and values for operator names description, field is
“Name”). The short alphanumeric format can be up to 10 characters long.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 76 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6.3 Network registration +CREG

6.3.1 Description
This command is used by the application to ascertain the registration status of
the product.

6.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CREG= <mode>
Response syntax: +CREG: <mode>, <stat> [ ,<lac>,<ci> ] for AT+CREG?
Command only

Command Possible responses

AT+CREG? +CREG: <mode>,<stat>
OK
Note: As defined here-above
AT+CREG=0 OK
Note: Disable network registration Note: Command valid
unsolicited result code
AT+CREG=1 OK
Note: Enable network registration Note: Command valid
unsolicited result code
AT+CREG=2 OK
Note: Enable network registration and Note: Command valid
location information unsolicited result code
AT+CREG=? +CREG: (0-2)
Note: 0,1,2 <mode> values are supported

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 77 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6.3.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Disable network registration unsolicited result code (default)
1: Enable network registration code result code +CREG: <stat>
2: Enable network registration and location information unsolicited
result code +CREG: <stat>,<lac>,<ci> if there is a change of network cell.
<stat>
0: not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new operator.
1: registered, home network.
2: not registered, ME currently searching for a new operator to register
to.
3: registration denied.
4: unknown.
5: registered, roaming.
<lac>: string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g.
“00C3” equals 195 in decimal).
<ci>: string type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format.

6.4 Read operator name +WOPN

6.4.1 Description
This specific command returns the operator name in alphanumeric format, the
numeric format being given.
With E-ONS (Enhanced Operator Name Service) feature, <lac> is an optional
parameter to read names from OPL/PNN SIM files. If it is not entered, name will
be given with current <lac>. Note that in limited service, current <lac> is set to
0.
It also allows to erase NITZ PLMN names stored in Flash memory with
“AT+WOPN=3,0”.
When the WISMO module receives a NITZ (Network Information and Time
Zone) message with Long Name or Short Name information, an entry with
registered PLMN and names in message is created in flash memory. These
names will then be used with +COPS,+COPN,+WOPN, +CPOL commands
with the priority order defined in 3GPP TS 22.101. The WISMO module
supports only network names with GSM default alphabet coding scheme.
The user can choose which of the following method will be used for getting
PLMN names with command “AT+WOPN=4,<PlmnOns>”.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 78 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

The priority order is:

First entry if on Home PLMN, or matching entry if existing in OPL/PNN
1 - E-ONS
SIM files
if on Home PLMN, use SIM file CPHS ONS (0x6F14) for Long Name if
2 - CPHS present and SIM file CPHS SONS (0x6F18) for short name if present (if
not, reuse SIM file CPHS ONS)
3 - SPN If on Home PLMN, use SIM file SPN (0x6F46) if present
if there is a matching entry in the list of names received so far, use it.
Note that in France for example, all the operators use NITZ message
4 - NITZ
for Date and Time feature, but not for PLMN names, so the list is
always empty. In France, NITZ message is sent on GPRS attachment.
PLMN names in ROM defined according to MoU SE.13 and NAPRD
5 - ROM
Operator Names documents

Once a long name is found following this priority order, it is given as response
to AT command.

Refer to 3GPP TS 24.008, 3GPP TS 23.040, 3GPP TS 22.042 and COMMON

PCN HANDSET SPECIFICATION CPHS Phase 2 v4.2 for more information.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 79 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WOPN=<mode>,<NumOper>[ ,<lac>]
Response syntax: +WOPN: <mode>,<AlphaOper>

Command Possible responses

AT+WOPN=? OK
Note: Test command
AT+WOPN=0,20801 +WOPN: 0,”Orange F”
Note: Give an operator in numeric format OK
Note: Alphanumeric answer
AT+WOPN=0,99999 +CME ERROR: 22
Note: Give a wrong operator Note: Not found
AT+WOPN=0,20801,36 +WOPN: 0,”Orange F”
Note: Give an operator in numeric format OK
for lac 36 Note: Alphanumeric answer
AT+WOPN=3,0 OK
Note: Erase NITZ PLMN names stored in
flash memory
AT+WOPN=4 +WOPN: 15
Note: Read from EEPROM which method OK
will be used for PLMN names.
AT+WOPN=4,<PlmnOns> OK
Note: Write to EEPROM which method will
be used for PLMN names.

6.4.3 Defined values

<mode>
0 Use long alphanumeric format
1 Use short alphanumeric format
2 Reserved for later use
3 Erase NITZ PLMN list if <NumOper> = 0
4 Access to EEPROM to read or write the method
used for getting PLMN names.
Read access if <NumOper> omitted, write access
if <NumOper>(=<PlmnOns>) provided.

<NumOper> is the operator in numeric format.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 80 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<AlphaOper> is the operator in long or short alphanumeric format (see

appendix 20 Codes and values for operator names description)

<lac> is the two bytes Location Area Code to be used to get the PLMN name.
If it is not entered, Current lac will be used (0 if limited service). It is provided
as an integer value.

<PlmnOns> is a bit-field with following coding:

bit 0 E-ONS
bit 1 CPHS
bit 2 SPN
bit 3 NITZ

Bit value is 1 for Activate and 0 for Deactivate the method. <PlmnOns> value
should be provided as a decimal value.
Note: for example, <PlmnOns>=15 means that the four methods will be used
for PLMN names (bit-field value is 1111 or 0xF).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 81 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6.5 Selection of Preferred PLMN list +CPLS

6.5.1 Description
This command is used to select one PLMN selector with access technology list
in the SIM card that is used by AT+CPOL command.

6.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPLS= <List>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPLS? +CPLS: 1
OK
Note: Ask for selection of the SIM file Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is selected
AT+CPLS=0 Note: if EF_PLMNwAct is not present,
Note: selection of EF_PLMNwAct EF_PLMNsel will be selected
AT+CPLS=1 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: selection of EF_OPLMNwAct Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is not present
AT+CPLS=? +CPLS: (0,1,2)
OK
Note: Get possible values
Note: The 3 files with Acces technology are
present and can be selected
AT+CPLS=? +CPLS: (0)
OK

Note: Get possible values Note: Only EF_PLMNwAct or EF_PLMNsel can

be selected

6.5.3 Defined values

<List>:
0: User controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_PLMNwAct
Note: if this file is not found EF_PLMNSel will be selected
1: Operator controlled PLMN selector with access technology
EF_OPLMNwAct
2: Home PLMN selector with access technology EF_HPLMNwAct

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 82 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

6.6 Preferred operator list +CPOL

6.6.1 Description
This command is used to edit (or update) the SIM preferred list of networks.
This list is read in the SIM file selected by the command AT+CPLS.

6.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPOL=
[<index>] [,<format>[,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>]]]
The different possibilities are:
• AT+CPOL= <index> to delete an entry.
• AT+CPOL= , <format> to set the format used by the read command
(AT+CPOL?).
• AT+CPOL= , <format>, <oper> to put <oper> in the next free location.
• AT+CPOL= <index> , <format> , <oper> to write <oper> in the
<format> at the <index>.
• AT+CPOL=
<index>,<format>,<oper>,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcp_Act>,<Utran_Act>
to write <oper> in the <format> at the <index> giving the access
technology (in the case of EF_PLMNwact, EF_HPLMNwact or
EF_OPLMNwact is present).
Note: per default if Acces technology parameters are not given, the GSM
access technology will be chosen.
The supported format are those of the +COPS command.
The length of this list is limited to 85 entries for EF_PLMNsel, and 51 for
EF_PLMNwAct, EF_OPLMNwAct, EF_HPLMNwAct.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 83 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPOL? +CPOL:1,2,26201
+CPOL: 6,2,20810
OK
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric
With only EF_PLMNsel present format (read in EF_PLMNsel)
AT+CPOL? +CPOL:1,2,26201,1,0,0
+CPOL: 6,2,20810,1,0,0
OK
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric
With EF_PLMNwAct selected and present format (read in EF_PLMNwAct)
GSM access technology selected
GSM compact access technology not
selected
Utran access technology not selected
AT+CPOL=,0 OK
Note: Select long alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL? +CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
OK
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks Note: Preferred list of networks in long
With only EF_PLMNsel present alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL=7,2,20801 OK
Note: Add a network to the list
AT+CPOL? +CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
+CPOL: 7,0,”Orange F”
OK
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks Note: Preferred list of networks in long
With only EF_PLMNsel present alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL=7 OK
th
Note: Delete 7 location
AT+CPOL? +CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
OK
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks Note: Preferred list of networks in long
With only EF_PLMNsel present alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777 OK
Note: Add a new network to the list
With only EF_PLMNsel present

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 84 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPOL=8,2,77777,0,0,1 OK
Note: Add a new network to the list Note: Acces technology UTRAN is selected
With EF_PLMNwact present
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777 OK
Note: Add a new network to the list Note: Per default Acces technology GSM is
With EF_PLMNwact present selected
AT+CPOL? +CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
+CPOL: 8,2,77777”
OK
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks Note: Preferred list of networks in long
With only EF_PLMNsel present alphanumeric format but 8th entry is
unknown so the product edits it in the
numeric format
AT+CPOL=9,0,”Orange F”
Note: Add a new network to the list (text
format)
AT+CPOL? +CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
+CPOL: 8,2,77777”
+CPOL: 9,0,”Orange F”
OK
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks Note: Preferred list of networks in long
With only EF_PLMNsel present alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL=? +CPOL: (1-16),(0-2)
OK
Note: The EF can accept 16 records, and
supported format are 0,1 or 2.

6.6.3 Defined values

<index>: position of the operator record in the SIM preferred operator list. Do
AT+CPOL=? to get the maximum index of the selected EF.
<format>:
0 long alphanumeric format for <oper>
1 short alphanumeric format for <oper>
2 numeric format for <oper>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 85 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<oper>: character string or integer (see <format>) indicating operator

identifier.
<GSM_AcT>: GSM access technology
<GSMcomp_Act>: GSM compact access technology
<Utran_Act>: UTRA access technology
0 access technology not selected
1 access technology selected

6.7 Read operator name +COPN

6.7.1 Description
This command return the list of all operator names (in numeric and
alphanumeric format) stored in the module.

6.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+COPN
Command response: +COPN: <NumOper>,<AlphaOper>

Command Possible responses

AT+COPN +COPN: 23201,”A1”

+COPN: 23203,”A max.”
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks +COPN: 23207,”A tele.ring”
+COPN: 23205,”one”
…
OK

+CME ERROR: <err>

AT+COPN=? OK

6.7.3 Defined values

<NumOper> is the operator in numeric format.
<AlphaOper> is the operator in long alphanumeric format (see appendix 20
Codes and values for operator names description)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 86 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

7 Security commands

7.1 Enter PIN +CPIN

7.1.1 Description
This command is used to enter the ME passwords (CHV1 / CHV2 / PUK1 /
PUK2, etc.), that are required before any ME functionality can be used.
CHV1/CHV2 is between 4 and 8 digits long, PUK1/PUK2 is only 8 digits long.
If the user application tries to make an outgoing call before the SIM PIN code
(CHV1) has been confirmed, then the product will refuse the “ATD” command
with a “+CME ERROR: 11” (SIM PIN required).
The application is responsible for checking the PIN after each reset or power on
– if the PIN was enabled.

7.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPIN=<pin>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPIN=1234 OK
Note: Enter PIN Note: PIN code is correct
AT+CPIN=5678 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Enter PIN Note: Operation not allowed, PIN previously entered

After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the PIN (Personal Identification

Number), the PUK (Personal Unblocking Key) will be required. PUK validation
forces the user to enter a new PIN code as a second parameter and this will be
the new PIN code if PUK validation succeeds. CHV1 is then enabled if PUK1 is
correct. The application therefore uses this command:
AT+CPIN=<Puk>,<NewPin>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPIN=00000000,1234 +CME ERROR: 16

Note: Enter PUK and new PIN Note: Incorrect PUK
AT+CPIN=12345678,1234 OK
nd
Note: Enter PUK and new PIN, 2 attempt Note: PUK correct, new PIN stored

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 87 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

To ascertain which code must be entered (or not), the following query
command can be used:
AT+CPIN?
The possible responses are:
+CPIN: READY ME is not pending for any password
+CPIN: SIM PIN CHV1 is required
+CPIN: SIM PUK PUK1 is required
+CPIN: SIM PIN2 CHV2 is required
+CPIN: SIM PUK2 PUK2 is required
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN SIM lock (phone-to-SIM) is required
+CPIN: PH-NET PIN Network personalization is required
+CME ERROR: <err> SIM failure (13) absent (10) etc…

Please note that in this case the mobile equipment does not end its response
with the OK string.
The response +CME ERROR: 13 (SIM failure) is returned after 10 unsuccessful
PUK attempts. The SIM card is then out of order and must be replaced by a
new one.

Example: 3 failed PIN validations + 1 successful PUK validation

AT+CPIN? Read the PIN status
+CPIN: SIM PIN The product requires SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=1235 First attempt to enter a SIM PIN
+CME ERROR: 16 Wrong PIN
AT+CPIN=1236 Second attempt
+CME ERROR: 16 Wrong PIN
AT+CPIN=1237 Third attempt
+CME ERROR: 16 Wrong PIN
AT+CPIN? Read PIN state
+CPIN: SIM PUK The product requires PUK
AT+CPIN=99999999,5678 The PUK is entered, the new PIN shall be 5678 PUK
validation is OK. New Pin is 5678
OK
AT+CPIN? Read PIN state
+CPIN: READY The product is ready

If the user tries to do something which requires PIN2 (CHV2), the product will
refuse the action with a “+CME ERROR: 17” (SIM PIN2 required). The product
then waits for SIM PIN2 to be given.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 88 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Of course, if SIM PIN2 is blocked, SIM PUK2 is required instead of SIM PIN2.
For example, the product needs PIN2 to write in the fixed dialing phonebook
(FDN) , so if SIM PIN2 authentication has not been performed during the
current session, SIM PIN2 is required

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBS=”FD” OK
Note: Choose FDN
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky” +CME ERROR: 17
Note: Write in FDN at location 5 Note: SIM PIN2 is required
AT+CPIN? SIM PIN2
Note: SIM PIN2 is required
AT+CPIN=5678 OK
Note: Enter SIM PIN2
AT+CPBW=2,”01290917”,129,”Jacky” OK
Note: Write in FDN at location 5 Note: Now writing in FDN is allowed

Please note that the product only requests PIN2 or PUK2 once. Therefore, if
they are not entered properly, the next +CPIN? command will return “+CPIN:
READY”.

7.1.3 Defined values

<pin> Personal Identification Number. Four-digits number.
<puk> Personal Unblocking Key needed to change the PIN. Eight-digits
number.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 89 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

7.2 Enter PIN2 +CPIN2

7.2.1 Description
This specific command is used to validate the PIN2 code (CHV2), or to validate
the PUK2 code (UNBLOCK CHV2) and to define a new PIN2 code.
Of course, the +CPIN command allows PIN2 or PUK2 codes to be validated,
but only when the last command executed resulted in PIN2 authentication
failure.
PIN2 length is between 4 and 8 digits, PUK2 length is 8 digits only.

7.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPIN2=<pin2>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPIN2=1234 OK
Note: Enter PIN2 Note: PIN2 code is correct
AT+CPIN2=5678 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Enter PIN2 Note: Operation not allowed, PIN2 previously entered

After 3 unsuccessful attempts, PUK2 will then be required. PUK2 validation

forces the user to enter a new PIN2 code as a second parameter and this will
be the new PIN2 code if PUK1 validation succeeds. The application therefore
uses this command:
AT+CPIN2=<puk2>,<NewPin2>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPIN2=00000000,1234 +CME ERROR: 16
Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2 Note: Incorrect Password (PUK2)
AT+CPIN2=12345678,1234 OK
nd
Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2, 2 attempt Note: PUK2 correct, new PIN2 stored

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 90 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

To ascertain which code must be entered (or not), the following query
command can be used:
AT+CPIN2?
The possible responses are
+CPIN2: READY No PIN2 is needed
+CPIN2: SIM PIN2 PIN2 is required
+CPIN2: SIM PUK2 PUK2 is required
+CME ERROR: <err> Absent (10) etc…

7.2.3 Defined values:

<pin2> Personal Identification Number 2.
<puk2> Personal Unblocking Key 2 needed to change the PIN2.
<Newpin2>
Note: PIN2 length is between 4 and 8 digits, PUK2 length is 8 digits only.

7.3 PIN remaining attempt number +CPINC

7.3.1 Description
This specific command is used to get the number of valid attempts for PIN1
(CHV1), PIN2 (CHV2), PUK1 (UNBLOCK CHV1) and PUK2 (UNBLOCK CHV2)
identifiers.

7.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPINC
Response syntax: +CPINC: <n1>,<n2>,<k1>,<k2>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPINC +CPINC: 2,3,10,10

Note: Get the number of attempts left OK
Note: First CHV1 attempt was a failure
AT+CPINC? +CPINC: 2,3,10,10
Note: Get current values OK
Note: First attempt was a failure
AT+CPINC=? OK
Note: Get possible values

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 91 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

7.3.3 Defined values

<n1>, <n2> are the attempts left for PIN1, PIN2 (0 = blocked, 3 max)
<k1>, <k2> are the attempts left for PUK1, PUK2 (0 = blocked, 10 max)
If the card is not present at the time of initialization, +CME ERROR: 10 will be
sent.

7.4 Facility lock +CLCK

7.4.1 Description
This command is used by the application to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME
or network facility <fac>.
Note: Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) doesn’t check “PS”, “PN”,
“PU”, “PP” and “PC” locks.

7.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CLCK=<fac>,<mode>[,<passwd>[,<class>] ]
Response syntax: +CLCK: <status> [ ,<class1> ]<CR><LF>
+CLCK: <status>,<class2> [ … ] ]

Command Possible responses

AT+CLCK=”SC”,1,1234 OK
Note: Enable PIN Note: PIN was correct
AT+CLCK? +CLCK:(“PS”,0),(“SC”,0),(“FD”,0),(“PN“,0),(“PU“
Note: Read PIN status ,0),(“PP“,0),(“PC“,0)
OK
Note: PIN is enabled, no SIM lock, no network
lock, no information on Call barring
(no longer supported in GSM 07.07)
AT+CLCK=”SC”,0,5555 +CME ERROR: 16
Note: Disable PIN Note: PIN was wrong
AT+CPIN=1234 OK
Note: Enter PIN Note: PIN was good
AT+CLCK=? +CLCK:
Note: Request supported facilities (“PS”,”SC”,”AO”,”OI”,”OX”,”AI”,”IR”,”AB”,”AC”
,”FD”,”PN”,”PU”,”PP”,”PC”)
OK
Note: Supported facilities
AT+CLCK=”PN”,1,12345678 OK
Note: Activate network lock Network lock activated

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 92 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AR+CLCK=”AO”,1,1234,2 OK
Note: Activate all outgoing calls Note: Call barring is activate
barring for data calls
AT+CLCK=”AO”,2 +CLCK: 1,2
Note: Query BAOC status OK
Note: BAOC activate for data calls only
AT+CLCK=”SC”,0,0000 +CME ERROR: 521
Note: Disable PIN Note: PIN deactivation is forbidden with this
SIM card

7.4.3 Defined values

<fac>: supported facilities

• “PS”: SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password.

• “SC“: PIN enabled (<mode> = 1) / disabled (<mode> = 0)
• “AO”: BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)
• “OI” : BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)
• “OX”: BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing. International Calls except to Home
Country)
• “AI” : BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)
• “IR” : BIC-Roam (Barr Inc. When Roaming outside Home Country)
• “AB”: All Barring services
• “AG”: All outGoing barring services
• “AC”: All inComing barring services
• “PN”: Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK).
• “PU”: Network Subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK).
• “PP”: Service Provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK).
• “PC”: Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK).
• “FD”: SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (PIN2 is
required as <password>)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 93 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<mode>
0: unlock the facility
1: lock the facility
2: query status
<class>
1: Voice (telephony)
2: Data (apply to all bearer services)
4: Fax (facsimile services)
8: Short Message service
7: Voice, Data and Fax (Default value)

Any attempt to combine different classes will result in activation / deactivation /

interrogation of Voice, Data and Fax.
If <class> is omitted, default value 7 will be used.
Password maximum length is given with the AT+CPWD=? Command.
Note: It will not possible to lock the FDN phonebook if this one is not loaded.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 94 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

7.5 Change password +CPWD

7.5.1 Description
This command is used by the application to change a password (PIN, call
barring, NCK, etc.). The facility values (<fac>) are the same as for the +CLCK
command with a “P2” facility to manage SIM PIN2.
For the network lock (“PN”), unlocking is forbidden after 10 failed attempts to
disable (unlock) the network lock with an incorrect password.

7.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPWD= <fac>, <oldpwd>, <newpwd>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPWD=? +CPWD: (“PS”,8), (“SC”,8), (“AO”,4), (“OI”,4),

Note: Possible values (“OX”,4), (“AI”,4), (“IR”,4), (“AB”,4), (“AG”,4),
(“AC”,4), (“P2”,8), (“FD”,8), (”PN”,8), (”PU”,8),
(”PP”,8), (”PC”,8)
OK
Note: CHV1/CHV2 must be on 8 digits
maximum (4 mini). For call barring, on 4 digits
maximum
AT+CPWD=”SC”,1234,5555 OK
Note: Change PIN Note: PIN was correct
AT+CPWD=”SC”,1234,5555 +CME ERROR: 16
Note: Change PIN Note: PIN was wrong
AT+CPIN=5555 OK
Note: Enter PIN Note: PIN was correct
AT+CPWD=”PN”,12345678,00000000 OK
Note: Change NCK Note: NCK changed for net lock

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 95 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

7.5.3 Defined values

<fac>: facility
• “PS”
• “SC”
• “AO”
• “OI”
• “OX”
• “AI”
• “IR“
• “AB”
• “AG”
• “AC”
• “P2”
• “FD”
• ”N”
• ”U”
• ”P”
• ”C”

<oldpwd>, <newpwd>
On 4 or up to 8 or 16 digits according to the facility.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 96 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8 Phonebook commands
A phonebook group can hold up to 100 entries. These entries can come from
different phonebooks (SIM or/and Flash phonebook).

Please refer to §3.3 for details on numbers length.

8.1 Parameters definition

8.1.1 SIM Contact Structure

<num_Home> Home phone number
<Name> Name
Please refer to §3.3 for details on <num_Home> length.

8.1.2 Extended SIM Contact Structure

<num_Home> Home phone number
<Name> Name
<Phb_Group> Phonebook group
Please refer to §3.3 for details on <num_Home> length.
This structure can be used to write and read contacts in mode extended
(+WCOS=1) and with ADN phonebook selected (+CPBS=”SM”)

8.1.3 Extended Contact Structure

<num_Home> Home phone number
<Name> Name
<num_Mobile> Mobile phone number
<num_Work> Work phone number
<num_Fax> Fax number
<num_Data> Data phone number
<Email> E-mail address
<Address> Postal address
<Phb_Group> Phonebook group
Please refer to §3.3 for details on <num_Home> length.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 97 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

The structure including <num_Mobile>, <num_Work>, <num_Fax>,

<num_Data>, <Email> and <Address> will be represented by <Contact> in the
rest of this document.

So, the extended structure can be represented by:

<num_Home> Home phone number
<Name> Name
<Contact> Contact Structure
<Phb_Group> Phonebook group
Please refer to §3.3 for details on <num_Home> length.
This structure can be used to write and read contacts in mode extended
(+WCOS=1) and with ME phonebook selected (+CPBS=”ME”)

Please refer to examples in §21 Examples.

8.1.4 Phonebook groups parameter definition

<index> Group index
<name> Group name
<phb_entry_index> Phonebook entry index
<restrict call> Restrict call mode for incoming
calls

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 98 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.2 Select phonebook memory storage +CPBS

8.2.1 Description
This command selects phonebook memory storage.

Note on ADN and FDN activation: when FDN has been activated with the
+CLCK command, the selection of ADN phonebook is possible only if ADN
status bit3 is set to 1 (EF file “readable and updatable when invalidated”).
Please refer to Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 for more details.

8.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPBS=<pb>[,<pin2>]

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBS=”SM” OK
Note: Select ADN phonebook Note: ADN phonebook is selected
AT+CPBS=? +CPBS: (”SM”,”LD”,”MC”,”ON”,”ME”,”RC”,”MT”,”SN”,”EN”)
Note: Possible values OK

AT+CPBS? +CPBS:”SM”,10,20
Note: Status OK
Note: ADN phonebook selected, 10 locations used, 20
locations available

Selection of ADN phonebook when FDN is active is SIM dependent.

Note: Selection of “FD” phonebook with <pin2>, when <pin2> is already
verified, will give error CME ERROR: 3

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 99 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.2.3 Defined values

<pb>: phonebook
• "SM": ADN Abbreviated Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)
• "FD": FDN Fixed Dialing Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)
• "ON": MSISDN (SIM own numbers)
• "EN": ECC Emergency Call Codes (SIM or ME)
• "LD": LND Last Number Dialed
• "MC": ME missed (unanswered received) calls list
• "ME": ME phonebook
• "MT": combined ME and SIM phonebook (ME+SM)
• "RC": ME received calls list
• "SN": SDN Service Dialing Numbers (SIM special service numbers)
Note: “EN” will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present.
When the SIM is not present, the following emergency numbers are
available :
000, 08, 112, 110, 118, 119, 911, 999
When a SIM is present, the following emergency numbers are available :
112, 911, emergency numbers from ECC SIM files (if existing)

<pin2>: Personal Identification Number 2.

Note: the following emergency numbers are stored in E2P:

o 112
o 911
o 999
o 08
So, “EN” will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present..

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 100 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.2.4 Defined values

<pb>: phonebook
• "SM": ADN Abbreviated Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)
• "FD": FDN Fixed Dialing Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)
• "ON": MSISDN (SIM own numbers)
• "EN": ECC Emergency Call Codes (SIM or ME)
• "LD": LND Last Number Dialed
• "MC": ME missed (unanswered received) calls list
• "ME": ME phonebook
• "MT": combined ME and SIM phonebook (ME+SM)
• "RC": ME received calls list
• "SN": SDN Service Dialing Numbers (SIM special service numbers)
Note: the following emergency numbers are stored in E2P:
o 112
o 911
o 999
o 08
So, “EN” will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present.

8.3 Read phonebook entries +CPBR

8.3.1 Description
This command returns phonebook entries for a range of locations from the
current phonebook memory storage selected with +CPBS.
Note: For all phonebook read commands (+CPBR, +CPBF, +CPBN, +CPBP,
+CNUM), the TON/NPI MSB of each number is set to 1 (ex: a TON/NPI stored
as 17 is displayed as 145).
If the AT+WCOS=1 command was used, the response will include <Contact>
structure.

8.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPBR=<first_entry>[,<last_entry>]
Response syntax:
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[…]]

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 101 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1

<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
[…]]
• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0:
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[…]]
• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>
[<CR><LF>+CPBR:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group> […]]

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBR=? +CPBR: (1-50),20,10

Note: Test command OK
Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), max length for
phone number is 20 digits, 10 characters max for
the text
AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 0
Note: Test command OK
Note: Contact not selected
AT+CPBR=12,14 +CPBR: 12,”112”,129,”Emergency”
Note: Read entries from 12 to 14 +CPBR: 13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”
+CPBR: 14,”0146290808”,129,”Zazi”
OK
Note: Display locations 12,13,14 with location,
number, type (TON/NPI), Text
AT+CPBR=10 +CPBR: 10,”0146290921”,129,”Rob”
Note: Read entry 10 OK
Note: Display location 10
AT+CPBR=11 +CPBR:
Note: Read entry 11 (UCS2 format) 11,”0146290921”,129,”8000010002FFFF”
OK
Note: Display location 11
AT+CPBR=52 +CME ERROR: 21
Note: Read entry 52 (wrong) Note: Invalid index
AT+CPBS=”ME” OK
Note: Flash memory

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 102 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note: Contact selected
AT+CPBR=13 +CPBR: 13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,
Note: Read entry ”0141284549”, 129, ”0600003210”, 129,
”0141280000”, 129, ”019876543210”, 129,
“fred@mail_address.com”, “Becker Street
London”,1
OK
Note: Display locations 13 with location, number,
type (TON/NPI), Text and Contact and Phonebook
Group n°1
AT+CPBS=”SM” OK
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR=1,”0123456”,129,”test”
OK
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456”,,”test”,1 OK
Note: Add an extended entry in SIM
with group number (1)
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR=1,”0123456”,129,”test”,1
OK

8.3.3 Defined values

<first_entry>, <last_entry>
location (or range of locations) where to read phonebook entry.
<type (TON/NPI)>
Type of address byte in integer format. Value is 145 if the dialing string
(<number> response value) includes the international access code
character ‘+’, else value is 129.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 103 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.4 Write phonebook entry +CPBW

8.4.1 Description
This command writes a phonebook entry in location number <index> in the
current phonebook memory storage.
Notes:
• “RC” and “MC” phonebooks could be only erased by +CPBW. Adding field
and/or modifying field is not allowed for these phonebooks.
• This command is not allowed for “EN”, “LD”, “MC”, “RC”, “MT”, “SN”
phonebooks, which can not be written.
• If the AT+WCOS=1 command was used, the request would include the
‘Contact’ structure.

8.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax:
• For ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=0
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]

• For ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1

AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text> [,<Phb_group>]]]]

• For ME phonebook with AT+WCOS=0

AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]

• For ME phonebook with AT+WCOS=1

AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>[,<Contact> [,<Phb_group>]]]]]

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBS=”SM” OK
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+CPBS? +CPBS:”SM”,1,10
Note: Which phonebook is selected ? OK
Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 1 location is
used and 10 locations are available
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBW=? +CPBW: (1-50),20,(129,145),10
Note: Test command OK
Note: 50 locations, phone number = 20 digits
max, TON/NPI of 129 or 145, text length = 10

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 104 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBW=5,”112”,129,”SOS” OK
Note: Write at location 5 Note: Location 5 written
AT+CPBR=5 +CPBR: 5,”112”,129,”SOS”
Note: Read the entry at location 5
AT+CPBS? +CPBS:”SM”,2,10
Note: Which phonebook is selected ? OK
Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 2 locations
are used and 10 locations are available
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky” OK
Note: Overwrite location 5 Note: Location 5 overwritten
AT+CPBW=6,”01292349”,129,”8000410042” OK
Note: write location 6 (UCS2 format for the Note: Location 6 is written
<text> field)
AT+CPBW=8,”01292349”,129,”80xyz” OK
Note: write location Note: Location 8 is written. The string has a
wrong UCS2 format, it is therefore considered
as an ASCII string
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”,1 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Write an extended entry Note: Error because +WCOS: 0
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”,1 OK
Note: Write an extended entry
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBS=”ME” OK
Note: ME phonebook

AT+CPBS? +CPBS: “ME”,2,500

Note: How many entries are used ? Note: ME phonebook is selected, 2 locations are
used and 500 locations are available
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry” OK
Note: Write an not extended entry
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first +CME ERROR: 3
entry”,”9876543210”,129
Note: Write an extended entry
Note: Error because +WCOS: 0
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR: 1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”
Note: Read the first entry
AT+ WCOS=1 OK
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry” OK
Note: Write an entry not extended

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 105 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBW=2,”9876543210”,129,”second OK
entry”,”6543210987”,129
Note: Write an entry extended
AT+CPBR=1,2 +CPBR: 1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”
Note: Read entry 1 and 2
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”, OK
”0141284549”,129,”0600003210”,129,”0141
280000”, 129,”019876543210”,129,
Note: Location 13 is written
“fred@mail_address.com”, “Becker Street
London”,1
Note: write location with Contact and
Phonebook Group n°1
AT+CPBW=,”+33145221100”,145,”SOS” OK
Note: Write at the first location available Note: First location available is written
AT+CPBW=,”0345221100”,129,”SOS” +CME ERROR: 20
Note: Write at the first location available Note: Phonebook full
AT+CPBW=57,”112”,129,”WM” +CME ERROR: 21
Note: Write at location 57 (wrong) Note: Invalid index
AT+CPBW=7,”012345678901234567890”,12 +CME ERROR: 26
9,”WAVE”
Note: Phone number too long
Note: Write at location 7 a phone number
exceeding the limit (21 digits)
AT+CPBW=7,”0122334455”,129,”WAVECOM +CME ERROR: 24
TEL”
Note: Text too long
Note: Write at location 7 along text (11
characters)
AT+CPBS=”SM” OK
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 1
OK
Note: Extended phonebook
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:1,”0123456”,129,”test”
OK
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456”,,”test”,1 OK
Note: Add an extended entry in SIM with
group number (1)
AT+CPBR=1 +CPBR:1,”0123456”,129,”test”,1
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 106 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,”01 OK
41284549”,129,”0600003210”,129,”0141280
000”, 129, ”019876543210”,129,
“fred@mail_address.com”, “Becker Street
London”,1
Note: save the entry in the phonebook group
#1
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”, OK
”0141284549”,129,”0600003210”,129,”0141
280000”, 129, ”019876543210”,129,
“fred@mail_address.com”, “Becker Street
London”
Note: save the entry without phonebook group
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”, OK
”0141284549”,129,”0600003210”,129,”0141
280000”, 129, ”019876543210”,129,
“fred@mail_address.com”, “Becker Street
London”,0
Note: save the entry without phonebook group

This command is not allowed when the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) is
locked. Moreover, when the FDN is unlocked, PIN2 is required to write in the
FDN phonebook. If PIN2 authentication has been performed during the current
session, the +CPBW command with FDN is allowed.

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBS=”FD” OK
Note: Choose FDN
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky” +CME ERROR: 17
Note: Write in FDN at location 5 Note: SIM PIN2 is required
AT+CPIN? SIM PIN2
Note: SIM PIN2 is required
AT+CPIN=5678 OK
Note: Enter SIM PIN2
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky” OK
Note: Write in FDN at location 5 Note: Writing in FDN is now allowed

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 107 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.4.3 Defined values

<index> Integer type value depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory.
0 value deletes all entries of the current phonebook (selected with
+CPBS command)
Note: to delete all entries of the current phonebook, +WCOS parameter
must be different from 0, elsewhere a +CME ERROR: 21 (invalid index)
will be returned.
<number> Phone number in ASCII format(see § 3.3 Length of phone numbers).
<type> TON/NPI (Type of address octet in integer format).
Note: Value is 145 if the dialing string (<number> response value)
includes the international access code character ‘+’, else value is 129
(ex: a <type> value of 17 will be written as 145).
<text> string type. Maximum length of <text> field is:
• For the ME phonebook, 30 ASCII characters.
• For the ADN phonebook: SIM dependant (use AT+CPBW=?)
Notes:
• for the <text> parameter all strings starting with “80” , “81” or “81”
are considered in UCS2 format.
• The +CSCS (Select Character set) command does not affect the
format for phonebook entries.
<contact> Contact structure

<Phb_Group>: phonebook group number in which the entry should be saved.

Range of value is 1 to 10. If the entry must not be saved in a group,
<Phb_Group> = 0 or can be omitted.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 108 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.5 Find phonebook entries +CPBF

8.5.1 Description
This command returns phonebook entries with alphanumeric fields starting
with a given pattern. The AT+CPBF=“” command can be used to display all
phonebook entries sorted in alphabetical order.
This command is not allowed for "LD", "RC", "MC", "SN" phonebooks and for the
“EN” phonebook, which does not contain alphanumeric fields.
It is possible to use this command with UCS2 strings. If a wrong UCS2 format
is entered, the string is considered as an ASCII string.

8.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPBF=<string>
Response syntax:
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBF: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBF: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBF: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBF:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBF=? +CPBF: 20,14
Note: Test command OK
Note: Max length for phone number is 20 digits, 14
characters for the text
AT+CPBF=“E” +CPBF: 12,”112”,129,”Emergency”
Note: Read entries with “E” +CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
OK
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “E”
AT+CPBF=”H” +CME ERROR: 22
Note: Read entries with “H” Note: No entry found
AT+CPBF=”800001” +CPBF: 11, ”0146290921”, 129, ”8000010002FFFF”
Note: Read entries starting with OK
0001 UCS2 character Note: Display locations with text field starting with 0001
UCS2 character

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 109 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBF=”8045C” +CME ERROR: 22
Note: Read entries with “8045C” Note: No entry found. The string has a wrong UCS2 format, it
(ASCII format) is therefore considered as an ASCII string
AT+CPBS=”SM” OK
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBF=“Test” +CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”
Note: Read entries with “Test” Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBF=“Test” +CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”,0
Note: Read entries with “Test” Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”,
extended entry
AT+CPBS=”ME” OK
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBF=“Test” +CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ME”
Note: Read entries with “Test” Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBF=“Test” +CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ME”, ”9876543210”,
129,””,,””,,””,,”e_mail@mail_address.com”,”post address”,0

Note: Read entries with “Test” Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”,
extended entry

8.5.3 Defined values

<string> Searched pattern string (depends on the format of data stored
in the phonebooks)
<loc> location number (20 digits max)
<num> phone number (20 digits max)
<type> TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format)
<contact> Extended contact structure

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 110 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.6 Phonebook phone search +CPBP

8.6.1 Description
This specific command orders the product to search in the phonebook for an
item with the same phone number as provided in the parameter.
The searched phone number is the FIRST one that a user can enter with
AT+CPBW:
For example, with this enter, we can only search the phone number
(+331290909):
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,”0141284549”,129,”0600003210”,
129,”0141280000”, 129,”019876543210”,129, “fred@mail_address.com”,
“Becker Street London”,”0”

8.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPBP=<PhoneNumber>
Response syntax:
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBP: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBP: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBP: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBP: <loc>, <num>, <type>, <name>, <Contact>,
<Phb_group>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 111 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBP=”+331290101” +CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Search entries corresponding to this OK
phone number Note: Display the entry corresponding to the
specified phone number
AT+CPBP=”+331290101” +CPBP: 15,”01290101”,129,”Eric”
Note: Search entries corresponding to this OK
phone number Note: Display the entry corresponding to the
specified phone number
AT+CPBP=”01290202” +CPBP: 15,”+331290202”,145,”David”
Note: Search entries corresponding to this OK
phone number Note: Display the entry corresponding to the
specified phone number
AT+CPBP=”+331288575” +CPBP: 15, ”+331290101”, 145,
Note: Search entries corresponding to this ”8045682344FFFF”
phone number OK
Note: Display the entry corresponding to the
specified phone number (UCS2 format)
AT+CPBP=”0129” +CME ERROR: 22
Note: Search entries corresponding to this Note: Entry not found
phone number
AT+CPBS=”SM” OK
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBP=“0123456789” +CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”
Note: Search entries corresponding to this Note: Display the entry corresponding to the
phone number specified phone number
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBP=“0123456789” +CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”,0
Note: Search entries corresponding to this Note: Display locations with text field starting with
phone number “Test”, extended entry
AT+CPBS=”ME” OK
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBP=“0123456789” +CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ME”
Note: Search entries corresponding to this Note: Display locations with text field starting with
phone number “Test”
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note: Phonebook extended

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 112 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBP=“0123456789” +CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test
Note: Search entries corresponding to this ME”,”9876543210”,129,””,,””,,””,,”e_mail@some
phone number where.com”,”postal address”,0
Note: Display locations with text field starting with
“Test”, extended entry

8.6.3 Defined values

<PhoneNumber> phone number (is coded like any GSM 07.07 or GSM
07.05 phone number)
<loc> location number
<num> phone number
<type> TON/NPI (Type of address octet in integer format)
<contact> contact structure

8.7 Move action in phonebook +CPBN

8.7.1 Description
This specific command performs a forward or backward move in the
phonebook (in alphabetical order). It is not allowed for the “EN” phonebook
which does not contain alphanumeric fields.

8.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPBN=<mode>
Response syntax:
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBN: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBN: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBN: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the ME phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBN:
<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 113 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBN=? +CPBN: (0-5)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Possible modes
AT+CPBS=”SM” OK
Note: ADN phonebook

AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBN=0 +CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Read the first location OK
Note: Display the first location
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBN=2 +CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”,0
Note: Read the next location OK
Note: Display the second location, extended
entry
AT+CPBN=2 +CPBN: 6,”+331290302”,145,”Marc”,0
Note: Read the next location OK
Note: Display the third location, extended entry
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBN=3 +CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”
Note: Read the previous location OK
Note: Display the second location
AT+CPBN=1 +CPBN: 6,”+331290302”,145,”Marc”
Note: Read the last location OK
Note: Display the last location
AT+CPBN=2 +CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Read the next location OK
Note: Display the first location

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 114 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Using mode 4 and 5 with +CPBF command and CPBW:

Command Possible responses

AT+CPBF=”Er” +CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Find ”Er” in phonebook OK
Note: Display the location
AT+CPBN=2 +CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”
Note: Read the next location OK
Note: Display the following location
AT+CPBF=”Er” +CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Find ”Er” in phonebook OK
Note: Display the location
AT+CPBN=4 +CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Get the last location read OK
Note: Display the last location read
AT+CPBW=,”0146290800”,129,”WM” OK
Note: Write an item at the first location available Note: No information about this location
AT+CPBN=4 +CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Get the last location read OK
Note: Display the last location read
AT+CPBN=5 +CPBN: 38,”0146290800,129,”WM”
Note: Display the last item written with its OK
location Note: Display the last item written with its
location
AT+CPBN=4 +CPBN: 38,”0146290800,129,”WM”
Note: Get the last item read OK
Note: Now the last item read is the last written
item too
AT+CPBF=”800041FFFF” +CPBF:
Note: Find”800041” in phonebook 15,”+3312345”,145,”8000414339FFFF”
OK
Note: Display this location
AT+CPBN=4 +CPBN:
Note: Get the last location read 15,”+3312345”,145,”8000414339FFFF”
OK
Note: Display the last location read
Please note that the AT+CPBN=5 command is useful after an AT+CPBW
command used without a location.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 115 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.7.3 Defined values

<mode> 0 First item
1 Last item
2 Next valid item in alphabetical order
3 Previous valid item in alphabetical order
4 Last item read (usable only if a read operation has been
performed on the current phonebook since the end of
initialization)
5 Last item written (usable only if a write operation has been
performed on the current phonebook since the end of
initialization)
<loc> location number
<num> phone number
<type> TON/NPI (Type of address octet in integer format)
<contact> contact structure

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 116 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.8 Subscriber number +CNUM

8.8.1 Description
This command returns the subscriber MSISDN(s).
If the subscriber has several MSISDNs for various services, each MSISDN is
returned in a separate line.

8.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CNUM
Response syntax: +CNUM: <alpha1>, <number1>, <type1>
<CR><LF> +CNUM: <alpha2>, <number2>, <type2> ….

Command Possible responses

AT+CNUM +CNUM: ”Phone”, “0612345678”,129

+CNUM: ”Fax”, “0687654321”,129
Note: Get MSISDN(s) +CNUM: “80001002FFFF”, “+0183773”, 145 (UCS2 format)
OK
Note: MSISDNs
AT+CNUM=? OK

8.8.3 Defined values

<alphax> optional alphanumeric string associated with <numberx>
<numberx> string type phone number with format as specified by <typex>
<typex> type of address byte in integer format

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 117 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.9 Avoid phonebook init +WAIP

8.9.1 Description
This specific command allows the initialization of all phonebooks to be
inhibited during subsequent boots.

8.9.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WAIP=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+WAIP? +WAIP:0
OK
Note: Current values ? Note: Default value (init phonebooks)
AT+WAIP=? +WAIP: (0,1)
Note: Possible values ? OK
Note: Disable / enable
AT+WAIP=1 OK
Note: Inhibit initialization of phonebooks (next Note: no answer
boot)
AT&W
Note: Save modifications in EEPROM

Caution: the given value should be stored in EEPROM. Therefore, the AT&W
command must be used to save the new <mode> value.
Notes:
• No phonebook commands are allowed if +WAIP=1 (after boot).
• If a phonebook command is entered, a “+CME ERROR: 3” is returned.

8.9.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Normal initialization (with phonebooks)
1: No phonebook initialization

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 118 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.10 Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP

8.10.1 Description
This specific command allows to delete the calls listed in some phonebooks.

8.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WDCP=<calls phonebook>

Command Possible responses

AT+WDCP? OK
AT+WDCP=? +WDCP: ("LD","MC","RC")
OK
Note: Possible values ? Note: Identifiers of the phonebooks supporting a
list of calls
AT+WDCP=”LD” OK
Note: Delete all the content of Last Note: Last Dialing phonebook is now empty.
Dialing phonebook.

8.10.3 Defined values

<calls phonebook>
“LD”: SIM (ME extended) Last dialing phonebook
“MC”: ME missed calls list phonebook
“RC”: ME received calls list phonebook

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 119 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.11 Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM

8.11.1 Description
This commands allows to set/get and enable/disable the voice mail number in
memory.

8.11.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSVM=<mode>[,<number>[,<type>]]

Command Possible responses

AT+CSVM? +CSVM: 1,”660”,129

OK
Note: Get mail number Note: Voice mail number “660” is activated
AT+CSVM=? +CSVM: (0-1),(129,145)
OK
Note: Possible values ? Note: activation/deactivation and format 129
& 145 are supported
AT+CSVM=0,”888”,129 OK
Note: Disable Voice Mail number and
change value to “888”.

8.11.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Disable the voice mail number
1: Enable the voice mail number
<number>
Phone number in ASCII format.
<type>
TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format).
Note: Value is 145 if the dialing string (<number> response value) includes
the international access code character ‘+’, else. value is 129 (ex: a <type>
value of 17 will be written as 145).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 120 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.12 Contact Selector +WCOS

8.12.1 Description
This command allows to enable/disable the displaying the extended contact.

8.12.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WCOS=<mode>
Command Possible responses

AT+WCOS? +WCOS: 1
Note: Test command OK
Note: Extended contact selected
AT+WCOS=? +WCOS: (0-2)
Note: Possible values ? OK
Note: Possible responses
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: Contact not selected
AT+WCOS=3 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Mode not allowed

8.12.3 Defined values

<mode>
0 Select the SIM contacts
1 Select the extended contacts for phonebook entries
2 Internal use only. Customer application should not use
this value.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 121 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.13 Create and delete a phonebook group +WPGW

8.13.1 Description
This command creates or deletes a phonebook group.

8.13.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WPGW=<index>[,<name>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WPGW=? +WPGW: (1-10),30

Note: Test command OK
Note: 10 possible groups, group name can be 30
characters max
AT+WPGW=1,”group 1” OK
Note: Create group #1 Note: group 1 created
AT+WPGW=1,”phb group1” OK
Note: Rename group #1 Note: group 1 created
AT+WPGW=1 OK
Note: Erase group #1 Note: group 1 erased

8.13.3 Defined values

<index> Index of the new group
<name> Name of the group. It can be up to 30 ASCII characters or 13 UCS2
characters long.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 122 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.14 Read a phonebook group +WPGR

8.14.1 Description
This command reads the phonebook group entries, the phonebook group name
or the number of used records in a group.

8.14.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WPGR=<mode>,<index>

Command Possible responses

AT+WPGR=? + WPGR: (1-4),(1-10)

Note: Test command OK
Note: 10 possible groups
AT+WPGR=1,1 +WPGR: 1,”group 1”
Note: Read the name of phonebook OK
group 1
AT+WPGR=2 +WPGR: 1,”group 1”
Note: Read the name of all +WPGR: 2,”group 2”
phonebook groups OK
AT+WCOS=0 OK
Note: phonebook not extended
AT+WPGR=3,1 +WPGR: 1,”+33123456789”,145,”John”
+WPGR: 2,”+33567891234”,145,”Elvis”
Note: Lists all entries of phonebook +WPGR: 31,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”
group 1 +WPGR: 32,”0123456789”,129,”Test”
OK
Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries:
index 31 and 32 (The SIM supports 30 entries in
this example)
AT+WCOS=1 OK
Note: phonebook extended

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 123 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WPGR=3,1 +WPGR: 1, ”+33123456789”, 145, ”John”, 1

+WPGR: 2,”+33567891234”,145,”Elvis”,1
Note: Lists all entries of phonebook +WPGR: 31,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,
group 1 ”0141284549”,
129,”0600003210”,129,”0141280000”, 129,
”019876543210”, 129,
“fred@mail_address.com”, “Becker Street
London”, 1
+WPGR: 32,”0123456789”,129,”Test”,
”0141284549”, 129, ”0600003210”, 129,
”0141280000”, 129, ”6549873210”, 129”,
“test@mail_address.com”,“”,1
OK
Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries:
index 31 and 32 (The SIM supports 30 entries in
this example)
AT+WPGR=4,1 +WPGR: 4/100
Note: Read the number of used OK
records in the phonebook group 1

Note: the entries list displayed with AT+WPGR=3,1 contains records from both
ME and SIM phonebook (MT phonebook).

8.14.3 Defined values

<mode> 1 read the name of one phonebook group
2 read the name of all phonebook groups
3 list all entries of one phonebook group
4 read the number of used records in a phonebook group
<index> Index of the group (for mode = 3 or mode = 4)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 124 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

8.15 Settings of a group +WPGS

8.15.1 Description
This command sets parameters of a group.

8.15.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WPGS=<mode>,<index>[,<restrict call>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WPGS=1,1,1 OK
Note: set restrict call to “All Accepted”
AT+WPGS=0,1 +WPGS:1
Note: Command reads group 1 settings OK
Note: Group 1: all accepted
AT+WPGS=? +WPGS: (0-1),(1-10),(0-1)
Note: Test command OK

8.15.3 Defined values

<mode> 0 Read group settings
1 Write group settings
<index> Index of a group
<restrict call> Parameter is optional if <mode>=0. It is mandatory if <mode>=1.
0: All Refused - incoming call is forwarded to the voice mailbox.
1: All Accepted - incoming call is received (RING message is
displayed)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 125 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9 Short Messages commands

9.1 Parameters definition

<da> Destination Address, coded like GSM 03.40 TP-DA

<dcs> Data Coding Scheme, coded like in document [5].
<dt> Discharge Time in string format:
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”(Year [00-99], Month [01-12], Day
[01-31], Hour, Minute, Second and Time Zone [quarters of an
hour] ). Years range is [2000-2099]
<fo> First Byte, coded like SMS-SUBMIT first byte in document [4],
default value is 17 for SMS-SUBMIT
<index> Place of storage in memory.
<length> Text mode (+CMGF=1): number of characters
PDU mode (+CMGF=0): length of the TP data unit in bytes
<mem1> Memory used to list, read and delete messages (+CMGL,
+CMGR and +CMGD).
<mem2> Memory used to write and send messages (+CMGW, +CMSS).
<mem3> Preferred memory to which received SMS are to be stored
<mid> CBM Message Identifier.
<mr> Message Reference.
<oa> Originator Address.
<pid> Protocol Identifier.
<pdu> For SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40
TPDU in hexadecimal format, coded as specified in doc [4] For
CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
<ra> Recipient Address.
<sca> Service Center Address
<scts> Service Center Time Stamp in string format:
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”
(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:Seconds±TimeZone)
<sn> CBM Serial Number
<st> Status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT
<stat> Status of message in memory.
<tooa> Type-of-Address of <oa>.
<tora> Type-of-Address of <ra>.
<tosca> Type-of-Address of <sca>.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 126 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<total1> Number of message locations in <mem1>.

<total2> Number of messages locations in <mem2.
<total3> Number of messages locations in <mem3>.
<used1> Total number of messages locations in <mem1>.
<used2> Total number of messages locations in <mem2.
<used3> Total number of messages locations in <mem3>.
<vp> Validity Period of the short message, default value is 167

9.2 Select message service +CSMS

9.2.1 Description
The supported services are originated (SMS-MO) and terminated short
message (SMS-MT) + Cell Broadcast Message (SMS-CB) services.

9.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSMS=<service>

Command Possible responses

AT+CSMS=0 +CSMS: 1,1,1
OK
Note: SMS AT command Phase 2 version Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported
4.7.0
AT+CSMS=1 +CSMS: 1,1,1
Note: SMS AT command Phase 2 + Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported
AT+CSMS? +CSMS: 0,1,1,1
Note: Current values ? OK
Note: GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (SMS AT command
Phase 2 version 4.7.0
AT+CSMS=? +CSMS: (0,1)
Note: Possible services OK

9.2.3 Defined values

<service>
0: SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version
4.7.0.
1: SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 +
version.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 127 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.3 New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA

9.3.1 Description
This command allows reception of a new message routed directly to the TE to
be acknowledged.
• In TEXT mode, only positive acknowledgement to the network (RP-ACK)
is possible.
• In PDU mode, either positive (RP-ACK) or negative (RP-ERROR)
acknowledgement to the network is possible.
Acknowledge with +CNMA is possible only if the +CSMS parameter is set to 1
(+CSMS=1) when a +CMT or +CDS indication is shown (see +CNMI
command).
If no acknowledgement is given within the network timeout, an RP-ERROR is
sent to the network, the <mt> and <ds> parameters of the +CNMI command
are then reset to zero (do not show new message indication).

9.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax in text mode: AT+CNMA
Command syntax in PDU mode: AT+CNMA [ = <n> [ , <length> [ <CR>
PDU is entered <ctrl-Z / ESC> ] ] ]

Note: PDU is entered using <ackpdu> format instead of <pdu> format (e.g..
SMSC address field is not present).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 128 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Example of acknowledgement of a new message in TEXT mode

Command Possible responses

AT+CSMS=1 OK
Note: SMS AT commands
compatible with GSM 07.05
Phase 2 + version
AT+CMGF=1 OK
Note: Set TEXT mode Note: TEXT mode valid
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0 OK
Note: <mt>=2
+CMT: “123456”,”98/10/01,12:30 00+00”, 129, 4,
32, 240, “15379”, 129, 5<CR><LF>
Received message
Note: message received
AT+CNMA OK
Note: acknowledge the message Note: send positive acknowledgement to the
received network
AT+CNMA +CMS ERROR: 340
Note: try to acknowledge again Note: no +CNMA acknowledgment expected

Example of acknowledgement of a new message in PDU mode:

Command Possible responses

AT+CSMS=1 OK
Note: SMS AT commands compatible with
GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version
AT+CMGF=0 OK
Note: Set PDU mode Note: PDU mode valid
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0 OK
Note: <mt>=2
+CMT: ,29
07913366003000F1240B913366920547
F30000003003419404800B506215D42E
CFE7E17319
Note: message received
AT+CNMA=2,2<CR> OK
>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.
Reason is: memory capacity exceeded

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 129 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CNMA=2,2<CR> OK
>00D0 <Ctrl-Z>
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.
Reason is: SIM memory storage is full
AT+CNMA=2,2<CR> OK
>00D2 <Ctrl-Z>
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.
Reason is: Error in MS
AT+CNMA=2,2<CR> OK
>00FF <Ctrl-Z>
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.
Unspecified error

9.3.3 Defined values

<n>: Type of acknowledgement in PDU mode
0: send RP-ACK without PDU (same as TEXT mode)
1: send RP-ACK with optional PDU message
2: send RP-ERROR with optional PDU message
<length>: Length of the PDU message
Please refer to GSM 03.40 Recommendation for other PDU negative
acknowledgement codes.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 130 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.4 Preferred Message Storage +CPMS

9.4.1 Description
This command allows the message storage area to be selected (for reading,
writing, etc).

9.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPMS=<mem1>,[<mem2>,[<mem3>]]

Command Possible responses

AT+CPMS=? +CPMS: ((“SM”,”ME”,”BM”,”SR”),

(“SM”,”ME”), (“SM”,”ME”))
Note: Possible message storages OK
Note: Read, list, delete: SMS or SMS Status Report
Write, send: SMS
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10
OK
Note: Read Note: Read, write…SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are
stored in SIM. 10 is the total memory available in
SIM
AT+CPMS=”SM”,”ME”,”SM” +CPMS: 3,10,3,99,3,10
OK
Note: Select SM for reading, ME for writing and SM
for storing
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,3,99,”SM”,3,10
OK
Note: Read Note: Read, store…SMS from/to flash, write SMS to
flash. 3 SMS are stored in flash. 99 is the total
memory available in flash
+CMTI: “SM”,4

Note: Receive a SMS stored in SIM at location 4

AT+CPMS=”ME”,”ME”,”ME” +CPMS: 3,99,3,99,3,99

Note: Select ME for reading, ME for writing and ME

OK
for storing
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “ME”,3,99,”ME”,3,99,”ME”,3,99
OK
Note: Read Note: Read, write, store SMS from/to flash. 3 SMS
are stored in flash. 99 is the total memory available
in flash
+CMTI: “ME”,4
Note: Receive a SMS stored in flash at location 4

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 131 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPMS=”AM” +CMS ERROR: 302

Note: Select wrong message storage

AT+CPMS=”SM” +CPMS: 4,10,4,99,4,99

Note: Select SM for reading, writing and storing OK
memory are not changed
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “SM”,4,10,”ME”,4,99,”ME”,4,99
OK
Note: Read Note: Read SMS from SIM; write, store SMS
from/to flash

9.4.3 Defined values

<mem1> Memory used to list, read and delete messages. It can be:
• SM: SMS message storage in SIM (default)
• ME: SMS message storage in Flash.
• SR: Status Report message storage (in SIM if the EF-SMR file
exists, otherwise in the ME non volatile memory)
• BM: CBM message storage (in volatile memory).
Note: “SR” ME non volatile memory is cleared when another SIM
card is inserted. It is kept, even after a reset, while the same SIM
card is used.
<mem2> Memory used to write and send messages
• SM: SMS message storage in SIM (default).
• ME: SMS message storage in Flash.
<mem3> Memory to which received SMS are preferred to be stored
• SM: SMS message storage in SIM (default).
• ME: SMS message storage in Flash.

If the command is correct, the following message indication is sent:

+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>
When <mem1> is selected, all following +CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD
commands are related to the type of SMS stored in this memory.
The maximum number of SMS in flash is 99.
When the module is switched on, <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> are
initialized to SM.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 132 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.5 Preferred Message Format +CMGF

9.5.1 Description
The message formats supported are text mode and PDU mode.
In PDU mode, a complete SMS Message including all header information is
given as a binary string (in hexadecimal format). Therefore, only the following
set of characters is allowed: {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F}. Each
pair or character is converted to a byte (e.g.: ‘41’ is converted to the ASCII
character ‘A’, whose ASCII code is 0x41 or 65).
In Text mode, all commands and responses are in ASCII characters.
The selected format is stored in EEPROM by the +CSAS command.

9.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CMGF=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGF? +CMGF:1
OK
Note: Current message format Note: Text mode
AT+CMGF=? +CMGF: (0,1)
OK
Note: Possible message format Note: Text or PDU modes are available

Example, sending an SMS Message in PDU mode

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGF=0 OK
Note: Set PDU mode Note: PDU mode valid
AT+CMGS=14<CR> +CMGS: 4
0001030691214365000004C9E9340B OK
Note: Send complete MSG in PDU mode, Note: MSG correctly sent, <mr> is returned
no SC address

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 133 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.5.3 Defined values

<mode> PDU or text mode
0 PDU mode
1 Text mode

The <pdu> message is composed of the SC address (00 means no SC address

given, use default SC address read with +CSCA command) and the TPDU
message.
In this example, the length in bytes of the TPDU buffer is 14, coded as GSM
03.40
In this case the TPDU is: 0x01 0x03 0x06 0x91 0x21 0x43 0x65 0x00 0x00
0x04 0xC9 0xE9 0x34 0x0B, which means regarding GSM 03.40:

<fo> 0x01 (SMS-SUBMIT, no validity period)

<mr> (TP-MR) 0x03 (Message Reference)
<da> (TP-DA) 0x06 0x91 0x21 0x43 0x65 (destination address
+123456)
<pid> (TP-PID) 0x00 (Protocol Identifier)
<dcs> (TP-DCS) 0x00 (Data Coding Scheme: 7 bits alphabet)
<length> (TP-UDL) 0x04 (User Data Length, 4 characters of text)
TP-UD 0xC9 0xE9 0x34 0x0B (User Data: ISSY)

TPDU in hexadecimal format must be converted into two ASCII characters. For
example, the byte 0x2A is presented to the ME as two characters ‘2’ (ASCII 50)
and ‘A’ (ASCII 65).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 134 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.6 Save Settings +CSAS

9.6.1 Description
All settings specified by the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are stored in
EEPROM if the SIM card is a Phase 1 card or in the SIM card if it is a Phase 2
SIM card.

9.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSAS

Command Possible responses

AT+CSAS OK
Note: Store +CSCA and +CSMP parameters Note: Parameters saved

9.6.3 Defined values

No parameter

9.7 Restore settings +CRES

9.7.1 Description
All settings specified in the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are restored from
EEPROM if the SIM card is Phase 1 or from the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 one.

9.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CRES

Command Possible responses

AT+CRES OK
Note: Restore +CSCA and +CSMP parameters Note: Parameters restored

9.7.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 135 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.8 Show text mode parameters +CSDH

9.8.1 Description
This command gives additional information on text mode result codes. These
information can be found in description of the +CMT, +CMGR, +CMGL
commands and responses.

9.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSDH=<n>

Command Possible responses

AT+CSDH=0 OK
Note: Set value to “do not show”
AT+CSDH? +CSDH: 0
Note: Current value OK
Note: Do not show header values

9.8.3 Defined values:

<n>: show indicator
• 0: do not show header values
• 1: show the values in result codes

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 136 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.9 New message indication +CNMI

9.9.1 Description
This command selects the procedure for message reception from the network.

9.9.2 Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CNMI=<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>

Command Possible responses

AT+CNMI=2,1,0,0,0 OK
Note: <mt>=1
AT+CMTI: “SM”,1
Note: message received
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0 OK
Note: <mt>=2
+CMT: “123456”,”98/10/01,12:30
00+00”,129,4
,32,240, “15379”,129,5<CR><LF>
Note: message received
AT+CNMI=2,0,0,1,0 OK
Note: <ds>=1
AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR> +CMGS: 7
Happy Birthday !<ctrl-Z> OK
Note: Send a message in text mode Note: Successful transmission
+CDS: 2, 116, ”+33146290800”, 145,
“98/10/01,12:30:07+04”, “98/10/01
12:30:08+04”, 0
Note: message was correctly delivered

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 137 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.9.3 Defined values

<mode>: controls the processing of unsolicited result codes
0: Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code buffer is
full, indications can be buffered in some other place or the oldest
indications may be discarded and replaced with the new received
indications
1: Discard indication and reject new received message unsolicited
result codes when TA-TE link is reserved. Otherwise forward them
directly to the TE
2: Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved
and flush them to the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them
directly to the TE
3: Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link
specific in-band used to embed result codes and data when TA is in on-
line data mode
Important note: only <mode>=2 is supported.
Any other value for <mode> (0,1 or 3) is accepted (return code will be
OK), but the processing of unsolicited result codes will be the same as
with<mode>=2.

<mt>: sets the result code indication routing for SMS-DELIVER indications.
Default is 1.
0: No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed.
1: SMS-DELIVERs are routed using unsolicited code: +CMTI:
“SM”,<index>
2: SMS-DELIVERs (except class 2 messages) are routed using
unsolicited code:
if PDU mode:
+CMT: [<alpha>], <length> <CR> <LF> <pdu>
if text mode:
+CMT: <oa>,[<alpha>], <scts> [,<tooa>, <fo>, <pid>, <dcs>,
<sca>, <tosca>, <length>] <CR><LF><data>
3: Class 3 SMS-DELIVERS are routed directly using code in <mt>=2 ;
Other classes messages result in indication <mt>=1

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 138 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<bm>: defines the rules for storing the received CBMs (Cell Broadcast
Message) types. They depend also on the coding scheme (text or PDU) and the
setting of Select CBM Types (see +CSCB command). Default is 0.
0: No CBM indications are routed to the TE. The CBMs are stored.
1: The CBM is stored and an indication of the memory location is
routed to the customer application using unsolicited result code: +CBMI:
“BM”, <index>
2: New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result
code.
If PDU mode:
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> or
If text mode:
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages> <CR><LF>
<data>
3: Class 3 CBMs: as <bm>=2.
Other classes CBMs: as <bm>=1.

<ds> for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs. Default is 0.

0: No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed.
1: SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed using unsolicited code:
If PDU mode:
+CDS: <length> <CR> <LF> <pdu> (PDU mode) or
If text mode:
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>, [<ra>] , [<tora>], <scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text
mode)
2: SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are stored and routed using the unsolicited
result code: +CDSI: “SR”,<index>

<bfr> Default is 0.
0: TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is
flushed to the TE when <mode> = 1 to 3 is entered (OK response shall be
given before flushing the codes)
1: TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is
cleared when <mode> 1…3 is entered.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 139 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.10 Read message +CMGR

9.10.1 Description
This command allows the application to read stored messages. The messages
are read from the memory selected by +CPMS command.

9.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CMGR=<index>
Response syntax for text mode:
• for SMS-DELIVER only
+CMGR:<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>,] <scts> [,<tooa>,<fo>, <pid>, <dcs>,
<sca>, <tosca>, <length>] <CR><LF> <data>
• for SMS-SUBMIT only
+CMGR: <stat>,<da>,[<alpha>,] [,<toda>, <fo>, <pid>, <dcs>, [<vp>],
<sca>, <tosca>, <length>]<CR><LF> <data>
• for SMS-STATUS-REPORT only
+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> ()
Response syntax for PDU mode:
+CMGR: <stat>, [<alpha>] ,<length> <CR><LF> <pdu>

A message read with status “REC UNREAD” will be updated in memory with
the status “REC READ”.
Note: the <stat> parameter for SMS Status Reports is always “READ”.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 140 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CMTI: “SM”,1
Note: New message received
AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: “REC UNREAD”, ”0146290800”,
Note: Read the message ”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”, <CR><LF>
ABCdefGHI
OK
AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: “REC READ”,”0146290800”,
Note: Read the message again ”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”, <CR><LF>
ABCdefGHI
OK
Note: Message is read now
AT+CMGR=2 +CMS ERROR: 321
Note: Read at a wrong index Note: Error: invalid index
AT+CMGF=0 ;+CMGR=1 +CMGR: 2,,<length> <CR><LF><pdu>
OK
Note: In PDU mode Note: Message is stored but unsent, no
<alpha>field
AT+CMGF=1;+CPMS=”SR”;+CNMI=,,,2 OK
Note: Reset to text mode, set read
memory to “SR”, and allow storage of
further SMS Status Report into “SR”
memory
AT+CMSS=3 +CMSS: 160
Note: Send an SMS previously stored OK
+CDSI: “SR”,1
Note: New SMS Status Report stored in
“SR” memory at index 1

AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: "REC UNREAD",6,160,

Note: Read the SMS Status Report "+33612345678", 129,
"01/05/31,15:15:09+00",
"01/05/31,15:15:09+00", 0
OK

9.10.3 Defined values

See paragraph 9.1.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 141 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.11 List message +CMGL

9.11.1 Description
This command allows the application to read stored messages, by indicating
the type of the message to read. The messages are read from the memory
selected by the +CPMS command.

9.11.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CMGL=<stat>
Response syntax for text mode:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>], [<scts>, <tooa/toda>, <length>]
<CR><LF><data> (for SMS-DELIVER and SMS-SUBMIT, may be followed by
other <CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (for
SMS-STATUS-REPORT only, may be followed by other
<CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)

Response syntax for PDU mode:

+CMGL: <index>,<stat>, [<alpha>], <length> <CR><LF> <pdu> (for SMS-
DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT and SMS-STATUS-REPORT, may be followed by other
<CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGL=“REC UNREAD” +CMGL: 1,”REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,,

Note: List unread messages in text <CR><LF> I will be late
mode +CMGL: 3,”REC UNREAD”, “46290800”,,
<CR><LF>See you tonight !
OK
Note: 2 messages are unread, these messages
will then have their status changed to “REC
READ”
AT+CMGL=”REC READ” +CMGL: 2,”REC READ”,”0146290800”,,
Note: List read messages in text <CR><LF> Keep cool
mode OK
AT+CMGL=”STO SENT” OK
Note: List stored and sent Note: No message found
messages in text mode
AT+CMGL=1 +CMGL: 1,1,,26
Note: List read messages in PDU <CR><LF>
mode 07913366003000F3040B913366920547F40013
001190412530400741AA8E5A9C5201
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 142 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.11.3 Defined values

<stat> possible values (status of messages in memory):
PDU mode
Text mode
possible Status of messages in memory
possible values
values
“REC UNREAD” 0 received unread messages

“REC READ” 1 received read messages

“STO UNSENT” 2 stored unsent messages

“STO SENT” 3 stored sent messages

“ALL” 4 all messages

Note: for SMS Status Reports, only “ALL” / 4 and “READ” / 1 values of the
<stat> parameter will list messages ; other values will only return OK.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 143 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.12 Send message +CMGS

9.12.1 Description
The <address> field is the address of the terminal to which the message is
sent. To send the message, simply type, <ctrl-Z> character (ASCII 26). The
text can contain all existing characters except <ctrl-Z> and <ESC> (ASCII 27).
This command can be aborted using the <ESC> character when entering text.
In PDU mode, only hexadecimal characters are used (‘0’…’9’,’A’…’F’).

9.12.2 Syntax
Command syntax in text mode:
AT+CMGS=<da> [ ,<toda> ] <CR>
text is entered <ctrl-Z / ESC >
Command syntax in PDU mode:
AT+CMGS=<length> <CR>
PDU is entered <ctrl-Z / ESC >

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR> >

Please call me soon, Fred. <ctrl-Z>

Note: Send a message in text mode
+CMGS: <mr>
OK
Note: Successful transmission
AT+CMGS=<length><CR> >
Note: Send a message in PDU mode (1/3)
<pdu>
Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)
<ctrl-Z> +CMGS: <mr>
Note: End the message (3/3) OK
Note: Successful transmission

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 144 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

The message reference, <mr>, which is returned to the application is allocated

by the product. This number begins with 0 and is incremented by one for each
outgoing message (successful and failure cases); it is cyclic on one byte (0
follows 255).
Note: this number is not a storage number – outgoing messages are not
stored.

9.12.3 Defined values

See paragraph 9.1.

9.13 Write Message to Memory +CMGW

9.13.1 Description
This command stores a message in memory (either SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-
DELIVERS). The memory location <index> is returned (no choice possible as
with phonebooks +CPBW).
Text or PDU is entered as described for the Send Message +CMGS command.

9.13.2 Syntax
Command syntax in text mode: (<index> is returned in both cases)
AT+CMGW=<oa/da> [,<tooa/toda> [,<stat> ] ] <CR>
enter text <ctrl-Z / ESC>
Command syntax in PDU mode:
AT+CMGW=<length> [,<stat>] <CR>
give PDU <ctrl-Z / ESC>

Response syntax:
+CMGW: <index> or +CMS ERROR: <err> if writing fails

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR> >
Hello how are you ?<ctrl-Z>
Note: Write a message in text mode
+CMGW: 4
OK
Note: Message stored in index 4

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 145 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+ CMGW=<length><CR> >

Note: Write a message in PDU mode (1/3)
<pdu>
Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)
<ctrl-Z> +CMGW: <index>
Note: End the message (3/3) OK
Note: Message stored in <index>

9.13.3 Defined values

<oa/da> Originating or Destination Address Value in string format.
<tooa/toda> Type of Originating / Destination Address.
<stat> Integer type in PDU mode (default 2 for +CMGW), or string type
in text mode (default “STO UNSENT” for +CMGW). Indicates the
status of message in memory. If <stat> is omitted, the stored
message is considered as a message to send.

0 “REC UNREAD”
1 “REC READ”
2 “STO UNSENT”
3 “STO SENT”
<length> Length of the actual data unit in bytes

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 146 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.14 Send Message From Storage +CMSS

9.14.1 Description
This command sends a message stored at location value <index>.

9.14.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da> [,<toda>] ]
Response syntax:
+CMSS: <mr> or +CMS ERROR: <err> if sending fails
If a new recipient address <da> is given, it will be used instead of the one
stored with the message

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGW=0660123456<CR> +CMGW: 5
Today is my birthday OK
Note: Note: Message stored with index 5
AT+CMSS=5, 0680654321 +CMSS:<mr>
OK
Note: Send the message 5 to a different Note: Successful transmission
destination number

9.14.3 Defined values

Please refer to § 9.1 Parameters definition for description of the parameters
<index>, <da>, <toda> and <mr>.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 147 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.15 Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP

9.15.1 Description
This command is used to select a value for <vp>, <pid>, and <dcs>.

9.15.2 Syntax ;
Command syntax: AT+CSMP=<fo>, <vp>, <pid>,<dcs>

Command Possible responses

AT+CSMP? +CSMP: 0,0,0,0

OK
Note: current values Note: No validity period
<dcs>= PCCP437 alphabet (8 bits 7
bits)
AT+CSMP=17,23,64,244 OK
Note:<vp> = 23 (2 hours, relative format) Note: Command correct
<dcs> = GSM 8 bits alphabet
Remind to enter <fo> value in decimal
notation.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 148 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.15.3 Defined values

The <fo> byte comprises 6 different fields:
b7 b6 B5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
RP UDHI SRR VPF RD MTI
Note: <fo> must be entered in DECIMAL format. Hexadecimal format would
lead to irrelevant result.

RP: Reply Path, not used in text mode.

UDHI: User Data Header Information, b6=1 if the beginning of the User
Data field contains a Header in addition to the short message. This
option is not supported in +CSMP command, but can be used in
PDU mode (+CMGS).
SRR: Status Report Request, b5=1 if a status report is requested. This
mode is supported.
VPF: Validity Period Format
b4=0 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is not present
b4=1 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is present in relative format
Others formats (absolute & enhanced) are not supported.
RD: Reject Duplicates, b2=1 to instruct the SC to reject an SMS-SUBMIT
for an SM still held in the SC which has the same <mr> and the
same <da> as the previously submitted SM from the same <oa>.
MTI: Message Type Indicator
b1=0 & b0=0 -> SMS-DELIVER (in the direction SC to MS)
b1=0 & b0=1 -> SMS-SUBMIT (in the direction MS to SC)
In text mode <vp> is only coded in “relative” format. The default value is 167
(24 hours). This means that one byte can describe different values:

VP value Validity period value

0 to 143 (VP + 1) x 5 minutes (up to 12 hours)
144 to 167 12 hours + ( (VP – 143) x 30 minutes )
168 to 196 (VP – 166) x 1 day
197 to 255 (VP – 192) x 1 week

<pid> is used to indicate the higher layer protocol being used or indicates
inter-working with a certain type of telematic device. For example, 0x22 is for
group 3 fax, 0x24 is for voice telephone, 0x25 is for ERMES (European Radio
Messaging System).
<dcs> is used to determine the way the information is encoded. Compressed
text is not supported. Only GSM default alphabet, 8 bit data and UCS2
alphabet are supported.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 149 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.16 Delete message +CMGD

9.16.1 Description
This command is used to delete one or several messages from preferred
message storage (“BM” SMS-CB ‘RAM storage’, “SM” SMSPP storage ‘SIM
storage’ or “SR” SMS Status-Report storage).
Refer also to Preferred Message Storage +CPMS command.

9.16.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CMGD=<Index> [,<DelFlag>]

Command Possible responses

+CMTI:”SM”,3
Note: New message received
AT+CMGR=3 +CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,
Note: Read it “98/10/01,18:19:20+00” <CR><LF>
Message received!
Note: Unread message received from 0146290800 on the
01/10/1998 at 18H19m 20s
AT+CMGD=3 OK
Note: Delete it Note: Message deleted
AT+CMGD=1,0 OK
Note: The message from the preferred message storage at
the location 1 is deleted
AT+CMGD=1,1 OK
Note: All READ messages from the preferred message
storage are deleted
AT+CMGD=1,2 OK
Note: All READ messages and SENT mobile originated
messages are deleted
AT+CMGD=1,3 OK
Note: All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages are deleted
AT+CMGD=1,4 OK
Note: All messages are deleted

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 150 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.16.3 Defined values

<index> If <DelFlag> = 0
• (1-20) if the preferred message storage is “BM”
• SIM dependant integer values (in the range of SIM location number) if
the preferred message storage is “SM” or “SR”.
If <DelFlag> is > 0, <index> is ignored.
<DelFlag>
0 Delete message at location <index> (default value).
1 Delete All READ messages
2 Delete All READ and SENT messages
3 Delete All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages
4 Delete All messages.
If <DelFlag> is omitted, default value is used.

Note: when the preferred message storage is “SR”, as SMS status reports are
assumed to have a “READ” status, if <DelFlag> is greater than 0, all SMS
status reports will be deleted.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 151 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.17 Service center address +CSCA

9.17.1 Description
This command is used to indicate to which service center the message must
be sent.
The product has no default value for this address. If the application tries to
send a message without having indicated the service center address, an error
will be generated.
Therefore, the application must indicate the SC address when initializing the
SMS. This address is then permanently valid. The application may change it if
necessary.

9.17.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CSCA=<sca>

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGS= “+33146290800”<CR> +CMS ERROR: 330

Hello, how are you?<ctrl-Z> Note: service center unknown
Note: Send a message
AT+CSCA=”0696741234” OK
Note: Service center initialization
AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR> +CMGS: 1
Happy Birthday ! <ctrl-Z> OK
Note: Successful transmission

9.17.3 Defined values

Please refer to § 9.1 Parameters definition for description of the parameter
<sca>.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 152 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.18 Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB

9.18.1 Description
This command selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME. It is
allowed in both PDU and text modes.

9.18.2 Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CSCB=<mode>, [ <mids>, [ <dcss> ] ]
Important note: Test read command (AT+CSCB ?) is not supported.

Command Possible responses

AT+CSCB=0,”15-17,50,86”,”” OK
Note: Accept SMS-CB types, 15,16,17,50 Note: CBMs can be received
and 86 in any language
+CBM: 10<CR><LF>
00112233445566778899
Note: CBM length of a received Cell
Broadcast message (SMS-CB), CBM bytes
in PDU mode)
AT+CSCB=1 OK
Note: Deactivate the reception of CBMs Note: CBM reception is completely
stopped

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 153 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.18.3 Defined values

The <bm> parameter of +CNMI command controls the message indication.
The activation of CBM reception (<mode>=0) can select only specific Message
Identifiers (list in <mids>) for specific Languages (list in <dcss>), but the
deactivation stops any reception of CBMs (only AT+CSCB=1 is allowed)
Message Identifiers (<mids> parameter) indicates to which type of message
identifiers the ME should listen.
<dcss>: Supported languages
0 German
1 English
2 Italian
3 French
4 Spanish
5 Dutch
6 Swedish
7 Danish
8 Portuguese
9 Finnish
10 Norwegian
11 Greek
12 Turkish
13 Hungarian
14 Polish
32 Czech.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 154 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.19 Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM

9.19.1 Description
This specific command is used to read the EF-CBMI SIM file.
Remark: The EF-CBMI file is not used with the +CSCB command.
The application should read this file (using AT+WCBM?) and combine the
Message Identifiers with those required by the application.

9.19.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WCBM=<mids>

Command Possible responses

AT+WCBM=”10,100,1000,10000” OK
Note: Write 4 messages identifiers in EF- Note: CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI
CBMI
AT+WCBM? +WCBM=”10,100,1000,100000”
Note: Read the CBMIs in EF-CBMI OK
Note: 4 CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI

9.19.3 Defined values

Please refer to § 9.1 Parameters definition for description of the parameter
<mids>.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 155 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.20 Message status modification +WMSC

9.20.1 Description
This commands allow the manipulation of a message status. The accepted
status changes are from READ to NOT READ and vice versa, and from SENT to
NOT SENT and vice versa.

9.20.2 Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WMSC=<loc>,<status>

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGR=2 +CMGR: ”REC READ”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01

14:19:44+04” <CR><LF>
Hello All of you !
OK
AT+WMSC=2,“REC UNREAD”
AT+CMGR=2 +CMGR: ”REC UNREAD”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01
14:19:44+04” <CR><LF>
Hello All of you !
OK

Possible responses:
OK if the location is valid
+CMS ERROR: 321 if <loc> is invalid or free
+CMS ERROR: 302 if the new <status> and the previous one are
incompatible (1)
Note: if all the parameters are correct, the product overwrites the whole SMS
in SIM. Only the first byte (Status byte) is changed.

9.20.3 Defined values

<loc> location number of the stored message (integer)
<status> new status to be stored, as for +CMGL command:
PDU Mode Text Mode

0 “REC UNREAD”
1 “REC READ”
2 “STO UNSENT”
3 “STO SENT”

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 156 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.21 Message overwriting +WMGO

9.21.1 Description
The +WMGO command is used to specify a location in the SIM or Flash
memory, for the next SMS storing with +CMGW command. The defined
location is used only once: +WMGO has to be used again to perform another
overwrite.
Important notes:
• If the external application specifies a free location, and an incoming
message is received before the AT+CMGW command occurs, the
product may store the incoming message at the specified available
location. If the user then issues an AT+CMGW command without
changing the location with another AT+WMGO, the received message
will be overwritten.
• The location number is not kept over a software reset.

9.21.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WMGO=<loc>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10

Note: Check the storage area OK
AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR> +CMGW: 4
Hello how are you ?<ctrl-Z> OK
Note: Write a message in text mode Note: Message stored in index 4 in the SIM
AT+WMGO=? +WMGO: (1-10)
OK
Note: Possible values for the SIM
AT+WMGO=4 OK
AT+CMGW=”+33146290000”<CR> +CMGW: 4
You are overwritten<ctrl-Z> OK
Note: New Message stored in index 4
AT+WMGO? +WMGO: 4
OK
Note: The value was used, so re-initialization
AT+WMGO=4 OK
AT+CPMS=”SM”,”ME”,”SM” +CPMS: 3,10,0,99,3,10
OK
Note: Change the storage area from SIM to
Flash

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 157 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WMGO=? +WMGO: (1-99)

OK
Note: Possible values for the Flash
AT+WMGO? +WMGO: 0
OK
Note: We changed the storage area, so the
value was reinitialized
AT+WMGO=999 +CMS ERROR: 321

Note: if the storage area is changed with the AT+CPMS command, the value of
WMGO will be reset to 0.

9.21.3 Defined values

<loc> location number of the SMS to write or overwrite. Number depends of
the SIM or Flash memory capacity.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 158 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.22 Un-change SMS Status +WUSS

9.22.1 Description
The +WUSS command allows to keep the SMS Status to UNREAD after
+CMGR or +CMGL.

9.22.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WUSS=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+WUSS=? +WUSS: (0-1)

OK
AT+WUSS=1 OK
+CMTI: "SM",10
Note: SMS has been received in index 10
AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: "REC
UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:36:35+00"<CR><LF>
Do you want to change state ?
OK
AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: "REC
UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:36:35+00"<CR><LF>
Do you want to change state ?
OK
Note: The state hasn’t be updated
AT+WUSS=0 OK
+CMTI: "SM",11
Note: SMS has been received in index 11
AT+CMGR=11 +CMGR: "REC
UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:56:55+00"<CR><LF>
It is me again.
OK
AT+CMGR=11 +CMGR: "REC
UNREAD","+33660669023",,"03/02/13,18:56:55+00"<CR><LF>
It is me again.
OK
Note: The state has been updated
AT+WUSS? +WUSS: 0
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 159 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGR=10 +CMGR: "REC READ", "+33660669023",, "03/02/13,18:56:55+00"

<CR><LF>
It is me again.
OK
Note: The state has been updated
AT+WUSS? +WUSS: 0
OK

9.22.3 Defined values

<mode>
1 The SMS Status will not change.
0 The SMS Status will change.

9.23 Copy Messages +WMCP

9.23.1 Description
This command copy the SMS from the SIM to the Flash or from the Flash to
the SIM.

9.23.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WMCP=<mode>[,<loc>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WMCP=? +WMCP: 0,(1-12)

+WMCP: 1,(1-99)
OK
Note: The location of the SMS which can be copied
from the SIM to the flash is 1 to 12 (maximum
available in the SIM). The location of the SMS which
can be copied from the flash to the SIM is 1 to 99 (the
maximum available in the flash).
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,0,99,”SM”,3,10
OK
Note: Read the SMS storage Note: Read, write…SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored
in SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM. No
SMS in Flash

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 160 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,

”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”, <CR><LF>
Note: Read the first SMS from the SIM My test message: SMS in the SIM at location 1
OK
AT+WMCP=0,1 OK

Note: Copy the SMS at location 1 in the

SIM to the Flash
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,1,99,”SM”,3,10
OK
Note: Read the SMS storage Note: Read, write…SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored
in SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM. 1 SMS
in Flash
AT+CPMS=”ME”,”ME”,”ME” +CPMS: 1,99,1,99,1,99
OK
Note: Select ME for reading, ME for
writing and ME for storing
AT+CMGR=1 +CMGR: “REC READ”,”0146290800”,
”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>
Note: Read the first SMS from the Flash My test message: SMS in the SIM at location 1
OK
AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR +CMGW: 2
> OK
Other test message: SMS in the Note: Message stored in index 2 in the flash
Flash at location 2<ctrl-Z>
Note: Write a message in text mode
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “ME”,2,99,”ME”,2,99,”ME”,2,99
OK
Note: Read the SMS storage Note: Read, write…SMS from/to the flash. 2 SMS are
stored in the flash.
AT+WMCP=1,2 OK
Note: Copy the SMS at location 2 in the
flash to the SIM
AT+CPMS=”SM”,”ME”,”SM” +CPMS: 4,10,2,99,4,10
Note: Select SM for reading, ME for OK
writing and SM for storing
AT+CMGR=4 +CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33146290800”,
”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>
Note: Read the first SMS from the SIM Other test message: SMS in the Flash at
location 2
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 161 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+CPMS=”ME” +CPMS: 2,99,2,99,4,10

OK
Note: Select ME for reading
AT+CMGD=0,4 OK

Note: Erase all the SMS stored in the

Flash
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “ME”,0,99,”ME”,0,99,”SM”,4,10
OK
Note: Read the SMS storage Note: No SMS is stored in the flash.
AT+WMCP=0 OK

Note: Copy all the SMS from the SIM to

the Flash
AT+CPMS? +CPMS: “ME”,4,99,”ME”,4,99,”SM”,4,10
OK
Note: Read the SMS storage Note: 4 SMS are stored in the flash.

9.23.3 Defined values:

<mode> Copy mode
• 0: From the SIM to the Flash
• 1: From the Flash to the SIM
<loc> Location of the SMS to copy (mandatory for <mode>=1).
If this location is not defined, all the SMS will be copied.

Note: The SMS copied will have the first free location.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 162 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

9.24 More Messages to Send +CMMS

9.24.1 Description
This short message service-oriented AT command allows to keep the link
opened while sending several short messages within a short delay.

9.24.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CMMS = <mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+ CMMS=0 OK
Note: Disable feature Note: feature is disabled
AT+ CMMS=1 OK
Note: Enable feature 1 time Note: feature is enabled, link is open
AT+ CMMS=2 OK
Note: Enable feature Note: feature is enabled, link is open
AT+ CMMS? +CMMS: 2
OK
AT+ CMMS=? +CMMS: (0-2)
OK

9.24.3 Defined values

<mode>
0 Disable feature
1 Keep link opened while messages are sent. If the delay between
two messages exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed and the
mode is reset to 0: the feature is disabled.
2 Keep link opened while messages are sent. If the delay between
two messages exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed but the
mode remains set to 2: the feature is still enabled.

Notes:
• the delay of 5 seconds complies with Rec 3GPP 27.005 §3.5.6.
• before sending the last SMS in the link, you must use AT+CMMS=0
command. This command will indicate that the NEXT SMS will be the
last one.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 163 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10 Supplementary Services commands

10.1 Call forwarding +CCFC

10.1.1 Description
This commands allows control of the "call forwarding" supplementary service.

10.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax:
AT+CCFC= <reason>, <mode> [, <number> [,<type> [,<class> [,<subaddr> [,
<satype> [,<time> ] ] ] ] ] ]

Response syntax:
+CCFC: <status>, <class1> [, <number>, <type> [,<subaddr>,
<satype> [,<time> ] ] ] [ <CR><LF>+CCFC: <status>, <class2> [,
<number>, <type> [,<subaddr>, <satype> [,<time> ] ] ] [ … ] ]

Command Possible responses

AT+CCFC=0,3,”0146290800” OK
Note: Register to an Note: Command valid
unconditional call forwarding
AT+CCFC=0,2 +CCFC:1,1,”0146290800”,129
Note: Interrogate unconditional Note: Call forwarding active for voice
call forwarding <CR><LF>+CCFC:1,2,”0146290802”,129
Note: Call forwarding active for data
<CR><LF>+CCFC:1,4,”0146290804”,129
OK
Note: Call forwarding active for fax
AT+CCFC=0,4 OK
Note: Erase unconditional call Note: Command valid
forwarding
+CCFC responses are not sorted by <class> parameter, but only by the order
of network response.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 164 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.1.3 Defined values

<reason>
0 Unconditional
1 Mobile busy
2 No reply
3 Not reachable
4 All call forwarding
5 All conditional call forwarding
<mode>
0 Disable
1 Enable
2 Interrogate
3 Registration
4 Erasure
<type>: TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format) (default 145 when
dialing string includes international access code character "+", otherwise 129)
<class>
1 Voice
2 Data
4 Fax
8 Short Messages
7 All classes
Note: The combination of different classes is not supported, it will only result in
the activation / deactivation / status request of all classes (7).
If the FDN phonebook is activated, the registration is restricted to the phone
numbers written in it.
if <Class> parameter is not given in the command, 7 is used as default value.

<subaddr> not managed

<satype> not managed
<time> For <reason> = 2 (No reply), 4 (all calls forwarding) and 5 (all
conditional call forwarding), time to wait (1 to 30) in seconds before call is
forwarded. Default value is 20.
< status >
0: not active
1: active

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 165 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.2 Call barring +CLCK

10.2.1 Description
This command allows control of the call barring supplementary service.
Locking, unlocking or querying the status of call barring is possible for all
classes or for a specific class, but not a combination of some.

10.2.2 Syntax
Command Syntax: AT+CLCK= <fac>, <mode> [, <password> [, <class> ] ]
Response Syntax: (for <mode>=2 and command successful)
+CLCK: <status> [, <class1> [ <CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>, <class2> [… ] ]

Command Possible responses

AT+CLCK=”AO”,1,1234 OK
Note: Command valid
AT+CLCK=”AO”,0,5555 +CME ERROR: 16
Note: Wrong password
AT+CLCK=”AO”,0,1234 OK
Note: Command valid

10.2.3 Defined values

<fac>
“AO”, “OI”, “OX” barring for outgoing calls
“AI”, “IR” barring for incoming calls
“AG”, “AC”,”AB” for all calls barring (<mode>=0 only)
<mode>
0: Unlocks the facility
1: Locks the facility
2: Query status
<class>: see description for +CLCK command (Facility lock) or +CCFC (Call
forwarding).
Note: A combination of different classes is not supported. It will only
result in the activation / deactivation / status request for all classes (7).
The password code is over 4 digits maximum.
< status >
0: not active
1: active

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 166 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.3 Modify SS password +CPWD

10.3.1 Description
This command is used by the application to change the supplementary service
password.

10.3.2 Syntax
Command Syntax: AT+CPWD=<fac>,<OldPassword>, <NewPassword>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPWD=”AO”,1234,5555 OK
Note: Change Call Barring password Note: Password changed
AT+CPWD=”AO”,1234,5555 +CME ERROR: 16
Note: Change password Note: Wrong password
AT+CPWD=”AO”,5555,1234 OK
Note: Change password Note: Password changed

10.3.3 Defined values

<fac>
see +CLCK command with only “P2” facility added (SIM PIN2).
Note: whatever the facility specified, the change of password applies to all
calls barring.

<OldPassword>, <NewPassword>
The password code is over up to 8 digits for P2 facility (4 to 8 digits).
The password code is over up to 4 digits for the other facilities (1 to 4
digits) .

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 167 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.4 Call waiting +CCWA

10.4.1 Description
This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service.
The product will send a +CCWA unsolicited result code when the call waiting
service is enabled.

10.4.2 Syntax
Command Syntax: AT+CCWA=<n>, [ <mode> [, <class> ] ]
Response Syntax: (for <mode>=2 and command successful)
+CCWA: <status> [, <class1> [ <CR><LF>+CCWA: <status>, <class2> [ … ] ]
Unsolicited result: +CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class> [ ,<alpha>]
(when waiting service is enabled)

Command Possible responses

AT+CCWA=1,1,1 OK
Note: Enable call waiting for voice calls Note: Command valid
AT+CCWA=1,2 +CCWA:1,1
Note: Interrogate call waiting OK
Note: Call waiting active for voice calls
+CCWA:”0146290800”,145,1,”FREDDY”
Note: Number and name of the waiting voice
call
or
+CCWA:”0146290800”,145,1,”8023459678F
FFF”
Note: Number and name of the waiting voice
call (UCS2 format)
AT+CCWA=1,0,7 OK
Note: Erase call waiting Note: Command valid
+CCWA:,,1
Note: voice call waiting (no number)
AT+CCWA? +CCWA: <n>
OK
AT+CCWA=? +CCWA: List of supported <n>
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 168 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.4.3 Defined values

<n> result code presentation status in the TA

0 Disable
1 Enable

<mode> 0 Disable
1 Enable
2 Query status

<type> Type of address byte in integer format (please refer to Rec GSM
04.08 [8] sub clause 10.5.4.7)
<class> 1 Voice
2 Data
4 Fax
8 Short Messages
7 All classes (voice, data and fax)

A combination of different classes is not supported. It will only result

in the activation / deactivation / status request for all classes (7).

<status> 0 not active

1 active

<alpha> optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number>

corresponding to the entry found in the ADN or FDN phonebook.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 169 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.5 Calling line identification restriction +CLIR

10.5.1 Description
This command allows control of the calling line identification restriction
supplementary service.

10.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CLIR=<n>
Response syntax: +CLIR:<n>,<m> (for AT+CLIR?)

Command Possible responses

AT+CLIR=2 OK
Note: Command valid
AT+CLIR ? +CLIR:<n>,<m>
Note: Ask for current functionality OK
Note: <n> and <m> as defined here-
below

10.5.3 Defined values

<n>: sets the line ID restriction for outgoing calls
0: Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the
CLIR service
1: CLIR invocation
2: CLIR suppression

<m>: shows the subscriber CLIR status in the network

0: CLIR not provisioned
1: CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
2: Unknown (no network…)
3: CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted
4: CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 170 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.6 Calling line identification presentation +CLIP

10.6.1 Description
This command allows control of the Calling Line Identifier presentation
supplementary service. When presentation of the CLI (Calling Line Identifier) is
enabled (and calling subscriber allows), +CLIP response is returned after every
RING (or +CRING) result code.

10.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CLIP=<n>
Response syntax:
+CLIP: <n>,<m> (as response to AT+CLIP?)
+CLIP: <number>, <type>[ ,<subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha> ] (for an
incoming call, after each RING or +CRING indication)

Command Possible responses

AT+CLIP=1 OK
Note: Enable CLIP Note: CLIP is enabled
AT+CLIP? +CLIP:<n>,<m>
Note: Ask for current functionality OK
Note: <n> and <m> defined as below
RING
Note: Incoming call
+CLIP: “0146290800”,129,1,,”FRED”
Note: Incoming call with number and name
presentation
RING
Note: Incoming call
+CLIP: “0146290800”,129,1,,”8000204212FFFF”
Note: Incoming call with number and name
presentation (UCS2 format)
AT+CLIP=0 OK
Note: Disable CLIP presentation Note: Command valid

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 171 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.6.3 Defined values

<n>: parameter sets/shows the result code presentation in the TA
0: Disable
1: Enable

<m>: parameter shows the subscriber CLIP service status in the network
0: CLIP not provisioned
1: CLIP provisioned
2: Unknown (no network…)

10.7 Connected line identification presentation +COLP

10.7.1 Description
This command allows control of the connected line identification presentation
supplementary service - useful for call forwarding of the connected line.

10.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+COLP=<n>
Response syntax:
+COLP: <n>,<m> (as response to AT+COLP?)
+COLP: <number>,<type> [ ,<subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha> ]
after ATD command, before OK or CONNECT <speed>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 172 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+COLP=1 OK
Note: Activate COLP Note: Command valid
AT+COLP? +COLP:1,1
Note: Ask for current functionality OK
Note: COLP is enabled and provisioned
ATD146290928; +COLP:”0146290928”,129,,”JOE”
Note: Outgoing call or
+COLP:“0146290800”,129,1,,”8000204212FFFF”
(UCS2 format)
OK
Note: Connected outgoing line number and name
presentation
AT+COLP=0 OK
Note: Deactivate COLP Note: Command valid

10.7.3 Defined values

<n>: parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status in the TA
0: Disable
1: Enable

<m>: parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status in the network
0: COLP not provisioned
1: COLP provisioned
2: Unknown (no network)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 173 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.8 Advice of charge +CAOC

10.8.1 Description
This refers to the Advice of Charge supplementary service (GSM 02.24 and
GSM 02.86) which enables the subscriber to obtain information on call cost.
With <mode>=0, the command returns the current call meter value (CCM)
from the ME.
If AOC is supported, the command can also enable unsolicited event reporting
on CCM information.
The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value
changes. Deactivation of unsolicited event reporting is performed with the
same command.
If AOC is supported, the Read command indicates whether unsolicited
reporting is activated or not.

10.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CAOC= <mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+CAOC=0 +CAOC: “000A08”

Note: Query CCM value OK
Note: Display Current Call Meter value
(CCM=2568)
AT+CAOC=1 OK
Note: Deactivate unsolicited report of CCM Note: CCM report deactivated
value
AT+CAOC=2 OK
Note: Activate unsolicited report of CCM Note: CCM report activated
value
AT+CAOC ? +CAOC:<mode>
Note: Request mode OK
Note: Display unsolicited report mode (1
or 2)
AT+CAOC=? +CAOC: (0-2)
Note: Request supported modes OK
Note: 0,1,2 modes supported

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 174 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.8.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: query CCM value
1: deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
2: activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
<ccm> string type; three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal
format (e.g. “00001E” corresponds to the decimal value 30); value is in home
units and bytes are coded in a similar way as the ACMmax value in SIM.

10.9 Accumulated call meter +CACM

10.9.1 Description
This command resets the Advice of Charge for accumulated call meter value in
SIM file EFACM. The ACM contains the total number of home units for both the
current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is required to reset the value. If setting
fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
The Read command returns the current value of the ACM.
The ACM value (entered or displayed) is in hexadecimal format with 6 digits.

10.9.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CACM=<pin2 passwd>
Possible response: +CACM: <acm value>

Command Possible responses

AT+CACM? +CACM: “000400”

Note: Request ACM value OK
Note: Display ACM value (ACM=1024)
AT+CACM=1234 OK
Note: Request ACM reset, real PIN2 is Note: ACM value is reset
“1234”
AT+CACM=0000 +CME ERROR: 16
Note: Request ACM reset with wrong PIN2 Note: Incorrect password
value
AT+CACM ? +CACM: “000000”
Note: Request ACM value OK
Note: Display ACM value (ACM = 0)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 175 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.9.3 Defined values:

<pin2 passwd>: string type
<acm value>: string type coded as <ccm> under +CAOC.

10.10 Accumulated call meter maximum +CAMM

10.10.1 Description
The set command sets the Advice of Charge related to accumulated call meter
maximum value in SIM file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number
of home units the subscriber is allowed to spend. When ACM (see +CACM)
reaches ACMmax, calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is required to set the value. If
setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
The Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.
The ACMmax value (entered or displayed) is in hexadecimal format with 6
digits.

10.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CAMM:<ACMmax>,<pin2 passwd>

Command Possible responses

AT+CAMM=”000400”,1234 OK
Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is “1234” Note: ACMmax updated to 1024
AT+CAMM=”000400”,0000 +CME ERROR: 16
Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is “1234” Note: Incorrect password
AT+CAMM ? +CAMM: “000400”
Note: Request ACMmax value OK
Note: ACMmax = 1024

10.10.3 Defined values:

<ACMmax>: string type coded as <ccm> under +CAOC. Value 0 disables
ACMmax feature.
<pin2 passwd>: string type

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 176 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.11 Price per unit and currency table +CPUC

10.11.1 Description
The set command sets the parameters for Advice of Charge related to price per
unit and the currency table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used
to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into
currency units. SIM PIN2 is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an
ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.

10.11.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPUC:<currency>,<ppu>,<pin2 passwd>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPUC=”FFR”,”0.82”,1234 OK
Note: Request Currency and Price per unit
update
AT+CPUC=”FFR”,”0.82”,1111 +CME ERROR: 16
Note: Request Currency and PPU update Note: Incorrect password
(wrong PIN2)
AT+CPUC? +CPUC:”FFR”,”0.82”
Note: Request Currency and Price OK
Note: Currency= “FFR”, Price per
unit= “0.82”

10.11.3 Defined values:

<currency>: string type
<ppu>: string type
<pin2 passwd>: string type

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 177 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.12 Call related supplementary services +CHLD

10.12.1 Description
This command is used to manage call hold and multiparty conversation
(conference call). Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released or added to a
conversation.

10.12.2 Syntax:

Command Possible responses

AT+CHLD=<n> OK
Note: if n is within the defined values
AT+CHLD=? +CHLD: (0-4, 11-17, 21-27)
OK

10.12.3 Defined values

<n>
0: Release all held calls or set User Determined User Busy (UDUB) for a
waiting call.
1: Release all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the other (held or
waiting) call.
1X: Release a specific call X (active, held or waiting)
2: Place all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts the other (held
or waiting) call.
2X: Place all active calls on hold except call X with which communication
is supported.
3: Adds a held call to the conversation.
4: Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber from both
calls (Explicit Call Transfer).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 178 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.13 List current calls +CLCC

10.13.1 Description
This command is used to return a list of current calls.

10.13.2 Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CLCC
Response syntax: OK (if no calls are available)
Else:
+CLCC: <id1>, <dir>, <stat>, <mode>, <mpty> [,<number>, <type>
[<alpha>]]
[<CR><LF>
+CLCC: <id2>, <dir>, <stat>, <mode>, <mpty> [ ,<number>, <type>
[<alpha>]][...]]]
<CR><LF>
OK

Command Possible responses

RING
Note: Incoming call
AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,1,4,0,0,"0146294079",129
OK
ATA OK
Note: Answering the cal
AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,1,1,0,0,"0146294079",129
OK
ATD0146299704; OK
Note: Outgoing call
AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,0,2,0,0,"0146294079",129
Note: Before the phone called is ringing OK
AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,0,3,0,0,"0146294079",129
Note: The phone called is ringing OK
AT+CLCC +CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"0146294079",129
Note: The call is being answered OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 179 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.13.3 Defined values

<idx> integer type, call identification as described in GSM 02.30
<dir> (direction of the call)
0: mobile originated (MO) call
1: mobile terminated (MT) call
<stat> (state of the call):
0: active
1: held
2: dialing (MO call)
3: alerting (MO call)
4: incoming (MT call)
5: waiting (MT call)
<mode> (teleservice):
0: voice
1: data
2: fax
9: unknown
<mpty> (multiparty)
0: call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties
1: call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties
<number> string type phone number in format specified by <type>
<type> type of address byte in integer format
<alpha> optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number>,
corresponding to the entry found in phonebook. (for UCS2 format see
commands examples +CLIP, +CCWA or +COLP)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 180 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.14 Supplementary service notifications +CSSN

10.14.1 Description
This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated
notifications.

10.14.2 Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CSSN= <n>, <m>
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a
mobile originated call setup, intermediate result code
+CSSI:<code1>[,<index>] is sent before any other MO call setup result codes.
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a
call, unsolicited result code +CSSU:<code2>[,<index>[,<number>,<type>]] is
sent.

10.14.3 Defined values

<n> (parameter sets/shows the +CSSI result code presentation status):
0 disable
1 enable
<m> (parameter sets/shows the +CSSU result code presentation status):
0 disable
1 enable
<code1>
0 Unconditional call forwarding is active
1 Some of the conditional call forwardings are active
4 closed User Group call, with CUG <index>
5 outgoing calls are barred
6 incoming calls are barred
7 CLIR suppression rejected

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 181 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<code2>
0 This is a forwarded call (MT call setup)
1 closed User Group call, with CUG <index>
2 call has been put on hold (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields
may be present)
3 call has been retrieved (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields
may be present)
4 multiparty call entered (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields
may be present)
5 call on hold has been released (during a voice call)
7 call is being connected (alerting) with the remote party in alerting state in
Explicit Call Transfer operation (during a voice call)
8 call has been connected with the other remote party in Explicit Call
Transfer operation (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may
be present)

<index> Closed User Group index

<number> String type phone number
<type> Type of address

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 182 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.15 Unstructured supplementary service data +CUSD

10.15.1 Description
The USSD supplementary service is described in GSM 02.90.
It is based on sequences of digits which may be entered by a mobile user with
a handset. A sequence entered is sent to the network which replies with an
alphanumerical string, for display only, or for display plus request for the next
sequence.
This command is used to:
• enable or disable the CUSD indication sent to the application by the
product when an incoming USSD is received
• send and receive USSD strings

10.15.2 Syntax :
Command syntax: AT+CUSD = <n> [ ,<str> [ <dcs> ] ]

Note : in case of enabled presentation, a +CUSD (as direct answer to a send

USSD) is then indicated with:
+CUSD: <m> [,<str>,<dcs> ]

10.15.3 Defined values

<n>
0 Disable the result code presentation
1 Enable the result code presentation
2 Cancel session (not applicable to read command response)

<m>
0 no further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify,
or no further information needed after mobile initiated
operation)
1 further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request,
or further information needed after mobile initiated operation)
2 USSD terminated by network
4 Operation not supported

<str>: network string (name), converted in the selected character set

<dcs>: the data coding scheme received (GSM TS 03.38).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 183 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.15.4 Syntax To send and receive USSD:

Command syntax: AT+CUSD= <n> [,<str> [,<dcs>]]
Note: Please, be aware that the send USSD command needs the user to re-
enter the <n> parameter !

10.15.5 Defined values To send and receive USSD:

<str> is the USSD string to be sent.
<dcs> the default alphabet and the UCS2 alphabet are supported.
When the product sends a USSD, an OK response is first returned, and the
intermediate +CUSD indication comes subsequently.
In case of error, a “+CUSD:4” indication is returned.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 184 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

10.16 Closed user group +CCUG

10.16.1 Description
The Closed User Group Supplementary Service enables subscribers to form
groups with restricted access (both access to and from).
The CUG supplementary service is described in GSM 02.85. This service is
provided on prior arrangement with the service provider. Subscription options
should be selected at implementation.
The +CCUG command is used to:
• activate/deactivate the control of CUG information for all following
outgoing calls,
• select a CUG index,
• suppress outgoing access (OA). OA allows or not a member of a CUG to
place calls outside the CUG.
• suppress the preferential CUG. Preferential is the default CUG used by
the network when it does not receive an explicit CUG index.

10.16.2 Syntax :
Command syntax: AT+CCUG = <n> [ ,<index> [ <info> ] ]

10.16.3 Defined values

<n>
0 Disable CUG mode (default)
1 Enable CUG mode
<index>
0-9 CUG index (0 default)
10 Preferred CUG
<info>
0 No information (default)
1 Suppress OA
2 Suppress preferential CUG
3 Suppress OA and preferential CUG
Remark: to activate the control of the CUG information by call, add [G] or [g] to
the ATD command. In this case, index and info values will be used.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 185 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11 Data commands

11.1 Using AT Commands during a data connection

To use AT Commands during a data connection (e.g. while the product is in

online mode), it is necessary either to switch to offline mode, or to use the
specific +WMUX command to enable Commands / Data multiplexing.

11.1.1 Switch from online to offline mode

To switch from online mode to offline mode, the “+++” sequence must be
sent. Following this, the product gets back to offline mode with an “OK”
response, and a AT command can be sent.
Note: the “+++” sequence will only work with the +ICF command using one of
the following settings:
• 8 data bits, with no parity
• 7 data bits, with even parity

11.1.2 Switch from offline to online mode

See the ATO command description.

11.2 Bearer type selection +CBST

11.2.1 Description
This command applies to both outgoing and incoming data calls, but in a
different way. For an outgoing call, the two parameters (e.g. <speed> and
<ce>) are meaningful, whereas for an incoming call, only the <ce> parameter
is used.
Note 1) For incoming calls, if <ce> is set to ‘T’ only and the network offers
only ‘NT’ or vice versa, then the call is released.
Note 2) Values 2 and 3 for <ce> parameter are equivalent to former values
100 and 101. Those values are managed for compatibility purpose, but they
shouldn’t be used in new code (2 as former 100, and 3 as former 101).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 186 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CBST= <speed>, <name>, <ce>

Command Possible responses

AT+CBST=? +CBST: (0-8,65,66,68,70,71),(0),(0-3)

Note: Test command OK
Note: Data 14,4 kbps not supported
AT+CBST=? +CBST: (0-8,12,14,65,66,68,70,71,75),(0),(0-3)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Data 14,4 kbps supported
AT+CBST=7,0,1 OK
Note: Ask for a bearer Note: Bearer supported
AT+CBST? +CBST:7,0,1
OK
Note: Current values Note: Command valid
AT+CBST=81,0,0 +CME ERROR: 4
Note: Ask for a bearer Note: Bearer not supported

11.2.3 Defined values

<speed>
0 (default) Autobauding (modem type: none)
1 300 bps (modem type: V.21)
2 1200 bps (modem type: V.22)
3 1200/75 bps (modem type: V.23)
4 2400 bps (modem type: V.22bis)
5 2400 bps (modem type: V.26ter)
6 4800 bps (modem type: V.32)
7 9600 bps (modem type: V.32)
8 Specific
12 9600 bps (modem type: V.34)
14(*) 1400 bps (modem type: V.34)
65 300 bps (modem type: V.110)
66 1200 bps (modem type: V.110)
68 2400 bps (modem type: V.110)
70 4800 bps (modem type: V.110)
71 9600 bps (modem type: V.110)
75(*): 14400 bps (modem type: V.110)
(*)This speed configures data and fax 14.4 kbps bearers.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 187 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<name>
No data compression is provided and only asynchronous modem is supported:
<name> = 0.
<ce>: Connection element
0 Transparent only
1(default) Non transparent only
2 Transparent preferred
3 Non transparent preferred

11.3 Select mode +FCLASS

11.3.1 Description
This command sets the product into a particular operating mode (data or fax).

11.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FCLASS= <n>

Command Possible responses

AT+FCLASS=? +FCLASS: (0,1)

Note: Test command OK
Note: Fax class 2 not supported
AT+FCLASS=? +FCLASS: (0,1,2)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Fax class 2 supported
AT+FCLASS=0 OK
Note: Data mode requested Note: Command valid
AT+FCLASS=1 OK
Note: Fax class 1 mode requested Note: Command valid
AT+FCLASS? +FCLASS: 1
OK
Note: Current value Note: Command valid

11.3.3 Defined values

<n>
0: Data
1: Fax class 1
2: Fax class 2

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 188 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.4 Service reporting control +CR

11.4.1 Description
This command enables a detailed type of service reporting in the case of
incoming or outgoing data calls. Before sending the CONNECT response to the
application, the product will specify the type of data connection that has been
set up.
These report types are:
+CR: ASYNC For asynchronous transparent
+CR: REL ASYNC For asynchronous non-transparent

11.4.2 Syntax :
Command syntax: AT+CR=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+CR=0 OK
Note: Extended reports disabled Note: Command valid
AT+CR=1 OK
Note: Extended reports enabled Note: Command valid
AT+CR? +CR: 1
OK
AT+CR=? +CR: (0,1)
OK

11.4.3 Defined values:

<mode>:
0: disable extended reports
1: enable extended reports

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 189 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.5 Cellular result codes +CRC

11.5.1 Description
This command allows more detailed ring information for an incoming call
(voice or data). Instead of the string “RING”, an extended string is used to
indicate which type of call is ringing (e.g. +CRING: VOICE).
These extended indications are:
+CRING ASYNC for asynchronous transparent
+CRING: REL ASYNC for asynchronous non-transparent
+CRING: VOICE for normal speech.
+CRING: FAX for fax calls

11.5.2 Syntax :
Command syntax: AT+CRC=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+CRC=0 OK
Note: Extended reports disabled Note: Command valid
AT+CRC=1 OK
Note: Extended reports enabled Note: Command valid
AT+CRC? +CRC: 1
OK
AT+CRC=? +CRC: (0,1)
OK

11.5.3 Defined values:

<mode>:
0: disable extended reports
1: enable extended reports

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 190 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.6 DTE-DCE local rate reporting +ILRR

11.6.1 Description
This parameter controls whether the extended-format “+ILRR: <rate>”
information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE or not. The <rate>
value reported represents the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-DCE
speed rate.
If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted in an incoming or
outgoing data call, after any data compression report, and before any final
result code (CONNECT).

11.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+ILRR = <value>

Command Possible responses

AT+ILRR=0 OK
Note: Local port rate report disabled Note: Command valid
AT+ILRR=1 OK
Note: Local port rate report enabled Note: Command valid
AT+ILRR? +ILRR: 1
OK
AT+ILRR=? +ILRR: (0,1)
OK

11.6.3 Defined values:

<value>:
0: disable local port rate report
1: enable local port rate report

<rate> can take the following values: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 (kbps).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 191 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.7 Radio link protocol parameters +CRLP

11.7.1 Description
This command modifies the radio link protocol parameters used for non
transparent data transmission.

11.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CRLP= <iws>, <mws>, <T1>, <N2>, <ver>

Command Possible responses

AT+CRLP=? +CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1,255),(0)

Note: Test command OK
Note: V42bis not supported
AT+CRLP=? +CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1,255),(0,1)
Note: Test command OK
Note: V42bis supported
AT+CRLP=61,61,48,6,0 OK
Note: Set new parameters Note: Command valid
AT+CRLP? +CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0
Note: Current values Note: Command valid

11.7.3 Defined values

<iws>: Down window size, (default is 61)
Range 0 to 61
<mws>: Up window size, (default is 61)
Range 0 to 61
<T1>: Acknowledgement timer in units of 10ms, (default is 48)
Range 40 to 255
<N2>: Retransmission attempts, (default is 6),
Range 1 to 255
<ver>: Version number.
0: V42bis is not supported.
1: V42bis is supported

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 192 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.8 Others radio link parameters +DOPT

11.8.1 Description
This WAVECOM specific command modifies some supplementary radio link
protocol parameters.

11.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+DOPT=<reset_allowed>,<dtx_allowed>

Command Possible responses

AT+DOPT=1 OK
nd
Note: Set new parameters (2 value is the Note: Command valid
default one)
AT+DOPT=? (0,1),(0,1)
Note: Test command OK
Note: DTX is supported
AT+DOPT=1,1 OK
Note: Set new parameters Note: Command valid
AT+DOPT? 1,1
Note: Current values OK
Note: Command valid

11.8.3 Defined values

<reset_allowed>
0 Data communication is hung up in case of bad radio link.
1 Data communication is held, even in case of bad radio link (possible
loss of data). Default value

< dtx_allowed >

0 Normal mode
1 Economic battery mode (not supported by all networks), default value

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 193 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.9 Select data compression %C

11.9.1 Description
This command enables or disables data compression negotiation if this feature
is supported by the product.

11.9.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT%C<n>

Command Possible responses

AT%C0 OK
Note: Command Note: Feature supported
AT%C2 OK
Note: Command Note: V42bis supported
AT%C? 2
Note: Current value OK
Note: Command valid

11.9.3 Defined values

<n>
0: no compression (default value)
2: V42bis compression if supported

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 194 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.10 V42 bis data compression +DS

11.10.1 Description
This command enables or disables V.42bis data compression if this feature is
supported by the product. Beware that the product only allows the MNP2
protocol.

11.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+DS=<dir>,<neg>,<P1>,<P2>

Command Possible responses

AT+DS=? +DS: (0-3),(0,1),(512-2048),(6-250)

Note: Test command OK
AT+DS=3,0, 2048,250 OK
Note: Set new parameters Note: Command valid
AT+DS? +DS: 3,0,2048,250
Note: Current values OK
Note: Command valid

11.10.3 Defined values

< dir >: specifies the desired direction(s) of operation of the data compression
function; from the DTE point of view
0 Negotiated … no compression
1 Transmit only
2 Receive only
3 Both directions, accept any direction (default value)
< neg >: specifies whether or not the DCE should continue to operate if the
desired result is not obtained
0 Do not disconnect if V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as
specified in <dir> (default value)
1 Disconnect if V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as
specified in <dir>
< P1 >: specifies the maximum number of dictionary entries that should be
negotiated, (default is 2048)
Range 512 to 2048
< P2 >: specifies the maximum string length to be negotiated, (default is 20).
Range 6 to 250

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 195 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.11 V42 bis data compression report +DR

11.11.1 Description
This command determines whether or not the use of V42bis is allowed for an
incoming or outgoing data call, if the feature is provided by the product.
The intermediate result code represents current DCE-DCE data compression
type. The format of this result code is as follows:

+DR: NONE Data compression is not in use

+DR: V42B Rec. V.42 bis is in use in both directions
+DR: V42B RD Rec. V.42 bis is in use in receive direction only
+DR: V42B TD Rec. V.42 bis is in use in transmit direction only

The +DR intermediate result code, if enabled, is issued before the final result
code, after the service report control +CR and before the +ILRR intermediate
report.

11.11.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+DR=<status>

Command Possible responses

AT+DR=? +DR: (0,1)

Note: Test command OK
AT+DR=1 OK
Note: Reporting enabled Note: Command valid
AT+DR? +DR: 1
Note: Current value OK
Note: Command valid

11.11.3 Defined values

<status>: state of the V42bis enabling
0: disabled (default value)
1: enabled

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 196 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

11.12 Select data error correcting mode \N

11.12.1 Description
This command controls the preferred error correcting mode for a data
connection, if the feature is provided by the product. It can only be used for
transparent data transmission.
If the MNP2 feature is provided, the product authorizes MNP error correction
mode.

11.12.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT\N<n>

Command Possible responses

AT\N0 OK
Note: no error correction
AT\N? 0
Note: Current value OK
Note: Command valid
AT\N4 +CME ERROR: 3

11.12.3 Defined values

<n>
0: Disables error correction mode (default value)
5: Selects MNP error correction mode
Note: +E prefixed commands of V.25 ter are not used.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 197 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

12 Fax commands
The fax service provided by the product is class 1 compatible. However, only
the core commands defined by ITU T.31 are supported. This means that
commands such as AT+FAR, +FCC, etc. are not supported.
Autobauding must be enabled to set up the product for fax.
All commands described hereafter will return an ERROR response code if they
are not issued during communication.

12.1 Transmit speed +FTM

12.1.1 Description
This command sets the fax transmit speed.

12.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FTM=<speed>

Command Possible responses

AT+FTM=? (24,48,72,73,74,96,97,98,121,122,145,146)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Fax 14.4 kbps supported

12.1.3 Defined values

<speed>
24 2400 bps (modem type V.27ter)
48 4800 bps (modem type V.27ter)
72 7200 bps (modem type V.29)
73 7200 bps (long) (modem type V.17)
74 7200 bps (short) (modem type V.17)
96 9600 bps (modem type V.29)
97 9600 bps (long) (modem type V.17)
98 9600 bps (short) (modem type V.17)
121 12000 bps (long) (modem type V.17)
122 12000 bps (short) (modem type V.17)
145 14400 bps (long) (modem type V.17)
146 14400 bps (short) (modem type V.17)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 198 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

12.2 Receive speed +FRM

12.2.1 Description
This command sets the fax receive speed.

12.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FRM=<speed>

Command Possible responses

AT+FRM=? (24,48,72,73,74,96,97,98,121,122,145,146)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Fax 14.4 kbps supported

12.2.3 Defined values

The speed values are identical to those of the +FTM command (see 12.1).

12.3 HDLC transmit speed +FTH

12.3.1 Description
This command sets the fax transmit speed, using the HDLC protocol.

12.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FTH=<speed>

Command Possible responses

AT+FTH=? +FTH: (3)

Note: Test command OK

12.3.3 Defined values

<speed>
3: V.21 channels 300 bps.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 199 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

12.4 HDLC receive speed +FRH

12.4.1 Description
This command sets the fax receive speed, using the HDLC protocol.

12.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FRH=<speed>

Command Possible responses

AT+FRH=? +FTH: (3)

Note: Test command OK

12.4.3 Defined values

<speed>
3: V.21 channels 300 bps.

12.5 Stop transmission and wait +FTS

12.5.1 Description
This command stops transmission for the specified period.

12.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FTS=<n>

Command Possible responses

AT+FTS=? (0-255)
Note: Test command OK
AT+FTS=50 OK
Note: Stops transmission and waits for 0.5s Note: Command valid

12.5.3 Defined values

<n>: silence period (unit is 10 ms).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 200 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

12.6 Receive silence +FRS

12.6.1 Description
This command causes the modem to stop listening to the network and report
back to the DTE after the specified period.
It is aborted if any character is received from the application.

12.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FRS=<n>

Command Possible responses

AT+FRS=? (0-255)
Note: Test command OK
AT+FRS=50 OK
Note: Stops transmission and waits for 0.5s Note: Command valid

12.6.3 Defined values

<n>: no-listening period (units is 10 ms).

12.7 Setting up the PC fax application:

The recommended fax application is Delrina WinFax v8.0.

It should be configured as follows (menu Setup/Fax Modem Setup):
• Port: any com
• Model: Generic Class 1 (hardware flow control). A generic class 1 with
software flow control can also be selected.
• Init: default string is suitable for the product
• Reset: default string is suitable for the product
• Maximum Transmit Rate: 9600 baud (if higher, rate will be automatically
cut back to 9600 baud).
Other settings are of no relevance for the GSM unit: they can be modified.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 201 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13 Fax class 2 commands

If the feature is supported, the commands +FDT, +FDR, +FET, +FPTS and +FK
must be used during call only.
The other commands, +FBOR, +FBUF, +FCQ, +FCR, +FDCC, +FDIS, +FLID and
+FPHCTO, cannot be used during call.

13.1 Transmit Data +FDT

13.1.1 Description :
This command prefixes data transmission.

13.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FDT

13.1.3 Defined values

No parameter

13.2 Receive Data +FDR

13.2.1 Description
This command initiates data reception.

13.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FDR

13.2.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 202 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.3 Transmit page punctuation +FET

13.3.1 Description
This command punctuates page and document transmission after the +FDT
command. It indicates that the current page is complete, and if there are
additional pages to send.

13.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FET=<ppm>
The remote station should respond with +FPTS:<ppr>

13.3.3 Defined values

<ppm>
0 Another page next, same document
1 Another document next
2 No more pages or documents
3 Another partial page next
4 Another page, procedure interrupt
5 Another document, procedure interrupt
6 All done, procedure interrupt

13.4 Page transfer status parameters +FPTS

13.4.1 Description
This command sets post page transfer response.

13.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FPTS=<ppr>

13.4.3 Defined values

<ppr>
1 Page good
2 Page bad ; retry requested
3 Page good ; retrain requested
4 Page bad ; interrupt requested
5 Page good ; interrupt requested

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 203 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.5 Terminate Session +FK

13.5.1 Description
This command causes the product to terminate the session.

13.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FK

13.5.3 Defined values

No parameter

13.6 Page transfer bit order +FBOR

13.6.1 Description
This command sets the bit order for negotiation and fax page transfer. The
order is related to the bit order on radio link.

13.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FBOR=<n>

Command Possible responses

AT+FBOR=? (0-3)
Note: Test command OK

13.6.3 Defined values

<n> Bit order for negotiation Bit order for page transfer
0(default) Same Same
1 Same Reverse
2 Reverse Same
3 Reverse Reverse

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 204 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.7 Buffer size report +FBUF

13.7.1 Description
This command requests the size of the exchange buffer between the modem
and the fax application.
Note: Only the read command is supported.

13.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FBUF
Command Possible responses
AT+FBUF? 1024
Note: Current value OK
Note: Command valid

13.7.3 Defined values

No parameter

13.8 Copy quality checking +FCQ

13.8.1 Description
This command controls Copy Quality checking for receiving faxes.

13.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FCQ=<n>
Command Possible responses
AT+FCQ=? (0)
Note: Test command OK

13.8.3 Defined values

<n>
0: default value, the only supported

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 205 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.9 Capability to receive +FCR

13.9.1 Description
This commands controls the capability of the modem to accept incoming faxes.

13.9.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FCR=<n>

Command Possible responses

AT+FCR=? (0,1)
Note: Test command OK

13.9.3 Defined values

<n>
0 The modem will not accept incoming faxes.
1 The modem will accept incoming faxes (default value).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 206 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.10 Current sessions parameters +FDIS

13.10.1 Description
This command allows the DTE to parameter the capabilities used for the
current session.

13.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FDIS=<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

Command Possible responses

(0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)
AT+FDIS=? OK
Note: Fax ECM not supported, Fax 14,4 kbps supported
(0,1),(0-3),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)
OK
Note: Fax ECM not supported, Fax 14,4 kbps not supported

13.10.3 Defined values

This command accepts eight numeric parameters (of the T30 standard).
<vr>: Vertical Resolution,
0 Normal: 98 lpi (default value)
1 Fine: 196 lpi

<br>: Bit Rate,

0 2400 bps (modem type V.27 ter)
1 4800 bps (modem type V.27 ter)
2 7200 bps (modem type V.29)
3 9600 bps (modem type V.29, V.17). Default value if 14,4 kbps data
feature IS NOT supported.
4(*) 12000 bps (modem type V.33, V.17)
5(*) 14400 bps (modem type V.33, V.17). Default value if 14,4 kbps data
feature IS supported.
(*) Only when product supports 14,4 kbps data feature

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 207 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<wd>: Page Width,

0 1728 pixels in 215 mm (default value)
1 2048 pixels in 255 mm
2 2432 pixels in 303 mm

<ln>: Page Length,

0 A4, 297 mm
1 B4, 364 mm
2 Unlimited (default value)

<df>: Data Compression Format,

0 1-D modified Huffman (default value)
1 2-D modified read
2 2-D uncompressed mode
3 2-D modified modified read

<ec>: Error Correction,

0: Disable Fax ECM. Default value if fax ECM feature IS NOT supported.
1(*): Enable Fax ECM, 64 bytes/frame
2(*): Enable Fax ECM, 256 bytes/frame. Default value if fax ECM feature IS
supported.
(*) Only when product supports fax Error Correction Mode feature

<bf>: Binary File Transfer,

Only <bf>: 0 is supported.

<st>: Scan Time per line,

<st> Description if <vr>=0 Description if <vr>=1

0 (default) 0 ms 0 ms
1 5 ms 5 ms
2 10 ms 5 ms
3 10 ms 10 ms
4 20 ms 10 ms
5 20 ms 20 ms
6 40 ms 20 ms
7 40 ms 40 ms

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 208 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.11 DCE capabilities parameters +FDCC

13.11.1 Description
This command allows the DTE to parameter the capabilities used for any
session.

13.11.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FDCC=<vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>

Command Possible responses

AT+ FDCC=? (0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0-2),(0),(0-7)

Note: Test command OK
Note: Fax ECM supported, Fax 14,4 kbps supported
(0,1),(0-5),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)
OK
Note: Fax ECM not supported, Fax 14,4 kbps supported
(0,1),(0-3),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0-2),(0),(0-7)
OK
Note: Fax ECM supported, Fax 14,4 kbps not supported
(0,1),(0-3),(0-2),(0-2),(0-3),(0),(0),(0-7)
OK
Note: Fax ECM not supported, Fax 14,4 kbps not supported

13.11.3 Defined values

The parameters and default values are the same as for the +FDIS command
(see 13.10.3).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 209 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.12 Local ID string +FLID

13.12.1 Description
This command allows the local ID string to be defined.

13.12.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FLID=”<string>”

Command Possible responses

AT+FLID=? (20),(32-127)
Note: Test command OK

13.12.3 Defined values

<string>
The string has a limited size of 20 characters, and accepts any characters
between 32 and 127 as ASCII codes..

13.13 Page transfer timeout parameter +FPHCTO

13.13.1 Description
This command sets the time interval during which the modem expects another
page before it assumes there are no more pages and aborts.

13.13.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+FPHCT0=<n>

Command Possible responses

AT+FPHCTO=? (0-255)
Note: Test command OK

13.13.3 Defined values

<n>: waiting period for another page in seconds.
Range: 0 to 255, default value is 30.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 210 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

13.14 Fax Class 2 indication messages

The following messages are used to indicate DCE Responses. They are used in
communication only.
+FCON:
This response indicates connection with a fax machine.
+FDCS <vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>:
This response reports current session capabilities. The parameters are the
same than those of AT+FDIS command (see 0).
+FDIS <vr>,<br>,<wd>,<ln>,<df>,<ec>,<bf>,<st>:
This response reports remote capabilities. The parameters are the same
than those of AT+FDIS command (see 0).
<vr>
Combinations of the following values are also allowed.
<vr> Coding
0x01 R8 × 7.7 l/mm, Fine (196 lpi)
0x02 R8 × 15.4 l/mm
0x04 R16 × 15.4 l/mm
0x08 200 dpi × 100 l/25.4 mm
0x10 200 dpi × 200 l/25.4 mm
0x20 200 dpi × 400 l/25.4 mm
0x40 300 dpi × 300 l/25.4 mm

+FCFR:
This response indicates confirmation to receive.
+FTSI “<string>”:
This response reports the received transmit station ID string.
+FCSI “<string>”:
This response reports the received called station ID string.
+FPTS <ppr>:
This response reports received page transfer status. The parameter is the
same than the one of AT+FPTS command (see 13.4).
+FET <ppm>:
This response reports post page message response. The parameter is the
same than the one of AT+FET command (see 13.2.3).
+FHNG <cause>:
This response reports the hang-up cause. It indicates that the call has
been terminated.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 211 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<cause>

0 Normal end of connection.

10 Unspecified transmit phase A error.
20 Unspecified transmit phase B error.
40 Unspecified transmit phase C error.
50 Unspecified transmit phase D error.
70 Unspecified receive phase B error.
90 Unspecified receive phase C error.
100 Unspecified receive phase D error.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 212 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14 V24-V25 commands
Important note: all commands described hereafter will apply to the currently
selected (and used) UART.

14.1 Fixed DTE rate +IPR

14.1.1 Description
This commands specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept
commands.
Notes:
• The serial autobauding feature is supported, and covers the following
serial speeds (only): 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 bps.
Beyond those serial speeds, proper operation of the module is not
guaranteed.
• Any AT command issued by the DTE must start with both capital ‘A’
and ‘T’ (or ‘/’) or both lower case ‘a’ and ‘t’ (or ‘/’), otherwise the DCE
may return some garbage characters and become desynchronized.
Should this happen, the DTE simply issues ‘AT\r’ (at 2400 or 4800
bauds) once or twice or just ‘AT’ (at 9600 bauds) to resynchronize the
modem.
• The DTE waits for 1ms after receiving the last character of the AT
response (which is always ‘\n’ or 0x0A) to send a new AT command at
either the same rate or a new rate. Should this delay be ignored, the DCE
can become desynchronized. Once again, sending ’AT\r’ once or twice or
just ‘AT’ causes the DCE to recover.

Caution:
when starting up, if autobauding is enabled and no AT command has yet been
received, the product sends all unsolicited responses (like RING) at 9600
bauds.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 213 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+IPR=<rate>

Command Possible responses

AT+IPR? +IPR: 9600

OK
Note: Current rate is 9600 bps
AT+IPR=? +IPR: (0, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600), (300,
600, 1200, 115200)
OK
Note: Possible values, according to V25 ter
Recommendation: the first set of values indicates the
range of auto-detectable baud rates (including 0). The
second set of values indicates the baud rates supported by
the DCE but not auto-detectable.
AT+IPR=38400 OK
Note: Disable autobauding and set rate to 38400 bps
AT+IPR=0 OK
Note: Enable autobauding

14.1.3 Defined values

<rate>: baud rates that can be used by the DCE
• 0 (enables autobauding)
• 300
• 600
• 1200
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19200
• 38400
• 57600
• 115200

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 214 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.2 DTE-DCE character framing +ICF

14.2.1 Description
This command is used to determine the local serial port start-stop
(asynchronous) character framing used by the DCE.

14.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+ICF= <format>[, <parity>]

Command Possible responses

AT+ICF? +ICF: 3,4

OK
Note: Current values
AT+ICF=? +ICF: (1-6),(0-4)
OK
Note: Possible values
AT+ICF=2,0 OK
Note: New values

14.2.3 Defined values:

<format>
0: Auto detect (not supported)
1: 8 Data 2 Stop (supported)
<parity> parameter is ignored.
2: 8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop (supported)
if no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value.
3: 8 Data 1 Stop (supported)
<parity> parameter is ignored.
4: 7 Data 2 Stop (supported)
<parity> parameter is ignored.
5: 7 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop (supported)
if no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value.
6: 7 Data 1 Stop (supported)
<parity> parameter is ignored.

<parity>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 215 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

0: Odd (supported)
1: Even (supported)
2: Mark (supported)
3: Space (supported)
4: None (supported)

Notes:
• Setting a character framing different from 8N1 will disable autobauding
if it was activated. Setting it back to 8N1 will not re-enable auto-baud.
• Setting the framing to 8N1 will let the autobauding enabled, if it was
already enabled (implying framing was already 8N1).

14.3 DTE-DCE local flow control +IFC

14.3.1 Description
This command is used to control the operation of local flow control between
the DTE and DCE.

14.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+IFC=<DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>

Command Possible responses

AT+IFC? +IFC: 2,2

OK
Note: Current values
AT+IFC=? +IFC: (0,2),(0,2)
OK
Note: Possible values
AT+IFC=0,0 OK
Note: New values

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 216 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.3.3 Defined values

< DCE_by_DTE >
0: none (supported)
1: Xon/Xoff local circuit 103 (not supported)
2: RTS (supported)
3: Xon/Xoff global on circuit 103 (not supported)

Important note:
when this parameter is set to 2 (DTE invokes flow control through RTS) DCE
behavior is as follows:
If the DCE has never detected RTS in the high (or ON) condition since
startup, then it ignores RTS (assuming this signal is not connected).
As soon as the DCE detects RTS high the signal acts on it. Therefore
subsequent RTS transition to OFF will prevent the DCE from sending any
further data in both online and offline modes.
This behavior allows the user to use the default settings (hardware flow
control) and leave RTS disconnected. In the case where RTS is connected
and is high at least once, it acts on the DCE.

< DTE_by_DCE >

0: none (supported)
1: Xon/Xoff circuit 104 (not supported)
2: CTS (supported)
When this parameter is set to 0 (none) then CTS is kept high all the time.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 217 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.4 Set DCD signal &C

14.4.1 Description
This commands controls the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal.
Note: WAVECOM products slightly differ from V25ter Recommendation. DCD
signal (“Circuit 109”) is turned ON at the same time the CONNECT message is
sent, whereas the specification states the DCD should be turned ON after the
CONNECT message was received.

14.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT&C<n>

Command Possible responses

AT&C0 OK
Note: DCD always on Note: Command valid
AT&C1 OK
Note: DCD matches state of the remote Note: Command valid
modem’s data carrier

14.4.3 Defined values:

<n>
0 DCD always on
1 DCD matches state of the remote modem’s data carrier

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 218 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.5 Set DTR signal &D

14.5.1 Description
This commands controls the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal.

14.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT&D<n>

Command Possible responses

AT&D0 OK
Note: The DTR signal is ignored Note: Command valid
AT&D1 OK
Note: Modem switches from data to Note: Command valid
command mode when DTR switches from
ON to OFF
AT&D2 OK
Note: Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, Note: Command valid
the call is released

14.5.3 Defined values:

<n>
0: The DTR signal is ignored
1: Modem switches from data to command mode when DTR switches
from ON to OFF
2: Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 219 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.6 Set DSR signal &S

14.6.1 Description
This commands controls the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal.

14.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT&S<n>

Command Possible responses

AT&S0 OK
Note: DSR always on Note: Command valid
AT&S1 OK
Note: DSR off in command mode, DSR on Note: Command valid
in data mode

14.6.3 Defined values:

<n>
0: DSR always on
1: DSR off in command mode, DSR on in data mode

14.7 Back to online mode O

14.7.1 Description
If a connection has been established and the ME is in command mode, this
command allows you to return to online data mode.

14.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATO

Command Possible responses

ATO OK
Note: Return from offline mode to online
mode

14.7.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 220 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.8 Result code suppression Q

14.8.1 Description
This command determines whether the mobile equipment sends result codes
or not

14.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATQ<n>

Command Possible responses

ATQ0 OK
Note: DCE transmits result codes Note: Command valid
ATQ1 Note: No response
Note: Result codes are suppressed and not
transmitted

14.8.3 Defined values

<n>
0: DCE transmits result codes
1: Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 221 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.9 DCE response format V

14.9.1 Description
This command determines whether the DCE response format uses or not the
header characters <CR><LF>, and the result codes are provided as numeric or
verbose.

14.9.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATV<n>

Command Possible responses

ATV0 0
Note: DCE transmits limited headers and Note: Command is valid (0 means OK)
trailers and numeric result codes
ATV1 OK
Note: DCE transmits full headers and Note: Command valid
trailers and verbose response text

14.9.3 Defined values

<n>=0 <n>=1
Information responses <text><CR><LF> <CR><LF>
<text><CR><LF>
Result codes <numeric code><CR> <CR><LF>
<verbose code><CR><LF>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 222 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.10 Default configuration Z

14.10.1 Description
This command restores the configuration profile. Any call is released.

14.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATZ

Command Possible responses

ATZ Ok
Note: Command valid

14.10.3 Defined values

No parameter

14.11 Save configuration &W

14.11.1 Description
This commands writes the active configuration to a non-volatile memory
(EEPROM). Description of the stored parameters is given in appendix
Parameters storage (§19.10)

14.11.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT&W

Command Possible responses

AT&W OK
Note: Writes current configuration to EEPROM Note: Command valid

14.11.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 223 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.12 Auto-tests &T

14.12.1 Description
This command allows to trigger various auto-tests.

14.12.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT&T<n>

Command Possible responses

AT&T0 OK
Note: Perform software auto-tests Note: No software problem detected, all
checksums are correct
AT&T1 OK
Note: Do the audio loop test (close) Note: Command valid
AT&T2 OK
Note: Stop the audio loop test (open) Note: Command valid

14.12.3 Defined values

<n>
0: Perform software auto-tests
The response will be OK if no software problem is detected
(EEPROM, RAM and ROM checksums), otherwise a simple ERROR
response is sent.
1: Do the audio loop test (close)
This is used to validate the audio loop (microphone to speaker).
2: Stop the audio loop test (open)
This is used to validate the audio loop (microphone to speaker).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 224 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.13 Echo E

14.13.1 Description
This command is used to determine whether the modem echoes characters
received by an external application (DTE) or not.

14.13.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATE<n>

Command Possible responses

ATE0 OK
Note: Characters are not echoed Note: Done
ATE1 OK
Note: Characters are echoed Note: Done

14.13.3 Defined values

<n>
0: Characters are not echoed
1: Characters are echoed

14.14 Restore factory settings &F

14.14.1 Description
This command is used to restore the factory settings from EEPROM.
It only restores the parameters that can be found in paragraph 20 Codes and
values (Parameters Storage paragraph) with AT&F column checked. Those
parameters are restored in RAM and in E2P, overwriting the profile set with
AT&W.

14.14.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT&F[<n>]

Command Possible responses

AT&F OK
Note: Ask for restoring the factory settings Note: Done
AT&F0 OK
Note: idem Note: Done

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 225 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.14.3 Defined values

<n>
0: restore factory setting
No other value supported

14.15 Display configuration &V

14.15.1 Description
This command is used to display the modem configuration.

14.15.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT&V<n>
The parameters displayed are the following:
Q:val1, V:val2, S0:val3, S2:val4, S3:val5, S4:val6, S5:val7,
+CR:val8, +CRC:val9, +CMEE:val10, +CBST:val11,
+SPEAKER:val12, +ECHO:val13, &C:val14, &D:val15, %C:val16
+IPR:val17, +ICF:val18, +IFC:val19

Command Possible responses

AT&V Q:0 V:1 S0:000 S2:043 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008

Note: Display active parameters in +CR:0 +CRC:0 +CMEE:0 +CBST:0,0,1
RAM +SPEAKER:0 +ECHO:0,0 &C:1 &D:2 %C:0
+IPR:9600 +ICF:3,4 +IFC:2,2
OK
Note: Done
For Echo the first value corresponds to Echo
cancellation 1.

14.15.3 Defined values

<n>
0 Display the modem configuration in RAM. (default value if no
parameter provided)
1 Display the modem configuration in EEPROM.
2 Display the modem factory configuration.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 226 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.16 Request identification information I

14.16.1 Description
This command causes the product to transmit one or more lines of specific
information text.

14.16.2 Syntax
Command syntax: ATI<n>

Command Possible responses

ATI0 WAVECOM MODEM
Note: Manufacturer and 900P
model identifications
OK
Note: GSM 900 MHz primary band
ATI3 440_09gm.Q2406A 1266500 020503 17:06
Note: Revision identification OK
Note: Software release 4.40, generated on the 05th of
February 2003
ATI6 DATA RATES:
AUTOBAUD,300,1200,1200/75,2400,4800,9600,14400
Note: Modem data features
DATA MODES: T/NT,ASYNCHRONOUS
FAX CLASS 1,2
OK
Note: Done
ATI7 SPEECH CODINGS: FR,EFR,HR,AMR
Note: Modem voice features OK
Note: Done

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 227 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.16.3 Defined values

<n>
Display manufacturer followed by model identification. (equivalent to
0
+CGMI and +CGMM, refer to these commands for more precisions).
3 Display revision identification (equivalent to +CGMR).
4 Display modem configuration in RAM (equivalent to &V0).
5 Display modem configuration in EEPROM (equivalent to &V1).
Display modem data features. Lists the supported data rates, data
6
modes, and fax classes.
7 Display modem voice features.
Other
“OK” string is sent back.
values

14.17 Data / Commands Multiplexing +WMUX

14.17.1 Description
This specific command allows to manage the data / AT commands
multiplexing mode. See appendix 19.13 for the Data / Commands multiplexing
protocol description.

14.17.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WMUX=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+WMUX=? +WMUX: (0-1)

OK
AT+WMUX? +WMUX: 0
OK
Note: Data / Commands multiplexing disabled.
AT+WMUX=1 OK
Note: Enable Data / Commands
multiplexing.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 228 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

14.17.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Multiplexing disabled. When the product is online (data
communication in progress), no AT command can be used (default).
1: Multiplexing enabled. Data flows and AT commands are multiplexed
while in online mode (data communication in progress).
Note:
The Multiplexing mode is available to only one UART. If this mode is available
on UART1 and the AT+WMUX=1 command is sent through UART2, the
multiplexing mode will be available on UART2 and disabled on UART1.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 229 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15 Specific AT commands

15.1 Cell environment description +CCED

15.1.1 Description
This command can be used by the application to retrieve the parameters of the
main cell and of up to six neighboring cells.
There are two possible methods for the external application to ascertain these
cell parameters:
• on request by the application or
• automatically by the product every 5 seconds.
Automatic mode is not supported during registration.

15.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CCED=<mode>[, <requested dump>]

Command Possible responses

AT+CCED=0 +CCED:208,20,0002,0418,37,706,24,,,0,,,0,2
Note: last request was 08,20,0006,989b,37,835,20,208,20,0002,02a
AT+CCED=0,3 (main cell and 9,37,831,12,208,20,0101,7966,34,818,13,20
neighbors 1 to 6): you can see 8,20,0006,9899,39,713,9,208,20,0002,0a72,
MCC,MNC sequences (here 33,711,12,208,20,0101,03fb,36,824,10,1
208,20) OK
AT+CCED=0,1 +CCED:208,20,0002,0418,37,706,25,,,0,,,0
Note: Only Main cell request OK

AT+CCED=0,1 +CCED:208,10,189C,,19,85,,31,32,,0,0,
Note: Call in progress: RXLev and OK
RXQual are empty, RxLevFull,
RxLevSub, RxQualFull and
RxQualSub have data.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 230 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.1.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: One shot requested
1: Automatic shots requested
2: Stop automatic shots
<requested dump>
1: Main Cell:
• if the Cell Identity is available
MCC, MNC, LAC, CI, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev, RxLev Full,
RxLev Sub, RxQual, RxQual Full, RxQual Sub, Idle TS
• if the Cell Identity is not available
MCC, MNC, LAC,, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev, RxLev Full,
RxLev Sub, RxQual, RxQual Full, RxQual Sub, Idle TS
2: Neighbour1 to Neighbour6:
• if the Cell Identity is available
MCC, MNC, LAC, CI, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev
• if the Cell Identity is not available
MCC, MNC, LAC,, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev
4: Timing Advance
8: Main cell RSSI indications (RxLev), in a range from 0 to 31

Notes:
• The response for the requested dump 1, 2 and 4 will be:
+CCED:<value1>, … , <valuen>
OK
where <value> is the ASCII string of the values (in decimal form except
the LAC and CI values which are in hexadecimal form) of the parameters.
If a field cannot be measured – or is meaningless – the parameter is not
filled in, and two consecutive commas are sent.
• The response for the requested dump 8 will be a +CSQ response and not
a +CCED response. The 07.07 format for +CSQ is respected. The <ber>
is not evaluated by this command, so the <ber> value will always be 99.
+CSQ:<rssi>, 99
OK
When automatic shots are selected, this +CSQ response is sent every
time the <rssi> measured by the product changes. Automatic shots are
supported in idle mode and during communication. The activation or
deactivation of this flow (8) does not affect the other flows.
• In idle mode, only RxLev measurements (on the main cell and on the
neighboring cells) are made.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 231 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

• Combination of the requested dump is supported (addition of the values

1, 2, 4 and 8):

Value Requested dump Value Requested dump

+CSQ response, then

+CCED response: Main
1 9 +CCED response with
Cell only
Main Cell only
+CSQ response, then
+CCED response:
2 10 +CCED response with
Neighbors 1 to 6
Neighbors 1 to 6
+CSQ response, then
+CCED response: Main +CCED response with
3 11
Cell, then Neighbors 1 to 6 Main Cell, then Neighbors
1 to 6
+CSQ response, then
+CCED response: Timing
4 12 +CCED response with
Advance only
Timing Advance only
+CSQ response, then
+CCED response: Main +CCED response with
5 13
Cell, then Timing Advance Main Cell, then Timing
Advance
+CSQ response, then
+CCED response:
+CCED response with
6 Neighbors 1 to 6, then 14
Neighbors 1 to 6, then
Timing Advance
Timing Advance
+CSQ response, then
+CCED response: Main
+CCED response with
Cell, then its Timing
Main Cell, then its Timing
Advance, then Neighbors
7 15 Advance, then Neighbors
1 to 6, with each Timing
1 to 6, with each Timing
Advance inserted between
Advance inserted between
cells results
cells results
+CSQ response: Main Cell No Last value used for a
8
RSSI indications value CCED request, or 15

• If <requested dump> parameter is not provided, the one of the last

+CCED command will be used, or 15 (default value).
• Values of MCC/MNC are set to 0 in the case of “No service”.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 232 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.2 General Indications +WIND

15.2.1 Description
WAVECOM has introduced a general mechanism to send unsolicited non-
standardized indications to the application. These indications are:
• indication of a physical change on the SIM detect pin from the connector
(meaning SIM inserted, SIM removed)
• indication during mobile originated call setup that the calling party is
ringing.
• Indication of the availability of the product to receive AT commands after
boot.
• NITZ indication (Network Information and Time Zone).
For each indication, a “bit flow” has to be indicated.

15.2.2 Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WIND= <IndLevel >

Command Possible responses

AT+WIND? +WIND: 0
OK
AT+WIND=255 OK
Note: The SIM has been removed +WIND: 0
Note: The SIM presence pin has been
detected as “SIM removed”
Note: The SIM has been inserted +WIND: 1
Note: The SIM presence pin has been
detected as “SIM inserted”
Note: The network service is available +WIND: 7
for an emergency call
Note: The initialization has been +WIND: 4
completed

Note: The modem received a NITZ +WIND: 15,1,"Cingular

information message Extend",2,"Cingular",3,"+08",4,"03/14/27,1
6:59:48+08",5,"123456",6,"2"

The AT+WIND? command is supported and indicates the <allowed bit flows>.
AT+WIND settings are automatically stored in non volatile memory (EEPROM).
This means the &W command does not need to be used and the selected
flows are always activated after boot.
Default value is 0: no flow activated, no indication.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 233 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT+WIND=? gives the possible value range (0-4095)

The unsolicited response will then be:
+WIND: <event> [ ,<idx> ]
<idx>: Call identifier, defined in +CLCC command.
Or for event 10:
+WIND: <event>,<phonebook>,<status>,…,<phonebook>,<status>
Or for event 11:
+WIND: <event>,[“<checksum of SM>”],[“<checksum of
FD>”],[“<checksum of ON>”],[“<checksum of SN>”] ,[“<checksum of
EN>”],[“<checksum of LD>”]
Or for event 15 (NITZ indication):
+WIND: <event>[,1,”<Full name>”][,2,”<Short name>”][,3,”<Local time
zone>”][,4,”<Universal time and local time zone>”][,5,”<LSA
Identity>”][,6,”<Daylight Saving time>”]

15.2.3 Defined values

<IndLevel>
0 no unsolicited “+WIND: <IndNb>” will occur (default value)
1 (bit 0) Hardware SIM Insert / Remove indications or SIM presence
after software reset
2 (bit 1) Calling party alert indication
4 (bit 2) Product is ready to process AT commands (except
phonebooks, AOC, SMS), but still in emergency mode.
8 (bit 3) the product is ready to process all AT commands, at the end
of init or after swapping to ADN in case of FDN configuration
16 (bit 4) a new call identifier has been created (after an ATD
command, +CCWA indication)
32 (bit 5) an active, held or waiting call has been released by network
or other party
64 (bit 6) Network service available indication
128 (bit 7) Network lost indication
256 (bit 8) Audio ON indication
512 (bit 9) SIM Phonebooks reload status
1024 (bit 10) SIM phonebooks checksum indication
2048 (bit 11) Interruption indication (only if FTR_INT is activated)
4096 (bit12) Hardware Rack Open/Closed Indication
8192 (bit13) NITZ indication
Combination (addition of the values) is used to allow more than one indication
flow: 0 ≤ IndLevel ≤ 16383

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 234 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

The response is OK if the values are in the previous range.

The supported events are:
<event>

Event Meaning
0 The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM removed”
1 The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM inserted”
2 Calling party is alerting
3 Product is ready to process AT commands (except
phonebooks, AOC, SMS), at init or after AT+CFUN=1
4 Product is ready to process all AT commands, end of
phonebook init or swap (FDN to ADN)
5 Call <idx> has been created (after ATD or +CCWA…)
6 Call <idx> has been released, after a NO CARRIER, a +CSSU: 5
indication, or after the release of a call waiting
7 The network service is available for an emergency call.
8 The network is lost.
9 Audio ON.
10 Show reload status of each SIM phonebook after init phase
(after Power-ON or SIM insertion).
11 Show the checksum of SIM phonebooks after loading
12 An interruption has occurred
13 The rack has been detected as Closed.
14 The rack has been detected as Opened.
15 The modem received a NITZ information message from the
network.

• for event 10:

<phonebook>: SIM phonebook
“SM”
“FD”
“ON”
“SN”
“EN”
<status>:
0: Not Reloaded from SIM (no change since last init or SIM removal)
1: Reloaded from SIM to internal memory (at least one entry has changed)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 235 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

• for event 11:

<checksum>: 128-bit “fingerprint” of the phonebook.
Note: If the service of the phonebook is not loaded or not present, the
checksum is not displayed and two comas without checksum are
displayed (,,).

• for event 15:

<Full name>: String, updated long name for current network
<Short name>: String, updated short name for current network
<Local time zone>: Signed integer, The Time Zone indicates the
difference, expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time and
GMT.
<Local time zone>: String, Universal Time and Time Zone , in format
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”
(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:Seconds±TimeZone).
The Time Zone indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an hour,
between the local time and GMT.
<LSA Identity>: Hexa String, LSA identity of the current cell in hexa
format (3 bytes)
<Daylight Saving Time>: Integer (0-2), When the LTZ is compensated for
DST (Day Saving time, or summertime), the serving PLMN shall provide a
DST parameter to indicate it. The adjustment for DST can be +1h or +2h.
Note: For NITZ indication, all the fields indicated here are optional. That is
why there is an index related to each information:
• 1: Full name for network
• 2: Short name for network
• 3: Local time zone
• 4: Universal time and local time zone
• 5: LSA Identity
• 6: Network Daylight Saving Time

Refer to 3GPP TS 24.008, 3GPP TS 23.040, 3GPP TS 22.042 for more

information.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 236 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.3 Analog digital converters measurements +ADC

15.3.1 Description
This command gets the (DC level * 1024) of ADC A, ADC B, and possibly ADC
C. These voltages are coded on 10 bits.
The command returns average values, computed every 10 seconds. The same
set of values will be returned between two computings. At initialization
(module start-up), <ADCValA> is set to value 3789, and <ADCValB> and
<ADCValC> are set with instant values read on physical ADCs. Measured
(instant read) values are then stored during 10 seconds until a new set of
average values is computed (with instant values measured during this period)
and returned in response to an AT+ADC? command. The stabilization of the
signals may take time, and the computed values will tend towards useable
values within some 10-seconds periods.

15.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+ADC=<n>
Response syntax: +ADC: <ADCValA>,<ADCValB>[,<ADCValC>]

Command Possible responses

AT+ADC=? +ADC: (0-1)

Note: Ask for the list of possible values Note: possible values 0 or 1
AT+ADC=0 OK
Note: Select 2 converters (mode 0) Note: 2 converters mode selected
AT+ADC? +ADC: 500,412
Note: Ask for the current values of OK
converters in mode 0 Note: Adc A, Adc B on 10 bits
AT+ADC=1 OK
Note: Select 3 converters (mode 1) Note: 3 converters mode selected
AT+ADC? +ADC: 712,698,997
Note: Ask for the current values of OK
converters in mode 1 Note: Adc A, Adc B, Adc C on 10 bits

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 237 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.3.3 Defined values

<n>
0: Select 2 converters
1: Select 3 converters
<ADCValA>
ADC A value, coded on 10 bits. The value returned includes the resistor
bridge.. Displayed on modes 0 and 1.
<ADCValB>
ADC B value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed on modes 0 and 1.
<ADCValC>
ADC C value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed only on mode 1.

Please refer to description paragraph above for interpretation of the returned

values during start-up phase.
Here is the correspondence table between module and parameters values
description:

ADC Q24XX Q2501

ADCValA BAT_VOLT BAT_VOLT
ADCValB BAT_TEMP ADC_AUX
ADCValC ADC_AUX ANTENNA_VOLT

<BAT_VOLT>: Battery voltage

<BAT_TEMP>: Battery temperature
<ADC_AUX>: Pin for customer usage (AUXV0 pin)
<ANTENNA_VOLT>: GPS antenna voltage

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 238 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.4 Mobile Equipment event reporting +CMER

15.4.1 Description
This command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes in the
case of a key press.

15.4.2 Syntax
Command Syntax: AT+CMER=<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>
Response syntax (key press event report): +CKEV: <key>, <press>
Response syntax (indicator event report): +CIEV: <indresp>,<value>.

Command Possible responses

AT+CMER=,1 OK
Note: Ask key press event report
+CKEV:12,1
+CKEV:12,0
Note: Key 12 has been pressed and released.
AT+CMER? +CMER: 3,1,0,0,0
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 239 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.4.3 Defined values

Important note: The parameters <mode>, <disp> and <bfr> are not handled.
<keyp> (keypad):
0: No keypad event reporting.
1: Keypad event reporting are routed using unsolicited code. Only the key
pressings not caused by +CKPD are indicated.
2: Keypad event reporting are routed using unsolicited code. All key
pressings are indicated.
Note: As AT software does not manage the emulation of key press, the values
1 and 2 lead to the same results.
<ind>
0: no indicator event reporting
1: indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. Only the
indicator events not caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the
TE
2: indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. All indicator
events shall be directed from TA to TE
<key>: Keyboard map is (5,5)
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
<press>
1: key press
0: key release
<indresp>: indicator order number (as specified for +CIND)
<value>: new value of the indicator

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 240 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.5 Read Language Preference +WLPR

15.5.1 Description
Read a Language Preference value of EF-LP. The first indices should have the
highest priority.

15.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WLPR= <index >
Response syntax: +WLPR: <value>

Command Possible responses

AT+WLPR? +WLPR: 4
Note: Read command OK
Note: Four language preferences are
available in EF-LP
AT+WLPR=1 +WLPR: 5
Note: Read first EF-LP index value OK
Note: Language preference is 5

15.5.3 Defined values

<index>: offset in the available languages range (SIM dependant).
<value>: Example of values for language: (see Recommendation 3GPP TS
23.038)

<value> Language

0 German
1 English
2 Italian
3 French
4 Spanish
5 Dutch
6 Swedish
7 Danish
8 Portuguese
9 Finnish
10 Norwegian
11 Greek
12 Turkish
13 Hungarian

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 241 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<value> Language

14 Polish
32 Czech
33 Hebrew
34 Arabic
35 Russian
36 Icelandic

15.6 Write Language Preference +WLPW

15.6.1 Description
Write a Language Preference value in EF-LP

15.6.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WLPW=<index >,<value>
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>

Command Possible responses

AT+WLPW=1,5 OK
Note: Write Lang Pref equal to 5 in EF-LP Note: EF-LP correctly updated
with index 1

15.6.3 Defined values

<index>: offset in the available languages range (SIM dependant).
<value>: See <value> examples in § 15.5.3.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 242 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.7 Read GPIO value +WIOR

15.7.1 Description
Read the requested GPI or GPIO pin value.
• Note: by default (e.g. after a reset), the I/O ports configuration is set by
the +WIOM command.
• This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by an Open-AT
embedded application or for bus operations.

15.7.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WIOR=<index>
Response syntax: +WIOR: <value>

Command Possible responses

AT+WIOR=0 +WIOR: 0
Note: Read I/O (number 0) value OK
Note: GPIO number 0 is reset

15.7.3 Defined values

<index>
Up to ten I/O ports are available. The <index> value is between 0 and 9.
<value>
0: I/O port number <index> is reset.
1: I/O port number <index> is set.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 243 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.8 Write GPIO value +WIOW

15.8.1 Description
Set the requested GPO or GPIO pin value.
Note:
• by default (after a reset), the I/O ports configuration is set by the +WIOM
command.
• This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by the Open-AT
embedded application or for bus operations.

15.8.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WIOW=<index >,<value>

Command Possible responses

AT+WIOW=2,0 OK
Note: Reset I/O (number 2) Note: GPIO value is written

15.8.3 Defined values

<index>
Up to ten I/O ports are available. The <index> value is between 0 and 9.
<value>
0: I/O port number <index> is reset.
1: I/O port number <index> is set.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 244 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.9 Input/Output Management +WIOM

15.9.1 Description
This specific command allows to set the default GPIOs configuration (input or
output) after reset, and each GPIO default value (if set as an output) after reset.

Note:
• This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by the Open-AT
embedded application or for bus operations.
• When UART 2 is activated, GPIOs 0 and 5, GPO2 and GPI are not
available anymore. When you try to do writable or readable operations
on these I/O +CME ERROR: 3 will be returned. This applies for modules
running AT X50 software and supporting multi-UART feature.

15.9.2 Syntax
Command Syntax AT+WIOM=[<GpioDir>],[<GpioVal>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WIOM? +WIOM: 2047,0

OK
Note: On reset, all GPIOs are set to 0, as
an output.
AT+WIOM=? +WIOM: (0-2047),(0-2047)
OK
Note: Range allowed for the parameters.
AT+WIOM=254 OK
Note: Set GPIO 0 as an input, and all other
GPIOs as outputs (not relevant for Q31x6
product).
AT+WIOM=,128 OK
Note: Set GPIO 8 (on P32X6 product) or
GPO 3 (on Q24X6 product) default output
value to 1. or GPIO12 (on P51x6 product)
or GPIO7 (on Q31x6 product).
AT+WIOM? +WIOM: 254,128
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 245 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.9.3 Defined values

<GpioDir>: Bit table parameter indicating each GPIO direction.
0: input
1: output.
Default value:
• 2047 (all GPIOs set as outputs) for Q2xxx and P3xxx modules.
• 0 (all GPIOs set as inputs) for Q31 and P51 modules.
<GpioVal>: Bit table parameter indicating each output-configured GPIO value
(each bit gives the corresponding GPIO default value).
0: reset (default value)
1: set
Remark: the GPIOs set as inputs by the <GpioDir> parameter are not affected
by the value set by the <GpioVal> parameter.
Notes:
• <GpioDir> bit values for GPI and GPO are ignored.
• <GpioVal> bit values for GPI are ignored.
• GPO0 is used for the SIM level shifter, if any, for Q24x6 and P32x6
products. If SIM5VONLY or SIM3AND5V features are active, it must not
be modified by AT commands. Its default value depends on SIM feature
(see AT+WFM command):
SIM5VONLY or
SIM3AND5V feature
Use of SIM 3V card default value = 0
Use of SIM 5V card default value =1
AT+WIOM is ignored for GPO0.
• GPO1 is used for the SIM level shifter, for Q2501 product. If
SIM1V8ONLY or SIM1V8AND3V features are active, it must not be
modified by AT commands. Its default value depends on SIM feature
(see AT+WFM command):
SIM1V8ONLY or
SIM1V8AND3V feature
Use of SIM 3V card default value = 0
Use of SIM 1V8 card default value =1
AT+WIOM is ignored for GPO1.

• GPIO3 is used for the Battery Charge on Q2501 product. This feature is
enabled or disabled using +WHCNF command. By default, the Battery
Charge on Q2501B module is disabled.
Battery Charge on GPIO3 state
Q2501B module

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 246 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT+WHCNF=3,0 Disabled Opened to the customer

AT+WHCNF=3,1 Enabled Not opened to the
customer

• Here is the corresponding table between Module GPIO Pin Names and
parameters values (<index>) for AT commands:
Parameter WISMO WISMO WISMO WISMO WISMO WISMO WISMO
value for AT Quik Pac Quik Pac Pac Quik Quik
Commands Q2xx3 Pin P3xx3 Pin Q24X6 P32X6 Pin P51x6 Pin Q31x6 Pin Q25xx
Names Names Pin Names Names Names Pin
Names Names
0 GPIO 0 GPIO 0 GPIO 0 GPIO 0 GPIO 0 GPI GPI
1 GPO 1 GPI GPO 1 GPI GPIO 4 GPO 1 GPO 0
2 GPO 2 GPIO 2 GPO 2 GPIO 2 GPIO 5 GPO 2 GPO 1
3 GPI GPIO 3 GPI GPIO 3 GPIO 8 GPIO 3 GPO 2
4 GPIO 4 GPIO 4 GPIO 4 GPIO 4 GPIO 9 GPIO 4 GPO 3
5 GPIO 5 GPIO 5 GPIO 5 GPIO 5 GPIO 10 GPIO 5 GPIO 0
6 (no GPIO (no GPIO GPO 0 GPO 0 GPIO 11 GPIO 6 GPIO 1
affected) affected)
7 (no GPIO (no GPIO GPO 3 GPIO 8 GPIO 12 GPIO 7 GPIO 2
affected) affected)
8 (no GPIO (no GPIO (no GPIO (no GPIO GPO 0 (no GPIO Depend
affected) affected) affected) affected) affected) ing of
Battery
Charge
9 (no GPIO (no GPIO (no GPIO (no GPIO GPO 1 (no GPIO GPIO 4
affected) affected) affected) affected) affected)
10 (no GPIO (no GPIO (no GPIO (no GPIO (no GPIO (no GPIO GPIO 5
affected) affected) affected) affected) affected) affected)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 247 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.10 Abort command +WAC

15.10.1 Description
This specific command allows SMS, SS and PLMN selection related
commands to be aborted.

15.10.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WAC

Command Syntax Return

AT+WAC
AT+WAC=? OK
AT+WAC? OK

Example:

Command Possible responses

AT+COPS=?
Note: Available PLMN
AT+WAC OK
Note: Abort the request of PLMN list Note: PLMN list request aborted

15.10.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 248 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.11 Play tone +WTONE

15.11.1 Description
This specific command allows a tone to be played on the current speaker or on
the buzzer. Frequency, gain and duration can be specified.
Syntax
Command syntax:
AT+WTONE=<mode>[,<dest>,<freq>[,<gain>[,<duration>[,<freq2>,[<ga
in2>]]]]]
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>

Command Possible responses

AT+WTONE=1,1,300,9,50 OK
Note: Play a tone Note: Done
AT+WTONE=0 OK
Note: Stop playing Note: Done
AT+WTONE=? OK
Note: Test command Note: Done
AT+WTONE? ERROR
Note: Current value Note:
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,9,50,600,9 OK
Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies (only Note: Done
allowed with the speaker)
AT+WTONE=1,2,300,9,50,600,9 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies with Note: Dual frequency only for the speaker
the buzzer

15.11.2 Defined values

<mode>
0: Stop playing.
1: Play a tone
<dest>: This parameter sets the destination (mandatory if <mode>=1)
1: Speaker
2: Buzzer
<freq>: This parameter sets tone frequency (in Hz) (mandatory if <mode>=1).
<freq2>: This parameter sets the 2nd tone frequency (in Hz) (mandatory if
<mode>=1) (only available with the speaker)
If <dest> = 1 (speaker), range is 300Hz to 3400 Hz for P51xx modules

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 249 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

range is 1 Hz to 3999 Hz for other modules.

If <dest> = 2 (buzzer), range is 1 Hz to 50000 Hz.

<gain>: This parameter sets the tone gain for the <freq>. The default value is
9.
<gain2>: This parameter sets the tone gain for the <freq2>. The default value
is 9.
Range of values is 0 to 15.

<gain> Speaker (db) Buzzer (db)

0 0 -0.25

1 -0.5 -0.5

2 -1 -1

3 -1.5 -1.5

4 -2 -2

5 -3 -3

6 -6 -6

7 -9 -9

8 -12 -12

9 -15 -15

10 -18 -18

11 -24 -24

12 -30 -30

13 -36 -40

14 -42 -infinite

15 -infinite -infinite

<duration>: This parameter sets tone duration (in unit of 100 ms).
Range of values is 0 to 50 (0 is default value, 1 -> 0,1 s., 50 -> 5 s.)
Remark: when <duration> = 0, the duration is infinite, and the tone
should be stopped by AT+WTONE=0.
Note : The 2nd frequency <freq2> and the gain <gain2> are only allowed for
the speaker.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 250 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.12 Play DTMF tone +WDTMF

15.12.1 Description
This specific command allows a DTMF tone to be played on the current
speaker. DTMF, gain and duration can be specified.
Remark: This command is only used to play a DTMF tone. To send a DTMF
over the GSM network, use the +VTS command.

15.12.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WDTMF=<mode>[,<dtmf>,<gain>,<duration>]
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>

Command Possible responses

AT+WDTMF=1,"*",9,50 OK
Note: Play a DTMF tone Note: Done
AT+WDTMF=0 OK
Note: Stop playing Note: Done
AT+WDTMF=? +WDTMF: (0-1),(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(0-15),(0-50)
Note: Test command OK
Note: Done
AT+WDTMF? ERROR
Note: Current value

15.12.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Stop playing.
1: Play a DTMF tone
<dtmf>: This parameter sets the DTMF to play (mandatory if <mode>=1).
Value must be in {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}
<gain>: This parameter sets tone gain. The values are identical to those of the
+WTONE (speaker) command. The default value is 9.
Range of values is 0 to 15 (see array on §15.14.3)
<duration>: This parameter sets the tone duration (in unit of 100 ms).
Range of values is 0 to 50 (0 is default value, 1 -> 0,1 s., 50 -> 5 s.)
Remark: when <duration> = 0, the duration is infinite, and the DTMF
tone can be stopped by AT+WDTMF=0.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 251 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.13 WAVECOM Downloading +WDWL

15.13.1 Description
This specific command switches the product to download mode.
AT+WDWL command allows to launch the download process only on the
UART1 port.
Downloading is performed using the 1K-XMODEM protocol.
Important note: Software damages may occur if power is lost or if an hardware
reset occurs during the downloading phase. This would seriously affect
modem behavior.

15.13.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WDWL

Command Possible responses

AT+WDWL +WDWL: 0
Note: Switch on downloading mode Note: Start the downloading
…
Note: Downloading in progress
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the product at the end
OK
Note: reset completed, new software running
AT+WDWL? +WDWL: V01.19
OK

15.13.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 252 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.14 WAVECOM Voice Rate +WVR

15.14.1 Description
This specific command allows the voice rate for bearer voice to be configured
for outgoing and ingoing calls.
Note: According to the module capabilities, the following voice coding types
are allowed:
o Module supporting AMR: FR, EFR, AMR-FR, AMR-HR are supported.
o Module not supporting AMR: FR, EFR, HR are supported.

15.14.2 Syntax
Command syntax:
AT+WVR=<out_coding_type>[,<in_coding_type>]
AT+WVR=[<out_coding_type>],<in_coding_type>
AT+WDR? +WDR: <out_coding_type>,<in_coding_type>
OK
Note: <out_coding_type> is related to outgoing calls, and <in_coding_type> to
incoming calls.

Command Possible responses

AT+WVR=1 OK
Note: Configure voice type FR and Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing calls
EFR for outgoing calls only
AT+WVR=1,4 OK
Note: Configure voice type FR and Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing and
EFR for outgoing calls and HR and incoming calls
EFR for incoming calls
AT+WVR=,4 OK
Note: Configure voice type HR and Note: Bearer is unchanged for outgoing calls
EFR for incoming calls and configured for incoming calls
AT+WVR=6 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Syntax error Note: Syntax error
AT+WVR? +WVR: 1,1
Note: Ask for the current values OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 253 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WVR=? +WVR: (0,2,3),(0,2,3)

Note: If Half Rate available
AT+WVR=? +WVR: (0,1),(0,1)
Note: If EFR available
AT+WVR=? +WVR: (0),(0)
Note: If neither HR nor EFR available
AT+WVR=? +WVR: (0-5),(0-5)
Note: If HR and EFR available
AT+WVR=? +WVR:
(0,2,3,10,11,12,13,14),(0,2,3,10,11,12,13,14)
Note: If Half Rate and AMR available
AT+WVR=? +WVR: (0,1,6,9,10,12,13),(0,1,6,9,10,12,13)
Note: If EFR and AMR available
AT+WVR=? +WVR: (0,10,12,13),(0,10,12,13)
Note: If AMR available
AT+WVR=? +WVR: (0-14),(0-14)
Note: If HR, EFR and AMR available

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 254 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.14.3 Defined values

<n>: Voice coding type.

Voice coding Preferred Other supported Default values

type type types
default incoming voice calls
0 FR
rate
1 EFR FR
2 HR FR
3 FR HR
4 HR EFR
default outgoing voice calls
5 EFR HR
rate
6 AMR-FR EFR, AMR-HR
7 AMR-FR EFR, AMR-HR, HR
8 AMR-HR HR, AMR-FR, EFR
9 AMR-HR AMR-FR, EFR
10 AMR-HR AMR-FR, FR
11 AMR-HR HR, AMR-FR
12 AMR-FR AMR-HR
13 AMR-FR FR, AMR-HR
14 AMR-FR FR, AMR-HR, HR

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 255 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.15 WAVECOM Data Rate +WDR

15.15.1 Description
This specific command allows the data rate for bearer data to be configured for
outgoing and incoming calls.

15.15.2 Syntax
Command syntax:
AT+WDR=<out_coding_type>[,<in_coding_type>]
AT+WDR=[<out_coding_type>],<in_coding_type>
AT+WDR? +WDR: <out_coding_type>,<in_coding_type>
OK
Note: <out_coding_type> is related to outgoing calls, and <in_coding_type> to
incoming calls.

Command Possible responses

AT+WDR=? +WDR: (0-2),(0-1)

OK
Note: If Half Rate available in both
directions
AT+WDR=? +WDR: (0),(1)
OK
Note: If Half Rate not available.
AT+WDR=1 OK
Note: Configure data type FR, HR with HR Note: Bearer is configured
preferred, for outgoing calls
(<in_coding_type> parameter is omitted)
AT+WDR=,1 OK
Note: Configure data type FR for incoming Note: Bearer is configured
calls (<out_coding_type> parameter is
omitted)
AT+WDR=3 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Illegal value Note: Syntax error
AT+WDR? +WDR: 1,1
Note: Ask for the current value OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 256 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.15.3 Defined values

<out_coding_type>: Data coding type for outgoing calls.

Data coding Preferred Other supported Default values

type type types
0 FR
1 HR FR
2 FR HR default outgoing voice calls rate

<in_coding_type>: Data coding type for incoming calls.

Data coding Type Default values

type
0 HR
1 FR default incoming data calls rate

15.16 Hardware Version +WHWV

15.16.1 Description
This specific command gets the hardware version.

15.16.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WHWV

Command Possible responses

AT+WHWV Hardware Version 4.14

Note: Request Hardware Version OK
Note: Hardware version is 4.14
AT+WHWV Hardware Version -.--
Note: Request Hardware Version OK
Note: No hardware version available
AT+WHWV=? OK

15.16.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 257 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.17 Date of Production +WDOP

15.17.1 Description
This specific command gets the date of production. Format of the date is
Week/Year (ww/yyyy).

15.17.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WDOP

Command Possible responses

AT+WDOP Production Date (W/Y): 01/2000

OK
Note: Date of production is WEEK: 01 / YEAR:
Note: Request Date of Production 2000 (1st week of year 2000)
AT+WDOP Production Date (W/Y): --/----
OK
Note: Request Date of Production Note: No date of production available
AT+WDOP=? OK

15.17.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 258 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.18 WAVECOM Select Voice Gain +WSVG

15.18.1 Description
The product has 2 voice gain controllers, this specific command selects the
microphone gain controller.

15.18.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WSVG = <n>

Command Possible responses

AT+WSVG=<n>
AT+WSVG=0 OK
Note: Select Controller 1 (Default) Note: Controller 1 selected
AT+WSVG=1 OK
Note: Select Controller 2 (Default) Note: Controller 2 selected
AT+WSVG=? +WSVG: (0-1)
Note: Get the list of possible values Note: possible values 0 or 1
AT+WSVG? +WSVG: 1
Note: Get the current value Note: Controller 1 is selected

15.18.3 Defined values

<n> Controller
0: Controller 1 (Default)
1: Controller 2

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 259 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.19 WAVECOM Status Request +WSTR

15.19.1 Description
This specific command returns some operation status. It can be used for
example to check the state of the initialization sequence; the different values
returned are Not started, Ongoing, Finished.

15.19.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WSTR=<status>
Response syntax: +WSTR: <status>,<value>

Command Possible responses

AT+WSTR=<status> +WSTR:<status>,<value>
AT+WSTR=1 +WSTR: 1,2
Note: Select the status 1 (INIT SEQUENCE) OK
Note: Init finished
AT+WSTR=2 +WSTR: 2,1
Note: Select the status 2 (NETWORK OK
STATUS) Note: The network is available
AT+WSTR=? +WSTR: (1-2)
Note: Ask for the list of possible values
Note: possible values are 1 and 2

15.19.3 Defined values

<status>
1: Initialization sequence
<value>
0: Not started
1: On going
2: Finished
2: Network status
<value>
0: No network
1: Network available

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 260 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.20 WAVECOM Scan +WSCAN

15.20.1 Description
This specific command displays the received signal strength indication (<rssi>)
for a specified frequency (in absolute format).
This command is not allowed during communication.

15.20.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WSCAN=<absolute frequency>
Response syntax: +WSCAN: <rssi>

Command Possible responses

AT+WSCAN=50 +WSCAN: 23
OK
Note: Request <rssi> of absolute frequency Note: <rssi> is 23.
50
AT+WSCAN=1025 CME ERROR: 3
Note: Request power of absolute frequency Note: 1025 is not a valid absolute
1025 frequency

15.20.3 Defined values

<absolute frequency>: frequency in absolute format<rssi>
0: -113 dBm or less
1: -111 dBm
2-30: -109 to -53 dBm
31: -51dBm or more
99: not known or not detectable

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 261 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.21 WAVECOM Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM

15.21.1 Description
This specific command sets the state of the Ring Indicator Mode.
• Up-down RI mode: no pulses are sent before unsolicited AT response.
Up-down signals are sent when receiving an incoming call.
• Pulse RI mode: an electrical pulse is sent on the Ring Indicator signal
just before sending any unsolicited AT response, in order to lose no AT
responses when client tasks are in sleep state. Still in RI mode, when
receiving incoming calls, electrical pulses are sent on the RI signal.
• Pulse RI Mode + Pulse On Packet Downloaded: based on Pulse RI mode
but an electrical pulse is also sent on the Ring Indicator signal just
before sending a downloaded data packet (GPRS or CSD) if the remote
client tasks has dropped down his RTS signal.

15.21.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WRIM=<mode>[,<n>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WRIM=0 OK
Note: Select up-down RI mode Note: up-down RI mode selected
AT+WRIM=1 OK
Note: Select pulse RI mode Note: pulse RI mode selected
AT+WRIM=2,0 OK
Note: Select mode pulse RI + Pulse on Note: mode pulse RI + Pulse on
downloaded packet, pulse duration is 5 µs downloaded packet selected
AT+WRIM=? +WRIM: (0-2)
Note: Ask for the list of possible values OK
Note: possible values 0,1 or 2
AT+WRIM? +WRIM: 1
Note: Ask for the current value OK
Note: current RI mode is pulse RI.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 262 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.21.3 Defined values

<mode>
0 Up-down RI mode
1 Pulse RI mode
2 Pulse RI mode + Pulse on Downloaded Packet

<n>: used only in mode RI Pulse + Pulse on Downloaded packet (<mode>=2).

0 Duration of pulse is 5 µs.
1-31 Duration of pulse is n x 30µs.
Warning: Pulse duration may be increased by up to 3 ms, due
to interrupt processes overhead.
Note: Remind that this mode corresponds to the case where the remote
equipment has dropped its RTS signal, to stop its flow control.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 263 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.22 WAVECOM 32kHz Power down Mode +W32K

15.22.1 Description
This specific command allows the 32kHz power down mode to be enabled or
disabled.
Note:
• When power down mode is entered, the product uses a 32kHz internal
clock during inactivity stages (despite of its nominal internal clock).
• When enabled, power down mode is active after 1 to 15 minutes. The
mode is not stored in EEPROM: the command has to be repeated after a
reset.
For additional information on power down mode, see Specification of Power
Down Control via RS232 in §22.

15.22.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+W32K=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+W32K=1 OK
Note: Enable 32kHz power down mode Note: 32kHz power down mode is enabled
AT+W32K=0 OK
Note: Disable 32kHz power down mode Note: 32kHz power down mode is disabled

15.22.3 Defined values

<mode>:
0: Disable 32kHz power down mode
1: Enable 32kHz power down mode

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 264 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.23 WAVECOM Change Default Melody +WCDM

15.23.1 Description
This specific command allows the selection of a manufacturer specific melody..
This default melody will be played for any new incoming voice call, either on
the buzzer or on the speaker.

15.23.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WCDM=<melody>,<player>

Command Possible responses

AT+WCDM=0 OK
Note: Select no melody
AT+WCDM=5 OK
Note: Select melody n°5
AT+WCDM? +WCDM: 5,0
Note: Indicate the current melody OK
Note: Melody n°5 is currently selected,
and the buzzer is selected to play it.
RING
Note: An incoming call occurs, and the
melody n°5 is played on the buzzer.
AT+WCDM=,1 OK
Note: Select the speaker to play the melody
on.
AT+WCDM? +WCDM: 5,1
OK
Note: Now the speaker is selected to play
the melody if an incoming call occurs.

15.23.3 Defined values

<melody>
0: No melody (default)
1 - 10: Melody 1 to 10
<player>
0: Melody n°<melody> will be played on the buzzer for any new incoming
voice call. (default)
1: Melody n°<melody> will be played on the speaker for any new
incoming voice call.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 265 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.24 WAVECOM Software version +WSSW

15.24.1 Description
This specific command displays some internal software reference.

15.24.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WSSW

Command Possible responses

AT+WSSW A00_00gm.2c 000000008F5DC6EA

Note: Get Software version OK
Note: internal software information
AT+WSSW=? OK

15.24.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 266 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.25 WAVECOM Custom Character Set +WCCS

15.25.1 Description
This specific command allows to edit and display the custom character set
tables. These tables are used by the “CUSTOM” mode of +CSCS and the
+WPCS commands. In this CUSTOM mode, when the user enters a string, it is
converted into GSM alphabet using the Custom to GSM table. In a similar way,
when the user requests a string display, the string is converted from GSM
alphabet using the Custom alphabet and Custom alphabet extension tables.
In edition mode, the session is terminated by <ctrl-Z>, or aborted by <ESC>.
Only hexadecimal characters (‘0’…’9’, ‘A’…’F’) can be used. The number of
characters entered must be equal to the edition range requested, otherwise the
command will return “+CME ERROR: 24”.
The default Custom alphabet extension table contains the following extended
characters:
| ^ € { } [ ] ~ \

15.25.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WCCS=<mode>,<table>,<char 1>[,<char 2>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WCCS=0,0,120,130 +WCCS: 11, 78797A2020202020097E05

Note: Display from character 120 to OK
character 130 of the Custom To GSM Note: 11 characters displayed
conversion table
AT+WCCS=1,0,115<CR> OK
20<ctrl-Z> Note: Edition successful
Note: Edit character 115 of the Custom To
GSM conversion table
AT+WCCS=1,1,0,4<CR> OK
40A324A5E8<ctrl-Z> Note: Edition successful
Note: Edit the 5 first characters of the
Custom alphabet table
AT+WCCS=0,2,20<CR> +WCCS: 1,5E
Note: Display character 20 of the Custom OK
alphabet extension table
AT+WCCS=1,1,200 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Edit character 200 of Custom Note: Index out of range
alphabet table

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 267 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.25.3 Defined values

<mode>
0 Display the table
1 Edit the table

<table>
0 Custom To GSM conversion table (default table
is PCCP437 to GSM table)
1 Custom alphabet table (default table is GSM 7
bit default alphabet)
2 Custom alphabet extension table (default table
is GSM 7 bit default alphabet extended)

<char 1>, <char 2>: Character range to display/edit.

0-127 for table 1 and 2
0-255 for Custom To GSM conversion table

Note1: <char1> and <char2> are not ASCII codes, they stand for the range of
a given character in the tables.
Note2: If only <char1> is provided, only this char is displayed/edited.
See section 21 Examples for informative examples about the use of these
characters.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 268 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.26 WAVECOM LoCK +WLCK

15.26.1 Description
This specific command allows the ME to be locked on a specific network
operator.
Note: Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) doesn’t check these locks.

15.26.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WLCK=<fac>,<passwd>,<NetId>[,<GID1>[,GID2]]
[,<CnlType>[,<CnlData>]]
Response syntax: +WLCK: <status>

Command Possible responses

AT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20810 OK
Note: Activate network lock on SFR Note: Network lock activated
(208,10)
AT+WLCK="PS",12345678,208105923568 OK
974 Note: SIM lock activated
Note: Activate SIM lock
AT+WLCK="PU",12345678,2081035 OK
Note: Activate Network Subset lock on SFR Note: Network Subset lock activated
(208, 10, 35).
AT+WLCK="PU",12345678,20810 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Need 7 digits of IMSI to perform a
service provider lock
AT+WLCK=”PP”,12345678,20810,”E5” OK
Note: Activate Service Provider lock on SFR Note: Service Provider lock activated.
(208, 10) and GID1 (0xE5).
AT+WLCK=”PC”,12345678,20810,”E5”,”1 OK
0” Note: Corporate lock activated.
Note: Activate Corporate lock on SFR (208,
10), GID1 (0xE5) and GID2 (0x10).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 269 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20810,0 OK
Note: Activate Network lock on SFR (208, Note: Network lock activated on SFR and
10) using co-operative network list from co-operative network list present in SIM
SIM file EFCNL (must be present in SIM)
AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20801,1,”02F8 OK
02FFFFFF02F801FFFFFF” Note: Network lock activated on F
Note: Activate Network lock on F ORANGE ORANGE (primary network), SFR and
(208, 01) with manual co-operative Bouygues Telecom (co-operative
network list including SFR (208, 10) and networks)
Bouygues Telecom (208, 20)

15.26.3 Defined values

<fac>:
“PS”: SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password (PCK).
“PN”: Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK).
“PU”: Network subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK).
“PP”: Service provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK).
“PC”: Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK).
<CnlType>: Type of lock for cooperative network list (CNL)
0: Automatic (co-operative network list retrieved from EFCNL SIM file)
Note: EFCNL file must be present in SIM to use automatic mode.
1: Manual (cooperative network list is given in the <CnlData> parameter)
<CnlData>: Co-operative network list (hexa string type) using same format as
in EFCNL SIM file (ETSI GSM 11.11 or 3GPP 04.08).
Note: Only if <CnlType> = 1

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 270 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.27 CPHS command: +CPHS

15.27.1 Description
This specific command is used to activate, deactivate or interrogate a CPHS
feature (e.g. Voice Mail Indicator, Mail Box Number…)
Note: This command may answer +CME ERROR: 3 if the CPHS feature is
disabled (cf. +WFM command), or if the SIM card does not support this CPHS
feature.

15.27.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<precision>]

Command Possible responses

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<precision>] OK

AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<precision>] +CME ERROR: 3

+CPHS: <FctId1>,<Status><CR<LF>
+CPHS: <FctId2>,<Status><CR<LF>
…
AT+CPHS?
+CPHS: <FctIdn>,<Status><CR<LF>

OK
AT+CPHS=? OK

15.27.3 Defined values:

<Mode>
0: Deactivate a CPHS feature
1: Activate a CPHS feature
2: Interrogate a CPHS status
Note: The deactivate or activate command has not effect for Alternate line
service, Network Operator Name, CPHS information and Customer Profile
Service features.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 271 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<FctId>
1: Voice Mail Indicator
2: Mail Box Number
3: Alternate Line Service
4: Diverted Call Indicator
5: Network Operator Name
6: CPHS Information
7: Customer Service Profile
Note: The Customer Service Profile and Alternate Line Service features are
activated if the field is set in CPHS information and CSP files. The Network
Operator Name is activated if at least one of the two format names exist (Long
or Short format).This is done at initialization.

<precision>
only used if <Mode>=2 and <FctId>= 5 to 7
if <FctId>=5, this field is <type format> (See +WNON)
if <FctId>=6, this field is <data field> (See +WCPI)
if <FctId>=7, this field is <service> (See +WCSP)
<Status>
0: CPHS feature disabled
1: CPHS feature enabled

15.27.4 Examples
AT+CPHS? Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality
+CPHS: 1,0 The voice mail indicator functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 2,0 The mail box number functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 3,1 The Alternate Line Service functionality is activated
+CPHS: 4,0 The Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 5,1 The Network Operator Name functionality is activated
+CPHS: 6,1 The CPHS Information functionality is activated
+CPHS: 7,1 The Customer Service Profile functionality is activated
OK

AT+CPHS=3,1 Syntax error

+CME ERROR: 3

AT+CPHS=1,1 Activate the voice mail indicator functionality

OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 272 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT+CPHS? Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality

+CPHS: 1,1 The voice mail indicator functionality is activated
+CPHS: 2,0 The mail box number functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 3,1 The Alternate Line Service functionality is activated
+CPHS: 4,0 The Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 5,1 The Network Operator Name functionality is activated
+CPHS: 6,1 The CPHS Information functionality is activated
+CPHS: 7,1 The Customer Service Profile functionality is activated
OK

**** the message box contains 1 message *****

+WVMI: 1,1 A message is waiting on Line 1
***** The message box contains a second message ***
+WVMI: 2,1 A message is waiting on Line 2

AT+CPHS=1,4 Activate the divert call indicator functionality

OK

**** the call forwarding is active on Line 1 *****

+WDCI: 1,1 Call forwarding is activated on Line 1

AT+CPHS=2,1 Interrogate the status of voice mail indicator

functionality
+WVMI: 1,1 a message is waiting on LINE 1
+WVMI: 2,1 a message is waiting on LINE 2
+WVMI: 3,0 no Data waiting
+WVMI: 4,0 no Fax waiting
OK

AT+CPHS=1,2 Activate the mail box number functionality

OK

AT+WALS=1 Interrogate the status of activated Line

+WALS: 2 The current line is number 2
OK

AT+CPHS=0,4 Deactivate the divert call indicator functionality

OK

AT+CPHS? Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality

+CPHS: 1,1 The voice mail indicator functionality is activated
+CPHS: 2,1 The mail box number functionality is activated

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 273 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

+CPHS: 3,1 The Alternate Line Service functionality is activated

+CPHS: 4,0 The Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated
+CPHS: 5,1 The Network Operator Name functionality is activated
+CPHS: 6,1 The CPHS Information functionality is activated
+CPHS: 7,1 The Customer Service Profile functionality is activated
OK

AT+CPHS=2,2 Query current mail box numbers in SIM

+WMBN: 1,"19254871234",129,,1 Mail box number for Line 1
+WMBN: 2,,,1 Mail box number for Line 2
+WMBN: 3,,,1 Mail box number for Data Line
+WMBN: 4,,,1 Mail box number for Fax Line

OK Only Line1 can be updated

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 274 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.28 Unsolicited result: WAVECOM Voice Mail Indicator:

+WVMI

15.28.1 Description
This unsolicited indication gives the status of the LINE 1, LINE 2, DATA or FAX
mailboxes. The +CPHS command can be used to know the status of voice mail
indicator for each line.

15.28.2 Syntax
Response syntax: +WVMI: <LineId>,<Status>
Response syntax (to AT+CPHS=2,1)
+WVMI = <LineId>,<Status>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPHS=1,1 OK
Note: Activate the Voice Mail indicator
feature.
AT+CPHS=2,1 +WVMI: 1,1 a message is waiting on LINE 1
Note: Get the current status of Voice +WVMI: 2,1 a message is waiting on LINE 2
mail indicator. +WVMI: 3,0 no Data waiting
+WVMI: 4,0 no Fax waiting
AT+CPHS=2,1 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: CPHS Feature is not allowed
AT+CPHS=1,1 OK
Note: Activation of Voice mail Note: The Voice mail indicator feature is
indicator feature. activated
+WVMI: 1,1
Note: A message is waiting on Line 1

15.28.3 Defined values

<LineId>
1: Line 1
2: Line 2
3: Data
4: Fax
<Status>
0: No message waiting.
1: At least one message is waiting

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 275 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.29 Unsolicited result: WAVECOM diverted call

indicator: +WDCI

15.29.1 Description
This indication provides the call forwarding flags. The +CPHS command can be
used to know the status of Divert call indicator for each line.

15.29.2 Syntax
Response syntax: +WDCI:<LineId>,<flag>
Response syntax (to AT+CPHS=2,4)
+WDCI = <LineId>,<Status>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPHS=1,4 OK
Note: Activate the Divert Call
indicator feature.
AT+CPHS=2,4 +WDCI: 1,1 divert call indicator is active on LINE 1
Note: Get the current status of +WDCI: 2,1 divert call indicator is active on LINE 2
Divert call indicator. +WDCI: 3,0 divert call indicator is deactivate on Data
+WDCI: 4,1 divert call indicator is active on Fax
AT+CPHS=2,4 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: CPHS Feature is not allowed
AT+CPHS=1,4 OK
Note: Activation of Divert call Note: The Divert call indicator feature is
indicator feature. activated
+WDCI: 1,1
Note: Call forwarding is activate on Line 1

15.29.3 Defined values

<LineId>
1: Line 1
2: Line 2
3: Data
4: Fax
<flag>, <status>
0: Call forwarding is deactivated
1: Call forwarding is activated
Note: The call forwarding SS is set by the AT+CCFC command.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 276 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.30 WAVECOM network operator name: +WNON

15.30.1 Description
This indication provides the name of the network operator (as a character
string). This command is the response to the AT+CPHS 2,5[,<type format>]
command.

15.30.2 Syntax
Command: AT+CPHS=2,5[,<type format>]
Response syntax: +WNON:<type format>,<operator name>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPHS=2,5 +WNON: 0,”Orange F”

Note: Get the operator name OK
AT+CPHS=2,5,1 +WNON: 1,”Orange”
Note: Get the short format operator OK
name.
AT+CPHS=2,5,0 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: When CPHS Feature is not
allowed or format name no accessible
AT+CPHS=2,5,1 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: When NON Feature is not
allowed or format name no accessible
AT+CPHS=0,5 OK
Note: Deactivation of Network Operator Note: No effect.
Name feature.

15.30.3 Defined values

<type format>
0: Long format operator name
1: Short format operator name (default value)
<operator name>
The name of the operator, in long or short format

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 277 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.31 WAVECOM CPHS information: +WCPI

15.31.1 Description
This indication provide CPHS information; i.e. which data field are present in
the SIM. This command is the response to the AT+CPHS 2,6[,<data field>]
command.

15.31.2 Syntax
Command: AT+CPHS=2,6[,<data field >]
Response syntax: +WCPI: <data field>,<status>

Command Possible responses

AT+CPHS=2,6 +WCPI: 0,”0033000F”

Note: Get the current status for all OK
CPHS info field
AT+CPHS=2,6,13 +WCPI: 13,1
Note: Get the current status for Call OK
Forward Activated indicator for Line 1. Note: Call Forward is active for Line 1.
AT+CPHS=2,6,22 +WCPI: 22,0
Note: Get the current status for Line 2 OK
Mailbox number. Note: Mailbox number for Line2 is not
available.
AT+CPHS=2,6,17 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Wrong data field
AT+CPHS=2,6,22 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Get the current status for Line 2 Note: CPHS Feature is not allowed
Mailbox number.
AT+CPHS=0,6 OK
Note: Deactivation of CPHS Info Note: No effect.
feature.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 278 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.31.3 Defined values

<data field>: value indicating the field of CPHS information (see §22 Technical
appendixes)
If <precision> field omitted in the AT+CPHS command, all field of CPHS Info
will be displayed.
<status>
0: data field is set
1: data field is unset
When all CPHS information are requested, the status correspond to a bit field
(see §20 Codes and values).
Note: The field CSP service (<data field> = 1) is used to set or not the CSP
feature at the initialization.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 279 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.32 WAVECOM customer service profile: +WCSP

15.32.1 Description
This indication indicates if a service is accessible to the customer. This is the
response to the AT+CPHS 2,7,<service > command.

15.32.2 Syntax
Command: AT+CPHS=2,7,<service>
Response syntax: +WCSP: <service>,<status>

Command Possible responses

AT+WCSP=? ERROR
AT+WCSP? ERROR
AT+CPHS=2,7 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Syntax error
AT+CPHS=2,7,9 +WCSP: 9,1
Note: Get the current status for Barring OK
of All Outgoing Calls. Note: Barring of All Outgoing Calls is
customer accessible.
AT+CPHS=2,7,11 +WCSP: 11,1
Note: Get the current status Barring of OK
Outgoing International Calls Note: Barring of Outgoing International
Calls is customer accessible.
AT+CPHS=2,7,2 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Get the current status Call Note: CPHS Feature is not allowed
forwarding on user Busy.
AT+CPHS=0,7 OK
Note: Deactivation of CPHS Info. Note: No effect.

15.32.3 Defined values

<service> value indicating the field of CSP field to display (see appendix20
Codes and values, column External Value)
<status>
0: service is not customer-accessible
1: service is customer-accessible
Note: The field Alternate Line Service (CPHS Teleservices Group) is used to set
or not the ALS feature at the initialization.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 280 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.33 WAVECOM Battery Charge Management +WBCM

15.33.1 Description
This specific command allows the management of the battery charging
operations (start and stop the charge, enable or disable unsolicited +WBCI
Battery Charge Indications). It also sets the battery charge parameters.
Important remark: battery charge is not managed by WAVECOM’s software on
WISMO Q25 series modules.

15.33.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WBCM=<Mode>[,[<ChargeInd>][,[<BattLevelMax>],
[<BattLevelMin>],[<TPulseInCharge>],
[<TPulseOutCharge>],[<BattIntRes>]]]

Command Possible responses

AT+WBCM=0 OK
Note: Stop the battery charging.
AT+WBCM=1,1 OK
Note: Start the battery charging with
charge indications.
+WBCI: 2,4060
Note: Unsolicited charge indication: the
current battery voltage is 4.06 V. (See
+WBCI description)
AT+WBCM=1,0 OK
Note: Start the battery charging
without charge indications.
AT+WBCM=2 +WBCI: 2,4110
Note: Get the battery voltage during the OK
charging. Note: See the description of +WBCI
unsolicited response. The current
battery voltage is 4.11 V.
+WBCI: 1
Note: The battery voltage has reached
the max level. The battery is
considered as charged and the
charging is stopped.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 281 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WBCM? +WBCM: 0,0,4200,3500,100,5000,0

OK
Note: Current values.
AT+WBCM=0,1 OK
Note: Enable the battery charge
unsolicited indications out of charge.
+WBCI: 3,4195
Note: The current battery voltage is
4.195 V.
AT+WBCM=3,0,3800,3500,500,3000,0 OK
Note: Configure the battery charging
parameters.
AT+WBCM=? +WBCM: (0-3),(0-1),(4000-
Note: Get the parameters range. 5000),(3400-3800), (100-10000),(100-
10000),(0-255)
OK
+WBCI: 0
Note: The battery voltage has reached
the min level. The battery is considered
as discharged, and the product is
turned off, with the +CPOF command
behavior.

15.33.3 Defined values

<Mode>
0: Stop the battery charging (default).
1: Start the battery charging.
2: Get the current battery voltage.
3: Set the battery charge parameters.
Notes:
When <Mode> = 0 or 1, only the <ChargeInd> parameter can be set.
When <Mode> = 2, no additional parameter can be set.
When <Mode> = 3, all others parameters can be set.
<ChargeInd>
0: Disable the battery charge unsolicited indications (default value).
1: Enable the battery charge unsolicited indications (see +WBCI
description).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 282 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<BattLevelMax>: Maximum level for the battery voltage.

When reached, the battery is considered as charged.
The allowed range is [4000 ; 5000] (in mV, default value is 4200)
<BattLevelMin>: Minimum level for the battery voltage.
When reached, the battery is considered as discharged, and the product
is turned off (with the +CPOF command behavior).
The allowed range is [3400 ; 3800] (in mV, default value is 3400)
Note:The <BattLevelMax> and <BattLevelMin> parameters cannot be changed
during the battery charging (when <Mode> = 1).
<TPulseInCharge> Time between pulses for the pulsed charge.
The pulse duration lasts one second. When the battery charging is started
with unsolicited charging indications (<ChargeInd> = 1), +WCBI
responses are returned by the ME with a period equals to (<Pulse Time>
(= 1s.) + <TPulseInCharge>).
The allowed range is [100 ; 10000]. (unit is ms, default value is 100).
<TPulseOutCharge> Time between +WBCI unsolicited responses
(<ChargeInd> = 1). The allowed range is [100 ; 10000] (in ms, default
value is 5000).
<BattIntRes>: Battery Internal Resistor.
This parameter must be set to have correct values with +WBCI
unsolicited results.
The allowed range is [0 ; 255] (in mΩ, default value is 0)
Note: When the <BattIntRes> parameter is changed, the product must be reset
to take the modification into account.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 283 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.33.4 Module-specific charging features

Reminder: battery charge is not managed by WAVECOM’s software on
WISMO Q25 series modules.
Auto charging and pre-charging features are implemented on WISMO QUIK
series Q3106 and Q3126.
Pre-charging process:
When the battery level is too low (this voltage is a component-dependant
value), the module powers off. As soon as the module is plugged again to a
battery charger, it switches automatically to pre-charging mode. This hardware
process triggers a limited current charging with respect to the component
requirements. When an hardware threshold (of about 3,2 V.) is reached, the
pre-charging process ends, and the auto-charging is triggered. This behavior
preserves the battery life.

Auto charging mode:

The module switches to auto-charging mode in 2 cases:
- after a pre-charging process
- when both events happen simultaneously:
o the battery level is low (less than 3,3 V, that is a non customizable
value)
o a module reset occurs;

The battery auto charging is similar as a normal battery charging.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 284 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.34 Unsolicited result: WAVECOM Battery Charge

Indication +WBCI

15.34.1 Description
This unsolicited indication returns information about the battery charge
(maximum level reached, current battery voltage).

15.34.2 Syntax
Unsolicited response syntax: +WBCI: <Status>[,<BattLevel>]

15.34.3 Defined values

<Status>
0: Minimum battery level reached. The battery is considered as
discharged.
The product is turned off (as with the +CPOF command).
1: Maximum battery level reached. The battery is considered as charged.
The battery charging is stopped.
2: Battery currently in charge.
3: Battery currently out of charge.

<BattLevel>: Current battery voltage during or out of the charging.

The possible range is [2800 ; 5000]. (in mV)

Note:
<Status> = 2 and 3 are solicited, by the AT+WBCM=2 command, or
unsolicited when the <ChargeInd> parameter of the +WBCM command is set
to 1. With these <Status> values, the <BattLevel> parameter is also present.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 285 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.35 Features Management +WFM

15.35.1 Description
This specific command allows some features to be enabled or disabled.
Note:
After a modification, the changes will be taken into account only after a reset of
the product.

15.35.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WFM=<mode>[,<FtrID>]
Response syntax +WFM: <FtrID>,<status>,<resetFlag>

Command Possible responses

AT+WFM=2,”BI9001800” +WFM: “BI9001800”,1,0

OK
Note: Dual-band mode 900/1800 is
enabled
AT+WFM=1,11 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Enable the Mono-band 900 Note: Band selection are not allowed
mode with AT+WFM command
AT+WFM=0,61 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: <mode>=0 is not allowed on
<FtrID> values with 2 digits
AT+WFM=0,”EFR” OK
Note: Disable the Enhanced Full Rate
feature

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 286 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WFM=2 +WFM: "MONO900",0,0

Note: Interrogate all <FtrID> status +WFM: "MONO1800",0,0
+WFM: "MONO1900",0,0
+WFM: "BI9001800",1,0
+WFM: "BI9001900",0,0
+WFM: "MONO850",0,0
+WFM: "BI8501900",0,0
+WFM: "QUADBAND",0,0
+WFM: "EFR",0,1
+WFM: "NOHR_NOECHO",0,0
+WFM: "HR",1,0
+WFM: "ECHO",0,0
+WFM: "HR_ECHO",0,0
+WFM: "DTXDATA",1,0
+WFM: "DATA144",1,0
+WFM: "SIM3VONLY",0,0
+WFM: "SIM5VONLY",0,0
+WFM: "SIM3AND5V",1,0
+WFM: " SIM1V8ONLY",0,0
+WFM: " SIM1V8AND3V”,0,0
+WFM: "SIMREMOVE",1,0
+WFM: "NOINTERRUPT",0,0
+WFM: "OFFWHENUNPLUG",0,0
+WFM: "INTERRUPT",1,0
+WFM: "SWITCHATT",1,0
+WFM: "CPHS",1,0
+WFM: "SIMSPEEDENH",0,0
+WFM: "LOCA",0,0
+WFM: “AMR”0,0
OK
Note: The modified features have their
<resetFlag> parameter set to 1

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 287 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.35.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: disable feature <FtrID>
1: enable feature <FtrID>
2: interrogate the status of the <FtrID> feature.
If the <FtrID> parameter is not used, the status of all the features are
listed (with several +WFM responses).
<FtrID>

Numeric value String value Meaning

11 "MONO900" Mono-band mode 900 MHz (def. 0)
12 "MONO1800" Mono-band mode 1800 MHz (def. 0)
13 "MONO1900" Mono-band mode 1900 MHz (def. 0)
14 "BI9001800" Dual-band mode 900/1800 MHz (def. 1)
15 "BI9001900" Dual-band mode 900/1900 MHz (def. 0)
16 "MONO850" Mono-band mode 850 MHz (def. 0)
17 "BI8501900" Dual-band mode 850/1900 MHz (def. 0)
18 "QUADBAND" Quad-band mode 850/900/1800/1900 MHz
2 "EFR": Enhanced Full Rate feature (def. 1)
31 “NOHR_NOECHO” HR and ECHO features are disabled
32 "HR" Half Rate feature (def. 1)
33 "ECHO" Echo Cancel (def. 0)
34 “HR_ECHO” HR and ECHO features are enabled
4 "DTXDATA" Data with DTX feature (def. 1)
5 "DATA144" Data 14.4 kbits/s feature (def. 1)
61 "SIM3VONLY" 3V SIM voltage mode (def. 0)
62 "SIM5VONLY" 5V SIM voltage mode
63 "SIM3AND5V" Both 3 and 5V SIM voltage mode (def. 1)
64 "SIM1V8ONLY" 1,8V SIM voltage mode (default 0)
65 "SIM1V8AND3V" 1,8V and 3V SIM voltage mode (default 0)
7 "SIMREMOVE" SIM removal feature (def. 1)
81 "NOINTERRUPT" No management of interruption (def. 0)
83 "OFFWHENUNPLUG" Off when unplug mode (def. 0)
84 "INTERRUPT" interruption for customer (def. 1)
9 "SWITCHATT" Switch Attenuation feature (def. 1)
A "CPHS" CPHS feature (def. 1)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 288 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Numeric value String value Meaning

B "SIMSPEEDENH" SIM speed enhancement feature (def.0)
C "LOCA" Location feature (def. 0)
D “AMR” AMR feature

Notes:
• The +WFM response only use alphabetical values for the <FtrID>
parameter.
• For <FtrID> values with two digits (like 1x, 6x or 8x), the <mode> 0
value is not allowed. When a « xa » feature is enabled, enabling an other
« xb » feature will automatically disable the « xa » feature.
For example, if the "MONO900" feature is enabled, if the "BI9001800"
feature is activated, the "MONO900" feature gets automatically disabled.
• The HR and ECHO features have a particular behavior, due to historical
reasons. The appropriate way to activate or deactivate this pair of
features is to use the corresponding <FtrId>:
“HR” HR only, no ECHO
“ECHO” ECHO only, no HR
“NOHR_NOECHO” Neither HR nor ECHO
“HR_ECHO” Both HR and ECHO
• “MONO900”, “MONO850”, “MONO1800”, “MONO1900”, “BI9001900”,
“BI9001800”, “BI8501900” and “QUADBAND” features are read-only. In
order to change the Band selection use AT+WMBS command, see §
15.51.
• When the SIMREMOVE feature is activated if the SIM is removed an
unsolicited response +WIND: 0 is received and if the SIM is inserted an
unsolicited response +WIND: 1 is received.
• When the NOINTERRUPT feature is activated if the pin interrupt is set no
action is taken.
• When the OFFWHENUNPLUG feature is activated if the pin interrupt is
set an AT+CPOF is executed.
• When the INTERRUPT feature is activated, if the pin interrupt is set, an
unsolicited response +WIND: 12 is received and the Open AT customer
application is resumed if it was previously suspended (see
AT+WOPEN=5).
• When the SWITCHATT feature is activated the SWITCHATT algorithm is
available to the AT+ECHO command.
• If feature SIM5VONLY or SIM3AND5V is used, the user must take care of
not using GPO0 pin: it is reserved for SIM level shifter.
• AMR feature is can only be activated for AMR product. If the AMR
function is not available, its activation or deactivation has no effect and
no ERROR response.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 289 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<status>
0: the <FtrID> feature is disabled
1: the <FtrID> feature is enabled
<resetFlag>
0: the feature has not been modified since the last boot of the product.
1: the feature has been modified since the last boot of the product; a reset
must be performed to take the modifications into account.
Note: If a feature is reset to its initial value after a modification, the
<resetFlag> parameter will be reset to 0.

15.36 Commercial Features Management +WCFM

15.36.1 Description
This command enables or disables WAVECOM specific features. Disabling a
feature can be done with no restriction, but a password is required to enable
features.
Note: Once a feature successfully enabled or disabled, the product needs to be
reset to take the modification into account.

15.36.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WCFM=<mode>,[<FtrMask>[,<Password>]]

Command Possible responses

AT+WCFM=0,”0A00” OK
Note: Disable some features
AT+WCFM=2 +WCFM:0000
Note: Display of the feature status OK
AT+WCFM=1,”0003”,”1234567890A OK
BCDEF1234567890ABCDEF12345678 Note: The features are enabled (the
90ABCDEF1234567890ABCDEF” password is correct)
Note: Enable features
AT+WCFM=1,”0050”,”1234567890A +CME ERROR: 3
BCDEF1234567890ABCDEF12345678 Note: Incorrect password
90ABCDEF1234567890FFFFFF”
Note: Enable features

15.36.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: disable some features of <FtrMask>
1: enable some features of <FtrMask>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 290 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

2: display the features state

<FtrMask>: features mask
16 bits hexadecimal string (4 characters from 0 (zero) to ‘F’)
<PassWord>: Password
256 bits hexadecimal string (64 characters from 0 (zero) to ‘F’)

15.37 WAVECOM Customer storage mirror +WMIR

15.37.1 Description
This specific command allows to make a mirror copy of the current
configuration parameters in the EEPROM. In case of memory problem for the
storage, if a customer mirror already exists, this one will be restored.
Otherwise, the WAVECOM default mirrored parameters are restored.
Warning: this command should only be used on special advice from
WAVECOM support team.

15.37.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WMIR

Command Possible responses

AT+WMIR=? OK
AT+WMIR OK
Note: Build the Customer Mirror

15.37.3 Defined values

No parameter

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 291 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.38 WAVECOM Change Default Player +WCDP

15.38.1 Description
This specific command allows the default melody player to be selected.

15.38.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WCDP = <player>

Command Possible responses

AT+WCDP=? +WCDP: (0-1)

OK
AT+WCDP=0 OK
Note: Select the buzzer.
AT+WCDP? +WCDP: 0
OK

15.38.3 Defined values

<player>
0: Buzzer
1: Speaker

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 292 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.39 WAVECOM CPHS Mail Box Number: +WMBN

15.39.1 Description
This specific command sets the different mailbox numbers in SIM. The +CPHS
command can be used to know which mailbox numbers can be updated.

15.39.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WMBN = <LineId>,<number>,<type>,<name>
Response syntax (to AT+CPHS=2,2)
+WMBN = <LineId>,<number>,<type>,<name>,<status>

Command Possible responses

AT+WMBN=? OK
AT+WMBN? OK
AT+CPHS=2,2 +WMBN: 1,"0123456789",129,”Maison”,1
Note: Get the current Mail Box +WMBN: 2,”9876543210”,129,”Travail”,1
Numbers in SIM +WMBN: 3,,,,1
+WMBN: 4,,,,1
OK
AT+WMBN=1,”+33122334455”,145 OK
Note: Set mailbox number for line1. Note: Mailbox number for Line1 is set.
AT+WMBN=2 OK
Note: Erase mailbox number & name
for line2
AT+CPHS=2,2 +WMBN: 1,"+33122334455",145,,1
Note: Get the current Mail Box +WMBN: 2,,,,1
Numbers again +WMBN: 3,,,,1
+WMBN: 4,,,,1
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 293 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.39.3 Defined values

<LineId>
1: Line 1
2: Line 2
3: Data
4: Fax
<number>: Phone number in ASCII format.
<type>: TON/NPI
(Type of address byte in integer format).
<name>: name of mailbox.
Notes:
• For the <name> parameter all strings starting with “80”, “81” or “82”
are considered in UCS2 format. See the APPENDIX E: Coding of Alpha
fields in the SIM for UCS2. If a wrong UCS2 format is entered, the string
is considered as an ASCII string.
• The AT command +WPCS affect the format of the Mailbox <name>
entry.
<status>
When checked with “AT+CPHS=2,2”, it indicates if the number can be
updated or not:
0: Update is not possible
1: Update is possible

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 294 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.40 WAVECOM Alternate Line Service: +WALS

15.40.1 Description
This specific command allows to set and to get the active line. The +CPHS
command can be used to know which line is activated.

15.40.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WALS = <CmdType>[,<LineId>]
Response syntax (to AT+CPHS=2,3)
+WALS = <LineId>

Command Possible responses

AT+WALS? +WALS: 1
OK
Note: Display the current active line
AT+WALS=? +WALS: (0-1),(1-2)
OK
AT+WALS = 0,1 +WALS: 1
Note: Activate Line 1 OK
AT+WALS = 0,2 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Activate Line 2 Note: When the ALS feature is not
allowed
AT+WALS = 1 +WALS: 1
Note: Get the current activate Line Note: Display the current active line
AT+WALS = 1,2 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Syntax error
AT+CPHS=0,3 OK
Note: Deactivation of ALS feature. Note: No effect.
AT+CPHS=2,3 +WALS: 1
Note: Interrogate of ALS Feature Note: Display the current active line
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: in the case where the ALS feature
is not allowed

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 295 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.40.3 Defined values

<CmdType>
0: Set active line
1: Get active line
<LineId>:
Only used for <CmdType> = 0
1: Line 1
2: Line 2

15.41 WAVECOM Open AT control command +WOPEN

15.41.1 Description
This specific command allows to start, stop, delete and get information about
the current Open AT embedded application.
Note: This command is only available if the Open AT feature is enabled (see
+WCFM command).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 296 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.41.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WOPEN=<Mode>
Response syntax +WOPEN: <Mode>[,<IntVersion>[<ExtVersion>]]

Command Possible responses

AT+WOPEN=? +WOPEN: (0-5)

OK
AT+WOPEN? +WOPEN: 0
OK
AT+WOPEN=2 +WOPEN: 2,"AT v03.01","AT v02.10"
Note: Get the Open-AT library OK
versions Note : Open-AT version 2.10 application
downloaded.
AT+WOPEN=1 +CME ERROR: 541
Note : since main versions do not match,
the Open-AT application can not be
started.
AT+WOPEN=2 +WOPEN: 2, “AT v2.00”, “AT v2.00”
Note: Get the Open-AT library OK
versions. Note: Open-AT v2.00 library version. An
embedded application has been
downloaded on this product.
AT+WOPEN=3 OK
Note: The objects flash are erased
AT+WOPEN=1 OK
Note: Start the embedded application. +WIND: 3
Note: Product reset in order to start the
embedded application.
AT+WOPEN = 3 +CME ERROR: 532
Note: the embedded application is
activated so the objects flash are not
erased.
AT+WOPEN = 4 +CME ERROR: 532
Note: the embedded application is
activated so it cannot be erased
AT+WOPEN=0 OK
Note: Stop the embedded application. +WIND: 3
Note: Product reset in order to stop the
embedded application.
AT+WOPEN=3 OK
Note: The objects flash are erased

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 297 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WOPEN=4 OK
Note: the embedded application is
erased
AT+WOPEN? +CME ERROR: 3
Note: The Open AT feature is disabled.
AT+WOPEN=5 OK
Note: Suspend Open AT tasks
AT+WOPEN? +WOPEN:5
OK

15.41.3 Defined values

<Mode>
0: Stop the Open-AT embedded application.
If the product was running, it resets.
1: Start the Open-AT embedded application.
If the product was stopped, it resets.
2: Get the Open AT library versions.
3: Erase the objects flash of the Open-AT embedded application.
4: Erase the Open-AT embedded application.
5: Suspend (in WAVECOM software kernel) the Open AT embedded
application tasks.
Notes:
• For mode = 1: if the main version numbers returned by the
AT+WOPEN=2 command do not match, the command will reply +CME
ERROR: 541
• Mode = 3 and 4 are only available if Open-AT embedded application is
stopped (AT+WOPEN=0).
• Open AT embedded applications can be resumed with AT+WOPENRES
command or the INTERRUPT feature (see +WCFM command).
<IntVersion>
ASCII string giving the internal Open AT library version.
<ExtVersion>
ASCII string giving the external Open AT library version.
Note: If no embedded application is loaded, the <ExtVersion> parameter does
not appear.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 298 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.42 WAVECOM Reset +WRST

15.42.1 Description
This specific command resets the module after the time specified by the
<delay> parameter.

15.42.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WRST =<Mode>,<Delay>
Response syntax: +WRST: <Mode>,<Delay>,<RemainTime>

Command Possible responses

AT+WRST=? OK
AT+WRST=0 OK
Note: Disable timer
AT+WRST=1,”001:03” OK
Note: Enable timer and set delay at 1
hour 3 minutes
AT+WRST? +WRST: 1,”001:03”,”001:01”
OK
Note: Timer activated to reset after 1
hour and 3 minutes. At this point, 1
hour and 1 minute remain before next
reset.

15.42.3 Defined values

<val1>:
0: timer reset is disabled
1: timer reset is enabled
<Delay>: sets the time before reset
Range “000:01”- “168:59” (format hhh:mm)
<RemainTime>: time before next reset
Range “000:01”- “168:59” (format hhh:mm)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 299 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.43 Set Standard Tone +WSST

15.43.1 Description
This specific command allows to set/get the sound level of the Standard Tones.

15.43.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WSST=[<sound level>][,<ring tone level>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WSST=0 OK
Note: Set volume to Max.
AT+WSST=15 OK
Note: Set volume to Min.
AT+WSST=,5 OK
Note: Set ring tone level to 5
AT+WSST? +WSST: 15,5
Note: get current standard tones sound OK
level Note: current standard tones level is 15
(mini.), and ring tone level is 5.
AT+WSST=? +WSST: (0-15),(0-15)
Note: supported parameters OK

15.43.3 Defined values

<sound level>
Range [0 ; 15]
0: Maximum volume (default)
15: Minimum volume
<ring tone level>
Range [0 ; 15]
0: Maximum volume (default)
15: Minimum volume

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 300 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.44 WAVECOM Location +WLOC

15.44.1 Description
This specific command can be used by the application to retrieve the following
local information: MCC-MNC, LAC, CI, Network measurement, BCCH channel
list, Timing Advance, Date and Time.
Two ways exist for the external application to get these information: on
request of the application, or automatically by the module every x seconds (x
has to be a multiple of 5 different from 0).
The location feature has to be activated to get information.
if the feature is not activated, ”ERROR” is sent.
If the data are not valid at the requested time, the network measurement,
BCCH list and Timing Advance cannot be displayed (“,,” is displayed instead).

15.44.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WLOC =< mode > [,< time period/dump >]
AT+WLOC?
+WLOC: <mode>,<timeperiod>,<dump>
with <mode>:
0: no automatic mode
1: automatic mode
<timeperiod>, <dump>:see below.

Command Possible responses

AT+WLOC=0 OK
Note: stops the display of local information
AT+WLOC=3,255 OK
Note: set the wished information to display
(255 -> complete information)
AT+WLOC=1 +WLOC:
Note: displays once the local information 02f802,0006,7772,f13101b04cf51278
91138e95a846d160,8b49d08d0797c419e
272e10889a000009302170399020403c1
020a03c5020a03,00,010121111349ff
OK
AT+WLOC=2,6 +CME ERROR:3
Note: 6 is not a multiple of 5

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 301 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WLOC=2,10 OK
Note: displays OK then the current local +WLOC:
information immediately for the first time 02f802,0006,7772,ed3001af4cf492780
and then every 10 seconds. b040889c74acc23,8b49d08d0797c419e2
72e1
0889a000009302160399020503c1020a0
3c5020
a03,00,010121111354ff
+WLOC:
02f802,0006,7772,f02d01ae4cf41278
4b03c889c846dba5,8b49d08d0797c
419e272e10889a0000093021703990
20403c1020a03c5020903,00,010121
111404ff
…
AT+WLOC=? +CME ERROR:3
Note: The feature “loca” is not activated
AT+WLOC? +CME ERROR:3
Note: The feature “loca” is not activated
AT+WLOC=? OK
Note: The feature “loca” is activated
AT+WLOC? +WLOC: 0,5,255
OK
Note: The location is not in mode
automatic, the period value is set to 5
seconds, the configuration value is set to
255
AT+WLOC? +WLOC: 1,10,20
Note: The location is in mode automatic, OK
the period value is set to 10 seconds, the
configuration value is set to 20

15.44.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Stop automatic shots
1: One shot requested
2: Automatic shots requested (every x seconds)
3: Configuration of the wished information

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 302 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

for <mode> = 2:
<time period> optional parameter –
Range: [5 - 255] – in seconds
it has to be a multiple of 5.
default value of time period: 5 seconds
The automatic mode for location is saved in EEPROM, so will be taken into
account after an Init (+WLOC:… will be displayed).

Fields of the response to AT+WLOC=1 or AT+WLOC=2:

The format of these fields are as specified in 04.08:

Parameter Type
MCC-MNC 3 bytes
LAC 2 bytes
CI 2 bytes
Network measurement 16 bytes
BCCH channel list Maximum 48 bytes (if version V0 of GSM
Rec 11.14-800 )
Or 129 bytes (if version V1 of GSM Rec
11.14-800). The version number in
indicated in TERMINAL PROFILE
information in EEPROM. It is not user-
customizable. It is configured at
production-time.
Timing Advance 1 byte
Date and Time 7 bytes: Date, time and time zone at STLK
Format

For mode = 3:
<dump> optional parameter
Range: [1-255] (at least 1 bit set to 1).
if bit 0 set to 1 (value 1): DaT will be returned in the response
if bit 1 set to 1 (value 2): TA will be returned in the response
if bit 2 set to 1 (value 4): BCCH will be returned in the response
if bit 3 set to 1 (value 8): NetMeas will be returned in the response
if bit 4 set to 1 (value 16): CI will be returned in the response
if bit 5 set to 1 (value 32): LAC will be returned in the response
if bit 6 set to 1 (value 64): MNC-MCC will be returned in the response

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 303 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Notes:
• After having downloaded the EEPROM configuration: default value of
<dump> is 0xFF (all information returned).
• The <dump> value set with the command “at+wloc= 3,xx” is saved in
EEPROM, so it will be taken into account after an Init.
• See Appendix C for details on BCCH channel list.

15.45 WAVECOM Bus Read +WBR

15.45.1 Description
This specific command allows to read a buffer from a specific bus (SPI, I2C
Soft or Parallel).
Note: Bus configuration is set by the +WBM command.

15.45.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WBR=<BusId>,<Size>[,<Address>[,<Opcode>]]
Response syntax: +WBR: <Data><CR><LF>
OK

Command Possible responses

AT+WBR=0,9,”ABFF”,”C9” +WBR: 0A5F98231012345678

Note: Read 9 bytes from the SPI bus, after OK
having sent the 0xC9 Opcode byte and
ABFF Address.
AT+WBR=1,5,”2A” +WBR: 0102030405
Note: Read 5 bytes from the I2C Soft bus, OK
at the 0x2A slave address.
AT+WBR=2,2,0 +WBR: A000
Note: Read 2 bytes from the Parallel bus OK
with the A2 pin set to 0.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 304 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.45.3 Defined values

< BusId >
0: SPI bus.
1: I2C Soft bus.
2: Parallel bus.
<Size>: Size of data to read, in bytes (max 256 bytes).
<Address>
• For SPI bus:
On Q24X3 and P32X3 products:
Up to 2 address bytes as an ASCII hexadecimal string, usable only is
the <opcode> byte is set.
If the address field is not used, the parameter must not be set
(default).
On Q24X6 and P32X6 products:
Up to 4 address bytes as an ASCII hexadecimal string.
If the <address> field is not used, the parameter must not be set
(default).
• For Parallel bus:
0: set the A2 pin to 0 (default)
1: set the A2 pin to 1

• For I2C Soft bus:

Slave address byte, in hexadecimal format (default is 0x00).
This is a 7-bits address, shifted to left from 1 bit, padded with the
LSB set to 1 (to read), and sent first on the I2C bus before performing
the read operation.

<Opcode> (for SPI bus only)

On Q24X3 and P32X3 products:
Up to 1 opcode byte as an ASCII hexadecimal string.
If the <opcode> field is not used, the parameter must not be set
(default).
On Q24X6 and P32X6 products:
Up to 4 opcode bytes as an ASCII hexadecimal string.
If the <opcode> field is not used, the parameter must not be set
(default).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 305 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.46 WAVECOM Bus Write +WBW

15.46.1 Description
This specific command allows to write a buffer on a specific bus (SPI, I2C soft
or parallel).
Note: Bus configuration is set by the +WBM command.

15.46.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WBW=<BusId>,<Size>[,<Address>]<CR>
<Data Buffer> <ctrl-Z >

Command Possible responses

AT+WBW=0,10<CR> OK
0123456789ABCDEF0123<ctrl-Z> Note: Data buffer is written on SPI bus.
Note: Write 10 bytes on the SPI bus.
AT+WBW=1,5<CR> OK
0246801234<ctrl-Z> Note: Data buffer is written on I2C Soft
Note: Write 5 bytes on the I2C Soft bus. bus.
AT+WBW=2,2,0<CR> OK
434F<ctrl-Z> Note: Data buffer is written on PARALLEL
Note: Write 2 bytes on the Parallel bus bus.
with the A2 pin set to 0.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 306 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.46.3 Defined values

<BusId>
0: SPI bus.
1: I2C Soft bus.
2: Parallel bus.
<Size>: Size of data buffer, in bytes. (max. 256 bytes)
<Address>
• For SPI bus:
Not Used
• For Parallel bus:
0: set the A2 pin to 0 (default)
1: set the A2 pin to 1
• For I2C Soft bus:
Slave address byte, in hexadecimal format (default “00”).
This is a 7-bits address, shifted to left from 1 bit, padded with the LSB
set to 0 (to write), and sent first on the I2C bus before performing the
writing operation.
<Data Buffer>: Data buffer to write on the specific bus.
This parameter must only contain hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) Its length
must be twice the <Size> parameter.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 307 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.47 WAVECOM Bus Management +WBM

15.47.1 Description
This specific command allows to manage specific buses (SPI, I2C Soft, Parallel)
with a given configuration.

15.47.2 Syntax
• Command Syntax for SPI bus
AT+WBM=<BusId>,<Mode>,[<Clock_Speed>],[<Clock_Mode>],
[<ChipSelect>],[<ChipSelectPolarity>],[<LsbFirst>],
[<Gpio ChipSelect>],[<Gpio Handling>]

• Command Syntax for I2C bus

AT+WBM=<BusId>,<Mode>,[<Scl_Gpio>],[<Sda_Gpio>]

• Command Syntax for parallel

The parameters depend on ChipSelect configuration:
if CS is Gpio 5:
AT+WBM=<BusId>,<Mode>,[<Chip_Select>],[<Order>],[<Gpio_NbWaitS
tate>]
if CS is LCD_EN
AT+WBM=<BusId>,<Mode>,[<Chip_Select>],[<Order>],
[<LCDEN_AddressSetupTime>],
[<LCDEN_SignalPulseDuration>],
[<LCDEN_PolarityControl>]

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 308 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WBM=0,1,1,3,1,0,1 OK
Note: Open SPI bus with configuration:
(on Q24X3 product)
Clock Speed: 812 kHz
Clock Mode: 3
ChipSelect: LCDEN
ChipSelectPolarity: LOW
LsbFirst: MSB
AT+WBM=1,1,0,4 OK
Note: Open I2C Soft bus with configuration:
Scl Gpio: 0
Sda Gpio: 4
AT+WBM=2,1,0,1,10, 31,0 OK
Note: Open PARALLEL bus with configuration:
(on P32X3 product)
ChipSelect: LCDEN
Order: Direct
LcdenAddressSetUpTime: 10
LcdenSignalPulseDuration: 31
PolarityControl: low
AT+WBM=0,2 +WBM: 0,1,1,3,1,0,1,0,0
OK
AT+WBM=1,0 OK
Note: Close I2C bus.
AT+WBM=1,2 +WBM: 0,0,0,4
OK
AT+WBM=1,1 OK
Note: Open I2C Soft bus with the last
configuration:
Scl Gpio: 0
Sda Gpio: 4
AT+WBM = 1,2 +WBM: 1,1,0,4
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 309 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.47.3 Defined values

<BusId>
0: SPI bus.
1: I2C bus.
2: Parallel bus. (Only on WISMO Pac products)
<Mode>
0: close bus.
1: open bus.
2: get bus status.

15.47.3.1 for SPI bus

<Clock Speed>
Q24X3 and P32X3 products Q24X6 and P32X6 products
Value Frequency Value Frequency
0 (default) 101 kHz 0 (default) 13 MHz
1 812 kHz 1 6,5 MHz
2 1,625 MHz 2 4,33 MHz
3 3,25 MHz 3 3,25 MHz
4 2,6 MHz
5 2,167 MHz
6 1,857 MHz
7 1,625 MHz
8 1,44 MHz
9 1,3 MHz
10 1,181 MHz
11 1,083 MHz
12 1 MHz
13 926 kHz
14 867 kHz
15 812 kHz

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 310 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<Clock Mode>
0: rest state is 0, the data is valid on rising edge (default value).
1: rest state is 0, the data is valid on falling edge.
2: rest state is 1, the data is valid on rising edge.
3: rest state is 1, the data is valid on falling edge.
<ChipSelect> (default 0)
0: GPIO (default value)
Note: See <GpioChipSelect> and <GpioHandling> parameters.
1: SPI_EN on Q24X3 and P32X3 products
Note:
on Q24X6 product, the SPI_EN pin is replaced by the GPO 3 output
(Gpio ChipSelect = 7, refer to +WIOM command)
on P32X6 product, the SPI_EN pin is replaced by the GPIO 8 output
(Gpio ChipSelect = 7, refer to +WIOM command)
2: SPI_AUX on Q24X3 and P32X3 products
Note: on Q24X6 and P32X6 products, the SPI_AUX pin is replaced by
the GPO 0 output (Gpio ChipSelect = 6, please refer to the +WIOM
command)
<ChipSelectPolarity>
0: LOW (Chip select signal is valid on low state). (Default value).
1: HIGH (Chip select signal is valid on high state)
<LsbFirst>
0: LSB (Data are sent with LSB first)
1: MSB (Data are sent with MSB first) (default value)
<Gpio ChipSelect > if ChipSelect = GPIO (default GPIO 0, see § 15.11.3)
The GPIO value is between 0 and 7.
It must be a GPIO or a GPO (not a GPI), and not allocated by any Open-AT
embedded application.
Please refer to +WIOM command
<Gpio Handling > if ChipSelect = GPIO
0: SPI BYTE (GPIO signal pulse on each written or read byte)
1: SPI FRAME (GPIO signal works as a standard Chip Select signal) (default
value)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 311 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.47.3.2 for I2C bus:

<Scl Gpio> (default value is 0)
The Scl GPIO value is between 0 and 7.
It must be a GPIO (not a GPI or GPO) and not allocated by an Open-AT
embedded application.
<Sda Gpio> (default value is 4)
The Sda GPIO value is between 0 and 7.
It must be a GPIO (not a GPI or GPO) and not allocated by an Open-AT
embedded application.

15.47.3.3 for Parallel bus (only on Pac products):

<ChipSelect> (default value is 1)
0: GPIO 5 (it must not be allocated by any Open-AT application)
1: LCDEN (same pin as SPI_EN, and Gpio 8 on P32X6 products (it must
not be allocated by any Open-AT application))
<Order> (default value is 0)
0: DIRECT
1: REVERSE
<LCDEN AddressSetUpTime> if ChipSelect = LCDEN (default value is 0)
The <Lcd AddressSetUpTime> value is between 0 and 31.
The resulting time is:
For P32X3 product: ( X * 38.5 ) ns ;
For P32X6 product: ( 1 + 2 X ) * 19 ns.
This is the time between the setting of an address on the bus, and the
activation of the LCD_EN pin (T1 on the figure bellow).

<LCDEN SignalPulseDuration> if ChipSelect = LCDEN (default value is 0)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 312 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

The <Lcd LcdenSignalPulseDuration> value is between 0 and 31.

The resulting time is:
For P32X3 product: ( X + 1.5 ) * 38.5 ns ;
For P32X6 product: ( 1 + 2 * ( X + 1 ) ) * 19 ns
(Warning, for this product, the 0 value in considered as 32).
This is the time during which the LCD_EN signal is valid (T2 on the figure
above).

<LCDEN PolarityControl> if ChipSelect = LCDEN (default value is 0)

0: LOW (LCD_EN signal is valid on low state)
1: HIGH (LCD_EN signal is valid on high state)

<GPIO NbWaitState> if ChipSelect = GPIO (default value is 0)

This is the time during which the data is valid on the bus.
0: 62 ns
1: 100 ns
2: 138 ns
3: 176 ns

Notes:
• If one or two IOs are needed by a bus, they are not available any more
for the +WIOR , +WIOW, +WIOM commands. When the
corresponding bus is closed, these commands resume the control of
the IOs.
• A bus may not be available for an open operation if an Open-AT
embedded application has opened it before with the same parameters.
In this case, the +WBM command will return +CME ERROR: 3.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 313 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.48 WAVECOM Hang-up +WATH

15.48.1 Description
This specific command is used by the application to disconnect the remote
user, specifying a release cause and the location. In the case of multiple calls,
all calls are released (active, on-hold and waiting calls).

15.48.2 Syntax
Command Syntax AT+WATH=<RelCause>,<location>

Command Possible responses

AT+WATH=31 OK
Note: Ask for disconnection with release Note: Every call, if any, are released
cause=normal and location=USER
AT+WATH=? +WATH: (1-127),(0-5,7,10)
AT+WATH=17,2 OK
Note: Ask for disconnection with release Note: Every call, if any, are released
cause=user busy and location= public
network serving the local user

15.48.3 Defined values

<RelCause>: decimal value from 1 to 127 (see the table in appendix 18.4
“Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 recommendation)
<location>: optional parameter (default value =0). values as defined in 04.08
0: user
1: private network serving the local user
2: public network serving the local user
3: transit network
4: public network serving the remote user
5: private network serving the remote user
7: international network
10: network beyond inter-working point
Note: In order to have a “Normal Release”, use ATH command (see paragraph
15.48)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 314 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.49 Write IMEI +WIMEI

15.49.1 Description
The download of the IMEI is available through this specific command. This
operation is possible only if the module contains the default IMEI.
The IMEI can only be downloaded once.
No password is needed. If the download is not correct, only WAVECOM can
reset the IMEI.

15.49.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WIMEI=<IMEI>
Command Possible responses

AT+WIMEI? +WIMEI: 123456789012345

Note: Request IMEI OK
Note: Default IMEI present in EEPROM
AT+WIMEI=123456789099995 OK
Note: First Download
AT+WIMEI=12345 +CME ERROR: 24
Note: First Download with wrong
length of the string
AT+WIMEI=123456789999996 +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Try to overwrite an IMEI already
downloaded

AT+WIMEI? +WIMEI: 123456789099995

Note: Request IMEI OK
Note: IMEI present in EEPROM
AT+WIMEI=? OK
Note: Command valid

15.49.3 Defined values

<IMEI>: 14 or 15 digits as defined by GSM 03.03.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 315 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.50 Write IMEI SVN: +WSVN

15.50.1 Description
The update of the IMEI SVN is available through this specific command.

15.50.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WSVN=<IMEISVN>

Command Possible responses

AT+WSVN? +WSVN: 10
OK
Note: Request IMEI SVN Note: IMEI SVN present in EEPROM
AT+WSVN=11 OK
Note: Update the IMEI SVN
AT+WSVN=256 +CME ERROR: 24
Note: wrong length of the string.
1 <= IMEI SVN <= 255
AT+WSVN=? +WSVN: (1-255)
OK
Note: Command valid

15.50.3 Defined values

<IMEI SVN> IMEI SVN value between 1 and 255

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 316 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.51 WAVECOM multi-band selection command:

+WMBS

15.51.1 Description
This command allows to select the GSM bands on which the module has to
work. This command is allowed only if the selected bands are supported.
The user can choose if the change is immediate or not:
• either the module has to be reset to take this change into account
(this is the default case)
• or the GSM stack restarts immediately on the specified band(s). In
this mode, the command +WMBS is forbidden during the
initialization phase of the modem and during calls.

15.51.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WMBS=<Band>[,<param>]
Response syntax: +WMBS: <Band>,<ResetFlag>

Command Possible responses

AT+WMBS=<Band> OK
Note: Module has to be reset for change to be
effective.
AT+WMBS=<Band>,0 OK
Note: Module has to be reset for change to be
effective.
AT+WMBS=<Band>,1 OK
Note: Band mode selected and GSM stack restarted.
AT+WMBS=<Band> +CME ERROR: 3
Note: Band not allowed
AT+WMBS? +WMBS: <Band>,<ResetFlag>
OK
Note: current selected band mode is returned
AT+WMBS=? +WMBS: (0,3,4),(0-1)
OK
Note: Only 850 mono-band or 850-1900 bi-band
are available
AT+WMBS=? +WMBS: (0,1,2,3,4,5,6),(0-1)
OK
Note: all bands are available

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 317 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.51.3 Defined values

<Band>: frequency band configuration to be supported
0: mono-band mode 850 MHz
1: mono-band mode 900 extended MHz (900E)
2: mono-band mode 1800 MHz
3: mono-band mode 1900 MHz
4: dual-band mode 850/1900 MHz
5: dual-band mode 900E (extended) / 1800 MHz
6: dual-band mode 900E (extended) / 1900 MHz
<Param>: indicates the type of change
0: The module will have to be reset to start on specified band(s).
<ResetFlag> is set to 1.
1: The change is effective immediately: the GSM stack is restarted with
specified band(s). <ResetFlag> stays at 0. This mode is forbidden
while in communication and during modem initialization.
Note: If <Param> is not given, the module has to be reset to start on specified
band(s), as for <param>=0.
<ResetFlag>
0: the feature was not modified since the last boot of the product.
1: the feature has been modified since the last boot of the product: it has
to be reset in order to take the modification into account. This is the
case when the band was changed with “AT+WMBS=<band>” or
“AT+WMBS=<band>,0”.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 318 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.52 Module Serial Number +WMSN

15.52.1 Description
This specific command returns the serial number of the module.

15.52.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WMSN

Command Possible responses

AT+WMSN Serial Number 123456789012345

OK
Note: Serial number present in Non Volatile Memory is
123456789012345 (On 15 digits)
AT+WMSN Serial Number -----------------
OK
Note: No serial number present in Non Volatile Memory
AT+WMSN=? OK

15.52.3 Defined values

No parameters.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 319 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.53 Cellular Text telephone Modem +WCTM

15.53.1 Description
This command allows to activate and deactivate Cellular Text telephone
Modem (CTM) capability for outgoing voice call as specified in GSM 04.08
(3GPP 24.008).
CTM mode is used to send audio signals from an external text terminal (ex: a
TTY typewriter) within a voice call made by the ME. The text terminal must
have a special mobile phone input/output to work correctly.
When the ME indicates support of CTM text telephony for an outgoing voice
call, the network shall select a speech CODEC and additionally CTM text
telephony detection and conversion functions.
To guaranty optimal audio management of CTM signals, it is mandatory to
deactivate Acoustic Echo Cancellation (see Echo Cancellation +ECHO
command) and Side Tone (see Side Tone modification +SIDET command).
Voice gain of transmitter and receiver (see Gain control +VGR, +VGT
commands) have to be calibrated according to the external text terminal audio
characteristics.

15.53.2 Syntax
Command Syntax: AT+WCTM=<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+WCTM=1 OK
+CME ERROR: <error>
AT+ WCTM? +WCTM:1
OK
AT+WCTM=? +WCTM: (0-1)
OK

15.53.3 Defined values

<mode>: integer type
0 Deactivate CTM mode
1 Activate CTM mode
Note: if <mode> is set to 0, all incoming CTM calls will be rejected. Caller will
receive a « No carrier » indication.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 320 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.54 Modem Behavior Configuration +WBHV

15.54.1 Description
This command allows the user to configure the behavior of WAVECOM
modem.
If first parameter value is 0, the command configures the way the modem
responds on outgoing voice calls: when the call is established (default mode),
or when the audio path is opened.
If first parameter value is 1, the command configures the modem init mode :
normal, powerless (airplane mode) or low consumption. In the powerless case,
no calls (even emergency calls) are available.
If parameter1 = 2, the module will respond immediately OK after a dial (ATD
command).

15.54.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WBHV = <parameter1>,<parameter2>
According to parameter1:
AT+WBHV = 0,<mode>
AT+WBHV = 1,<mode>
AT+WBHV = 2,<mode>

Command Possible responses

AT+WBHV=0,0 OK
Note: Set modem response to default mode Note: modem response is sent on call
establishment
AT+WBHV=0,1 OK
Note: Set modem response when audio Note: modem response is sent on audio
path is opened path opened
AT+WBHV=1,0 OK
Note: Modem normal (and default) mode
AT+WBHV=1,1 OK
Note: Modem powerless mode
AT+WBHV=1,2 OK
Note: Low consumption mode
AT+WBHV=2,1 OK
Note: modem response mode on a call : OK
just after +WIND : 5,x indication

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 321 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WBHV? +WBHV: 0,0

+WBHV: 1,0
+WBHV: 2,0
OK
AT+WBHV=? +WBHV: 0,(0-1)
+WBHV: 1,(0-2)
+WBHV: 2,(0-1)
OK
AT+WBHV=2,3 +CME ERROR:3
Note: Illegal parameters Note: Wrong parameters

15.54.3 Defined values

<parameter1>: mode, [0 ; 1]
0: configure modem response on outgoing voice calls (default value)
<parameter2>: modem response sending
0: modem response is sent on call establishment (default value)
1: modem response is sent when audio path is opened
1: configure modem mode
<parameter2>: modem init mode
0: modem init mode is normal (default value)
1: modem init mode is powerless (airplane mode: start the
module without the GSM stack, no calls are available, even
emergency)
2: modem init mode is low consumption
2: configure the response delay for a call
<parameter2>: modem response mode on a call
0: response when the remote part hangs up (default value)
1: OK will be displayed immediately after the ATD command

Parameter1 Parameter2 Meaning

value value
0 0 modem response is sent on call establishment
(default)
0 1 modem response is sent when audio path is
opened
1 0 Modem normal mode (default)
1 1 Modem powerless mode (Airplane Mode)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 322 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

1 2 Low Consumption mode

2 0 Call response (default)
2 1 Quick call response

15.55 Hardware Configuration AT+WHCNF

15.55.1 Description
This command allows to change some hardware configuration.
This command allows to change configuration of v24 (V24-RI & v24-DCD) to
SPI (SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO). This feature is available only on P5186 product.
Note: At start-up, the module uses the last configuration. There is no need to
perform an explicit saving of this parameter. Default configuration is V24.
This command allows to set off or switch off the battery charge on Q2501B
module.

15.55.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WHCNF = <type>,<mode>[,<param1>]

Command Possible responses

AT+ WHCNF=0,0 +WHCNF: 0

OK
Note: Read info about V24-RI & v24-DCD
and SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO Note: V24-RI & v24-DCD are available
AT+ WHCNF=0,1,1 OK
Note: Change state to SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO Note: SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO are available

AT+ WHCNF=3,0 OK

Note: The Battery charge on Q25 is not

allowed
AT+ WHCNF=3,1 OK

Note: The Battery charge on Q25 is allowed

AT+ WHCNF? OK
AT+ WHCNF=? OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 323 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.55.3 Defined values

<type>
0: V24-RI & v24-DCD or SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO
1: Reserved for internal use.
2: Reserved for internal use.
3: Battery charge on Q25
<mode>
For Type = 0
0: read information about V24-RI & v24-DCD and SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO
1: change state between (V24-RI & v24-DCD) and (SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO)
For Type = 3 :
0: disable the Battery charge on Q2501B module
1: enable the Battery charge on Q2501B module
Note : A reset must be done to take into account the modification.

<param1>
For Type = 0
0: V24-RI & v24-DCD active (default value)
1: SPI-CLOCK & SPI-IO active
1: Open USB port

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 324 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.56 Multi-flow Management +WMFM

15.56.1 Description
This command manages Multi-Flows: activating or deactivating ports and
associating (or attaching, redirecting) incoming data to ports. By default, only
UART1 is active, and GSM and GPRS (if applicable) data direction is dynamic.
Notes:
• Since the UART2 port does not provide all the serial signals (only
RX/TX/RTS/CTS ones), it is not recommended to use this port for GSM or
GPRS data mode.
• On Q2501 WISMO modules, UART2 port is not available when GPS
mode is active.

15.56.2 Syntax
Command syntax:
AT+WMFM = <type_of_action>,<mode>[,<port_id>[,<data>]]
AT+WMFM = 0,<mode>[,<port_id>]
AT+WMFM = 1,<mode>[,<port_id>[,<data>]]
Response syntax:
+WMFM: 0,<mode>[,<port_id>,<state>]
+WMFM: 1,<mode>[,<port_id>[,<data>]]

Command Possible responses

AT+WMFM=0,2 +WMFM:0,2,1,0
+WMFM:0,2,2,1
OK
Note: UART2 is activated ; all ports are
Note: read state of all ports listed
AT+WMFM=0,0,2 OK
Note: deactivate UART2 Note: UART2 is deactivated
AT+WMFM=0,1,1 OK
Note: activate UART1 Note: UART1 is activated
AT+WMFM=0,2,1 +WMFM:0,2,1,1
OK
Note: read UART1’s state Note: UART1 is activated

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 325 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible responses

AT+WMFM=1,2 +WMFM:1,2,2,0
+WMFM:1,2,2,1
OK
Note: GSM and GPRS data are attached
Note: read attachments of ports to which to UART2 ; only ports with attachments
data are redirected are displayed
AT+WMFM=1,0,,0 OK
Note: set GSM data dynamic mode Note: GSM data are directed dynamically
on call setup
AT+WMFM=1,0,,1 OK
Note: set GPRS data dynamic mode Note: GPRS data are directed dynamically
on session setup
AT+WMFM=1,1,1,0 OK
Note: attach GSM data to UART1 Note: GSM data are redirected to UART1
AT+WMFM=1,1,1,1 OK
Note: attach GPRS data to UART1 Note: GPRS data are redirected to UART1
AT+WMFM=1,2,1 +WMFM:1,2,1,0
+WMFM:1,2,1,1
OK
Note: GSM and GPRS data are redirected
Note: read attachments of UART1 to UART1
AT+WMFM? +WMFM:0,2,1,1
+WMFM:0,2,2,0
Note: read all states and attachments +WMFM:1,2,1,0
+WMFM:1,2,1,1
OK
Note: UART1 is activated and GSM and
GPRS data are redirected to it
AT+WMFM=? +WMFM:0,(0-2),(1-2)
+WMFM:1,(0-2),(1,2,4,80),(0-1)
OK
Note : USB not supported here

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 326 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

15.56.3 Defined values

<type_of_action> 0: managing actives physical ports
1: managing incoming data
<mode> According to <type_of_action>
0: deactivates or sets dynamic mode (data direction is
set on ATD / ATA commands for GSM, or ATD /
AT+CGDATA commands for GPRS)
1: activates or attach
2: read state
< port_id > 1: UART1 (default value)
2: UART2
3 : USB (if USB is supported)
4: Dynamic port
80: Open-AT application (only in read mode)
< data > 0: GSM data
1: GPRS data
< state > 0: deactivated (default value for other <port id>
values)
1: activated (default value for default <port id> value)
Note : You can only open or close the remote UART (you can’t close the UART
1 sending the WMFM command through UART 1 )

15.57 Open AT tasks resume command +WOPENRES

15.57.1 Description
This specific command allows to resume the suspended Open AT embedded
application.
Note: This command is only available if the Open AT feature is enabled (see
+WCFM command).

15.57.2 Syntax
Command syntax AT+WOPENRES

Command Possible responses

AT+WOPENRES OK
Note: The Open AT embedded application is suspended
AT+ WOPENRES =? OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 327 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

16 Agenda commands

16.1 Parameters definition

<mode> Mode
<date / time string> String format: ”yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss”
Date: Year [00-99], Month [01-12], Day [01-31]
Time: Hour, Minute, Second. Years range is [2000-2099]
<category> Type of appointment
00: Meeting
01: Call
02: Restaurant
03: Entertainment
04: Birthday
05: Others-None
<alarm_offset> Offset of the alarm
00: none
01: immediately
02: 5 minutes before
03: 15 minutes before
04: 30 minutes before
05: 1 day before
<frequency> Alarm frequency
00: none
01: every day
02: every week
03: every month
04: every year
<description> Text description (ASCII or UCS2 format)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 328 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

16.2 Read agenda entries +WAGR

16.2.1 Description
This command returns agenda entries.

16.2.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WAGR=<mode>[,<loc>]
Response syntax: <CR><LF>
+WAGR=<loc>, <date / time string>, <category>, <alarm_offset>,
<frequency>,<description>

Command Possible responses

AT+WAGR=? +WAGR: (0-1),(1-100)

Note: Test command OK
AT+ WAGR=0 + WAGR: 1, ”02/10/21,11:00:00”, 00, 00, 01, ”Important
Note: mode 0: all entries meeting”
+ WAGR: 2, ”02/12/21,21:00:00”, 02, 01, 00, ”Dinner”
OK
Note: Display locations 1 and 2
appointment n°1: meeting, no alarm offset, every day
appointment n°2: Restaurant, immediately, no frequency
AT+ WAGR =1,2 + WAGR: 2, ”02/12/21,21:00:00”, 02, 01, 00, ”Dinner”
Note: Read entry 2 OK
Note: Display location 2

16.2.3 Defined values

See other parameters description in § 16.1.
<mode> Mode:
0: all appointments
1: action to the appointment stored at location <loc>
<loc> Location in the memory storage

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 329 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

16.3 Write agenda entry +WAGW

16.3.1 Description
This command writes an appointment entry in the agenda.

16.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax:
AT+WAGW=<date / time string>,<category>,<alarm_offset>,<frequency>[,
<description>[, <index>]]
Response syntax: +WAGW: <index>

Command Possible responses

AT+WAGW =? OK
Note: Test command
AT+WAGW=”02/10/21,11:00:00”,00,00,01 +WAGW: 1
, ”Important meeting” OK
Note: Write an appointment (meeting, no Note: Appointment written in location 1
alarm offset, every day)
AT+WAGW=”02/15/21,21:00:00”,02,01,00 +WAGW: 2
, ”Dinner” OK
Note: Write an appointment (Restaurant, Note: Appointment written in location 2
immediately, no frequency)
AT+WAGW=”02/15/21,18:00:00”,01,00,00 +WAGW: 3
, ”804E004E01FFFF” OK
Note: Write an appointment (Restaurant, Note: Appointment written in location 3
no alarm offset, no frequency) with a
description in UCS2 (type 80)
AT+WAGW = ”02/10/21,11:00:00”, 00, 00, OK
01, ”Company meeting ”, 4 Note: <index> provided, no additional
Note: Write an appointment (meeting, no response.
alarm offset, every day) at location 4
+WAGI: “02/12/21,15:00:00”, 02, 01, 00,
”Call John”,2
Note: an appointment occurs (index 2)
Note: If you specify a location in the +WAGW command, the +WAGW:<index>
will not appear.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 330 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

16.3.3 Defined values

See other parameters description in § 16.1.
<index> Location where the event was written
<description> If you want to write a description using UCS2 format, you can
write up to 127 characters.
3 types for the UCS2 format can be used: type 80, type 81
and type 82.

16.4 Delete agenda entries +WAGD

16.4.1 Description
This command is used to delete one or all appointments.

16.4.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WAGD=<mode>[,<loc>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WAGD=1,5 OK
Note: Erase location 5
AT+WAGD =0 OK
Note: Erase all locations

AT+WAGD=? +WAGD: (0-1),(1-100)

Note: Test command OK

16.4.3 Defined values

See other parameters description in § 16.1.
<mode> Mode:
0: remove all appointments
1: remove the appointment stored at location <loc>
<loc> Location offset in the memory storage

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 331 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17 SIM TOOLKIT
Important notice about SIM Toolkit
SIM Toolkit can be activated and used with two different sets of commands.
• RIL (Radio Interface Layer): +CRSM (§4.21), +CSIM(§4.20),
+STRIL(§17.3.2)
• WAVECOM commands, described in the following paragraphs.
These two behaviors are exclusive.

17.1 Overview of SIM Application ToolKit

17.1.1 Summary
SIM ToolKit, also known as “SIM Application ToolKit” introduces
functionalities, which open the way to a broad range of value added services.
The principle is to allow service providers to develop new applications (e.g.. for
banking, travel, ticket booking, etc.) for subscribers and to download them into
the SIM.
This solution allows new services to be accessible to the user by adding new
SIM-based applications without modifying the handset.

17.1.2 Functionality
SIM Toolkit refers to the functionalities described in the GSM Technical
specification 11.14.
It introduces twenty five commands for the SIM. Three classes of increasing
ToolKit functionalities have been defined, with class 1 offering a subset of
commands and class 3 offering the full range of commands (See table 1 in
APPENDIX B).
The SIM Application Toolkit supports:
• profile download,
• proactive SIM,
• data download into SIM.
• menu selection,
• call control by SIM.

17.1.3 Profile download

The Profile Download instruction is sent by the customer application to the
SIM as part of the initialization. It is used to indicate which SIM Application
Toolkit features is supported by the customer application.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 332 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

The AT command used for this operation is +STSF (SIM ToolKit Set Facilities).

17.1.4 Proactive SIM

A proactive SIM provides a mechanism whereby the SIM can ask the customer
application to perform certain actions.
These actions include:
• display menu,
• display given text,
• get user input,
• send a short message,
• play the requested tone,
• set up a call,
• provide location information.
This mechanism allows SIM applications to generate powerful menu-driven
sequences on the customer application and to use services available in the
network.
The commands used for this operation are:
+STIN (SIM Toolkit Indication),
+STGI (SIM Toolkit Get Information),
+STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response).

17.1.5 Data Download to SIM

Data downloading to the SIM (SMS, phonebook…) allows data or programs
(Java applets) received by SMS or by Cell Broadcast to be transferred directly
to the SIM Application.
This feature does not need any AT command. It is transparent to the customer
application.

17.1.6 Menu Selection

A set of menu items is supplied by the SIM Application ToolKit. The menu
selection command can then be used to signal to the SIM Application which
menu item is selected.
The commands used for this operation are +STIN, +STGI and +STGR.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 333 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.1.7 Call control by SIM

The call control mechanism allows the SIM to check all dialed numbers,
supplementary service control strings and USSD strings before connecting to
the network. This gives the SIM the ability to allow, bar or modify the string
before the operation starts.
The commands used for this operation are:
+STCR (SIM Toolkit Control Response),
+STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response).

17.2 Messages exchanged during a SIM ToolKit

operation.

The following scheme shows the SIM Toolkit commands and unsolicited
results that are exchanged.

+STSF=X,XXXXXXXX

STEP 1: Configuration and Activation

+STIN=X

STEP 2: SIM sends pro-active

WAVECOM d Customer
Product +STGI=X Application

+STGI response

STEP 3: Customer application gets all the

i f ti
+STCR:X

+STGR=X,XXXXXX

Step 4: User response is sent to the SIM.

On the first step, the customer application informs the WAVECOM product
which facilities are supported. This operation is performed with the +STSF
(SIM ToolKit Set Facilities) command, which also allows to activate or
deactivate the SIM Toolkit functionality.
On the second step, an unsolicited result +STIN (SIM ToolKit indication) is sent
by the product, indicating to the customer application which command type

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 334 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

the SIM Application Toolkit is running on the SIM card. The last SIM Toolkit
indication can be requested by the +STIN? command.
On the third step, the customer application uses the +STGI (SIM ToolKit Get
Information) command to get all the information about the SIM ToolKit
command, returned by a +STIN message.
On the fourth step, the customer application uses the +STGR (SIM Toolkit Give
Response) to send its response (if any) to the SIM ToolKit Application.
The +STCR (SIM Toolkit Control response) indication is an unsolicited result
sent by the SIM when Call control functionality is activated and before the
customer application has performed any outgoing call, SMS, SS, or USSD.

17.3 SIM TOOLKIT COMMANDS

17.3.1 SIM ToolKit Set Facilities (+STSF)

17.3.1.1 Description
This command allows SIM ToolKit facilities to be activated, deactivated or
configured.

17.3.1.2 Syntax
Command syntax:
+STSF=<mode>[,<config>][,<Timeout>][,<AutoResponse>]

Command Possible responses

AT+STSF=<Mode>[,<Config>] OK
[,<Timeout>][,<AutoResponse>] +CME ERROR: <err>
+STSF: <Mode>, <Config>, <Timeout>,
AT+STSF?
<Autoresponse>
+STSF: (0-2), (160060C01F - 5FFFFFFF7F),(1-
AT+STSF=? 255),(0-1)
OK

17.3.1.3 Defined values

<mode>
0: Deactivates the SIM Toolkit functionalities.
1: Activates the SIM Toolkit functionalities.
2: Configures the SIM Toolkit functionalities.
<Config>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 335 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

(160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F) (hex format)

Default value : 1F6BFFFF1F
<Timeout>
Range 1 to 255: Timeout for user responses (multiple of 10 seconds).
Default value : 3
<Autoresponse>
0: Automatic response is not activated
1: Automatic response is activated
Default value : 1

Notes:
• The activation or deactivation of the SIM Toolkit functionalities
requires the use of the +CFUN (Set phone functionality)
command to reset the product. This operation is not necessary if
PIN is not entered yet.
• The <Config> parameter gives the coding of the TERMINAL
PROFILE, precisely the list of SIM Application Toolkit facilities
that are supported by the customer application.
• The <Timeout> parameter (multiple of 10 seconds) sets the
maximum time for the user action (to select an item, to input a
text, etc).
• When <Autoresponse> is activated, the +STIN indication for Play
Tone (5), Refresh (7), Send SS (8), Send SMS (9) or Send USSD
(10) is automatically followed by the corresponding +STGI
response.

Note: Some bits are related to the product only and not to the customer
application. The product automatically sets these bits to either 0 or 1 whatever
the user enters with the +STSF command. Those values are given in Technical
Appendixeschapter (see Appendixes to AT Commands Interface Guide).
Each facility is coded on 1 bit:
• bit = 1: facility is supported by the customer application.
• bit = 0: facility is not supported by the customer
application.
Only the first five bytes of the TERMINAL PROFILE (Class 2) can be configured,
the other are set to 0. (refer to § 3.3 Structure of TERMINAL PROFILE in
Technical Appendixes (see Appendixes to AT Commands Interface Guide).

17.3.1.4 Error codes

+CME ERROR: 3 Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a
wrong parameter is entered.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 336 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.3.1.5 Example
AT+CMEE=1 Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors
OK
AT+WIND=15 Set WAVECOM indications
OK
AT+CPAS Query ME Status
+CPAS: 0 ME is ready.
OK
AT+STSF=? Test command SIM ToolKit Set Facilities
+STSF: (0-2), (160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F),(1-255)
OK

AT+STSF?
+STSF: 0,”160060C000”,3 No activation of SIM ToolKit functionality
OK
AT+STSF=2,”5FFFFFFF7F”Set all SIM ToolKit facilities (class 3).
OK
AT+STSF=3 Syntax Error
+CME ERROR: 3
AT+STSF=1 Activation of SIM ToolKit functionality
OK
AT+CFUN=1 Reboot Software.
OK
AT+CPIN? Is the ME requiring a password?
+CPIN: SIM PIN Yes, SIM PIN required
AT+CPIN=0000
OK PIN Ok

+WIND: 4 Init phase is complete

AT+STSF?
+STSF: 1,”5FFFFFFF7F”,3 SIM ToolKit functionality activated with all facilities

OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 337 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.3.2 SIM ToolKit Indication (+STIN +STRIL)

17.3.2.1 Unsolicited result

In order to allow the customer application to identify the pro-active command
sent via SIM ToolKit, a mechanism of unsolicited SIM ToolKit indications
(+STIN) is implemented.

Syntax: +STIN: <CmdType>

<CmdType>
0 a ‘Setup Menu’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
1 a ‘Display Text’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
2 a ‘Get Inkey’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
3 a ‘Get Input’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
4 a ‘Setup Call’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
5 a ‘Play Tone’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
6 a ‘Sel Item’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
7 a ‘Refresh’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
8 a ‘Send SS’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
9 a ‘Send SMS’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
10 a ‘Send USSD’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
a ‘SETUP EVENT LIST’ pro-active command has been sent from the
11
SIM.
93 a ‘SMS-PP Data Download’ failed due to SIM BUSY
94 a ‘SMS-PP Data Download’ failed due to SIM ERROR
98 timeout when no response from user.
99 a “End Session” has been sent from the SIM.

(*) if the automatic response parameter is activated, this indication is followed

by the corresponding +STGI response.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 338 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

If the customer application needs to exchange SIM Toolkit message directly

with the SIM card, the second indication (+STRIL) give the full command string
given by the SIM.

Syntax: +STRIL: <CmdTreated>,<Command string>

< CmdTreated >
0: The command must be treated by the application.
1: The command is already treated by the module,

<Command string> string type; SIM command string in hexadecimal format.

17.3.2.2 Last SIM toolkit indication

The last SIM toolkit indication sent by the SIM can be requested by the
AT+STIN? command. This command is only usable between the sending of the
STIN indication by the SIM (step 2: see section 16.2) and the response of the
user with the +STGI command (step 3).
Command syntax: +STIN?

Command Possible responses

AT+STIN? +STIN: 0
Note: Ask for the last SIM toolkit OK
indication sent by the SIM
Note: the last SIM toolkit indication was
a Setup Menu

Note: Display the SIM toolkit application

AT+STGI=0
menu
AT+STIN? +CME ERROR: 4
Note: Ask for the last SIM toolkit Note: operation not supported, the
indication sent by the SIM +STGI command has been already used

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 339 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.3.3 SIM ToolKit Get Information (+STGI)

17.3.3.1 Description
This command allows to get the information (text to display, Menu
information, priorities…) of a pro-active command sent from the SIM.
The information is returned only after receiving a SIM Toolkit indication
(+STIN).

17.3.3.2 Syntax
Command syntax: +STGI=<CmdType>

Command Possible responses

Note: See Table 1

AT+STGI=<CmdType>
+CME ERROR: <err>
+STGI: (0-11)
AT+STGI=?
OK

Table 1

Cmd Description Possible responses

Type

+STGI: <Alpha Identifier menu>

+STGI: <Id1>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id1 Label>,<Help
Get information about Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>
0 ‘Setup Menu’ pro- +STGI: <Id2>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id2 Label>,<Help
active command. Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>
[…]]
No action expected from SIM.
Get information about +STGI: <Prior>,<Text>,<ClearMode>
1 ‘Display text’ pro- No action expected from SIM.
active command.
Get information about +STGI: <Format>,<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]
2 ‘Get Inkey’ pro-active SIM expects key pressed (+STGR).
command.
+STGI:
Get information about <Format>,<EchoMode>,<SizeMin>,<SizeMax>,
3 ‘Get Input’ pro-active <HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]
command.
SIM expects key input (+STGR).
+STGI:
Get information about <Type>,<CalledNb>,<SubAddress>,<Class>,<Alpha
4 ‘Setup call’ pro-active Id>
command. SIM expects user authorization (+STGR).
Note: if <Class> is omitted, call is processed as a voice call.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 340 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Cmd Description Possible responses

Type

+STGI:
Get information about <ToneType>[,<TimeUnit>,<TimeInterval>,<TextInfo>
5 ‘Play Tone’ pro-active ]
command.
No action.
+STGI: <DefaultItem>, <Alpha Identifier
menu><CR><LF>
+STGI: <Id1>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id1 Label>,<Help
Get information about Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>
6 ‘Sel Item’ pro-active
+STGI: <Id2>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id2 Label>,<Help
command.
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>
[…]]
SIM expects an item choice (+STGR).
Get information about +STGI: <RefreshType>
7 ‘Refresh’ pro-active No action (Refresh done automatically by product).
command.
Get information about +STGI:<TextInfo>
8 ‘Send SS’ pro-active No action (Send SS done automatically by product).
command.
Get information about +STGI: <TextInfo>
9 ‘Send SMS’ pro-active No action (Send SMS done automatically by product).
command.
Get information about +STGI: <TextInfo>
10 ‘Send USSD’ pro- No action (Send USSD done automatically by
active command. product).
Get information about +STGI: <Evt>
11 ‘SETUP EVENT LIST’
pro-active command.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 341 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.3.3.3 Defined values

Values when CmdType=0 (Setup menu)
<Alpha Identifier menu> Alpha identifier of the main menu.
<Idx> (1-255) Menu item Identifier.
<NbItems> (1-255) Number of items in the main menu.
<Alpha Idx Label> Alpha identifier label of items in ASCII format.
<HelpInfo>
0: No help information available.
1: Help information available.
<NextActionId> Contains a pro-active command identifier.(see
the table in APPENDIX D)
Compared to other commands the customer application can always get
information about setup menu after having received the +STIN:0 indication.

Values when CmdType=1 (Display text)

<Prior>
0 Normal priority of display.
1 High priority of display.
<Text> Text to display in ASCII format.
<ClearMode>
0 Clear message after a delay (3 seconds)
1 Wait for user to clear message.

Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey)

<Format>
0 Digit (0-9, *, #,and +)
1 SMS alphabet default.
2 UCS2
<HelpInfo>
0 No help information available.
1 Help information available.
<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 342 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input)

<Format>
0 Digit (0-9, *, #,and +)
1 SMS alphabet default.
2 UCS2
3 Unpacked format.
4 Packed format.
<EchoMode>
0 Echo off.
1 Echo on.
<SizeMin> (1-255) Minimum length of input.
<SizeMax> (1-255) Maximum length of input.
<HelpInfo>
0 No help information available.
1 Help information available.
<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.

Values when CmdType=4 (Setup Call)

<Type>
0 Set up call but only if not currently busy on another call.
1 Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold.
2 Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any).
<CalledNb> Called party number in ASCII format.
<SubAdress> Called party sub-address in ASCII format.
<Class>
0 Voice call.
1 Data call.
2 Fax call
<Alpha Identifier>

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 343 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Values when CmdType=5 (Play tone)

<ToneType>
0 Tone Dial.
1 Tone Busy.
2 Tone Congestion.
3 Tone Radio ack
4 Tone Dropped.
5 Tone Error.
6 Tone Call waiting.
7 Tone Ringing.
8 Tone General beep.
9 Tone Positive beep.
10 Tone Negative beep.
<TimeUnit>
0 Time unit used is minutes.
1 Time unit used is seconds.
2 Time unit used is tenths of seconds.
<TimeInterval> (1-255) Time required expressed in units.
<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.

Values when CmdType=6 (Sel Item)

<DefaultItem> (1-255) Default Item Identifier.
<Alpha Identifier menu> Alpha identifier of the main menu.
<Idx> (1-255) Identifier items.
<NbItems> (1-255) Number of items in the menu.
<Alpha Idx Label> Alpha identifier label of items in ASCII format.
<HelpInfo>
0 No help information available.
1 Help information available.
<NextActionId> Contains a pro-active command identifier. (see
the table in APPENDIX D)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 344 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Values when CmdType=7 (Refresh)

<RefreshType>
0 SlM initialization and full file change notification.
1 File change notification.
2 SIM initialization and file change notification.
3 SIM initialization.
4 SIM reset.

Values when CmdType=8 (Send SS)

<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.

Values when CmdType=9 (Send SMS)

<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.

Values when CmdType=10 (Send USSD)

<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.

Values when CmdType=11 (Setup Event List)

<Evt>
1 Reporting asked for an ‘Idle Screen’ event.
2 Reporting asked for an ‘User Activity’ event.
3 Reporting asked for ‘Idle Screen’ and ‘User Activity’ events.
4 Cancellation of reporting event.

Note: For the UCS2 format texts are displayed in Hexa ASCII format. Example:
When the SIM sends a TextString containing 0x00 0x41 the text displayed is
“0041”.

17.3.3.4 Error codes

+CME ERROR: 3 Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a
wrong parameter is detected.
+CME ERROR: 4 Operation not supported. This error is returned when the
user wants to get information about a SIM ToolKit pro-
active command (with SIM ToolKit functionality not
activated.)
+CME ERROR: 518 SIM ToolKit indication not received. This error is returned
when the SIM Toolkit indication (+STIN) has not been
received.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 345 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.3.3.5 Example
Initially, all facilities are activated, the PIN is not required and SIM toolkit
functionality is activated.
AT+CMEE=1 Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors
OK
AT+WIND=15 Set WAVECOM indications
OK

AT+STSF?
+STSF: 1,”5FFFFFFF7F”,3 SIM ToolKit functionality activated with all facilities.
OK
+STIN: 0 The main menu has been sent from the SIM.
AT+STIN?
+STIN: 0
OK
AT+STGI=0 Get information about the main menu
+STGI: ”SIM TOOLKIT MAIN MENU” Main menu contains 3 items.
+STGI: 1,3,”BANK”,0
+STGI: 2,3,”QUIZ”,0
+STGI: 3,3,”WEATHER”,0
OK
AT+STIN?
+CME ERROR: 4

17.3.4 Unsolicited Result: SIM ToolKit Control Response (+STCR)

When the customer application makes an outgoing call or an outgoing SMS
and if the call control facility is activated, CALL CONTROL and SMS CONTROL
responses can be identified. This is also applicable to SS calls.
Syntax: +STCR: <Result>[,<Number>,<MODestAddr>,<TextInfo>]
Option:
<Result>
0: Control response not allowed.
1: Control response with modification.
<Number> Called number, Service Center Address or SS String in
ASCII format.
<MODestAddr> MO destination address in ASCII format.
<TextInfo> Text information in ASCII format.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 346 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.3.5 SIM ToolKit Give Response (+STGR)

17.3.5.1 Description
This command allows the application/user to select an item in the main menu,
or to answer the following proactive commands:
• GET INKEY Key pressed by the user.
• GET INPUT Message entered by the user.
• SELECT ITEM Selected item.
• SETUP CALL User confirmation.
• DISPLAY TEXT User confirmation to clear the message.
• SETUP EVENT LIST Reporting events.

It is also possible to terminate the current proactive command session by

sending a Terminal Response to the SIM, with the following parameters:
• BACKWARD MOVE Process a backward move
• BEYOND CAPABILITIES Command beyond ME capabilities
• UNABLE TO PROCESS ME is currently unable to process
command
• NO RESPONSE No response from the user
• END SESSION User abort.

17.3.5.2 Syntax
Command syntax: +STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>,<Data>]

Command Possible responses

OK
AT+STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>,<Data>]
+CME ERROR: <err>

For GetInput with <Result>=1:

OK
AT+STGR=3,1<CR>
+CME ERROR: <err>
<Data><Ctrl Z>

For GetInkey with <Result>=1 OK

AT+STGR=2,1,”<Data>” +CME ERROR: <err>

AT+STGR=? OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 347 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.3.5.3 Defined values

<CmdType>
0 Item selection in the main menu.
1 User confirmation to clear a ‘Disp Text’.
2 Response for a ‘Get Inkey’.
3 Response for a ‘Get Input’.
4 Response for a ‘Setup call’.
6 Response for a ‘Sel Item’.
11 Response for a ‘Setup event list’.
95 Backward move
96 Command beyond ME capabilities
97 ME currently unable to process command
98 No response from the user.
99 User abort.

Values when CmdType=0 (Select an item from the main menu)

<Result>
1 Item selected by the user.
2 Help information required by user.
<Data> Contains the item identifier of the item selected by the user.

Values when CmdType=1 (Confirm the display text clearing)

No values.

Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey)

<Result>
0 Session ended by user.
1 Response given by the user.
2 Help information required by user.
<Data> Contains the key pressed by the user.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 348 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input)

<Result>
0 Session ended by user.
1 Response given by the user.
2 Help information required by user.
<Data> Contains the string of characters entered by the user.

Note:
For Inputs in UCS2 format, the data are entered in ASCII format. Example: For
“8000410042FFFF” entered, the SIM receives 0x00 0x41 0x00 0x42 with
UCS2 DCS. (See the Appendix E about the different UCS2 syntaxes).

Values when CmdType=4 (Setup call)

<Result>
0 User refuses the call.
1 User accepts call.

Values when CmdType=6 (Select Item)

<Result>
0 Session terminated by the user
1 Item selected by the user
2 Help information required by the user
3 Return to the back item
<Data> Contains the item identifier selected by the user

Values when CmdType=11 (Setup Event List)

<Result>
1 Idle screen available.
2 User activity event.

Sending a Terminal Response to the SIM:

Values when CmdType=95 (Backward Move)
Values when CmdType=96 (Command beyond ME capabilities)
Values when CmdType=97 (ME currently unable to process command)
Values when CmdType=98 (No response from the user)
Values when CmdType=99 (SIM Toolkit Session aborting by the user)
No values.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 349 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

It is possible to send a Terminal Response after the +STIN indication (step 2,

cf. §16.2), or after the +STGI command (step 3).
Note:
For the SETUP MENU Proactive Command, it is only possible to send a
Terminal Response after the +STIN: 0 indication, not after a +STGI=0 request.
All of the Terminal Responses are not possible with all of the Proactive
Commands. Compatibility between available Terminal Responses and Proactive
Commands is given in Appendix B, Table 2. If a Terminal Response is
attempted during a incompatible Proactive Command session, a +CME ERROR:
3 will be returned.

17.3.5.4 Possible error codes

+CME ERROR: 3 Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a
wrong parameter is detected.
+CME ERROR: 4 Operation not supported. This error is returned when the
user gives a response with SIM ToolKit functionality not
activated. Or if the SIM Toolkit indication (+STIN) has not
been received.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 350 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

17.3.5.5 Example
Initially, all facilities are activated, the PIN is not required and the SIM toolkit
functionality is activated.
+STIN: 0 The main menu has been sent from the SIM.
AT+STGI=0 Get information about the main menu
+STGI: 1,3,”BANK”,0 The main menu contains 3 items.
+STGI: 2,3,”QUIZ”,0
+STGI: 3,3,”WEATHER”,0
OK
AT+STGR=0,1,1 The item 2 of the main menu has been selected.
OK

+STIN: 6 The Sel item menu has been sent from the SIM.
AT+STGI=6 Get information about the BANK menu
+STGI: 1,”BANK” The BANK menu contains two items.
+STGI: 1,2,”PERSONAL ACCOUNT ENQUIRY”,1
+STGI: 2,2,”NEWS”,0
OK
AT+STGR=6,1,1 Select Item 1.
OK
+STIN: 3 User request to enter Password sent.
AT+STGI=3 Get information about this request.
+STGI: 0,0,4,4,0,”Enter Account Password:’

OK
AT+STGR=3,1<CR> The user enters the Password.
>0000<Ctrl Z>
OK
+STIN:1 A text info has been sent from the SIM.
AT+STGI=1 Get information about this text.
+STGI: 0,”Password correct, please wait for response”,0
OK
+STIN: 9 SIM requests a bank account update from bank server via the
network (SEND SMS)
AT+STGI=9 Get all information about the SEND SMS
+STGI: ”Send account balance of user, authorization ok”
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 351 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

********* After a short period of time. ********

+STIN: 5 Transaction is complete: BEEP
+STGI=5 Get information about the Tone
+STGI: 9,1,1
+STIN: 1 Display text indication
AT+STGI=1
+STGI: 0,”Your account balance is 1000 $”,0
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 352 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18 GPRS commands
GPRS commands are not available under GSM-only software.

18.1 Define PDP Context +CGDCONT

18.1.1 Description
This command specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context
identified by the local context identification parameter, <cid>.
Four PDP contexts can be defined through WAVECOM software.
A special form of the set command, +CGDCONT= <cid> causes the values for
context number <cid> to become undefined.
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT
supports several PDP types, <PDP_type>, the parameter value ranges for each
<PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context.
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT
supports several PDP types, <PDP_type), the parameter value ranges for each
<PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 353 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.1.2 Syntax

Command Possible response(s)

AT+CGDCONT=[<cid> OK
[,<PDP_type> [,<APN> ERROR
[,<PDP_addr> [,<d_comp>
[,<h_comp>]]]]]]
AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,
<APN>,<PDP_addr>, <data_comp>,
<head_comp>
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,
<APN>,<PDP_addr>, <data_comp>,
<head_comp>
[...]]
OK
AT+CGDCONT=? +CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: (range of supported
<cid>s), <PDP_type>,,,(list of supported
<d_comp>s),(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[...]]
OK
AT+CGDCONT: 1, "IP", "internet"; OK
+GCDCONT=2, "IP", "abc.com"
AT+CGDCONT=? +CGDCONT: (1-4),“IP”,,,(0-1),(0-1)
+CGDCONT: (1-4),”PPP”,,,0,0
OK
AT+CGDCONT? +CGDCONT: 1, "IP", "internet",,0,0
+CGDCONT: 2, "IP", "abc.com",,0,0
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 354 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.1.3 Defined values

<cid>: (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a
particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface
and is used in other PDP context-related commands. Range of values is 1 to 4.
<PDP_type>: (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies
the type of packet data protocol
• IP: Internet Protocol
• PPP: Point to Point Protocol
<APN>: (Access Point Name) a string parameter, which is a logical name that
is used to select the GGSN or the external packet data network.
If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be
requested.
<PDP_address>: a string parameter that identifies the MT in the address space
applicable to the PDP.
If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the TE
during the PDP startup procedure or, a dynamic address will be
requested. The read form of the command will return the null string even
if an address has been allocated during the PDP startup procedure. The
allocated address may be read using the +CGPADDR command.
<d_comp>: a numeric parameter that controls PDP data compression
• 0: OFF (default if value is omitted)
• 1: ON
• Other values are reserved.
<h_comp>: a numeric parameter that controls PDP header compression
• 0: OFF (default if value is omitted)
• 1: ON
• Other values are reserved.
Notes:
• The data compression algorithm provided in SNDCP is V.42bis.
• 4 CIDs are available to specify 4 PDP contexts but only 11 NSAPI
are available for PDP activation. Due to WAVECOM Choice, 4 PDP
contexts can be specified with only one activated at the same time.

18.2 Quality of Service Profile (Requested) +CGQREQ

18.2.1 Description
This command allows the TE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used
when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local
context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 355 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQ command is effectively an

extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile consists of a number
of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value.
A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the requested
profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context.
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT
supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are
returned on a separate line.

18.2.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

AT+CGQREQ=[<cid> [,<precedence > OK
[,<delay> [,<reliability.> [,<peak> ERROR
[,<mean>]]]]]]
AT+CGQREQ? +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>,
<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence
>, <delay>, <reliability.>, <peak>, <mean>
[…]]
OK
AT+CGQREQ=? +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s) , (list of
supported <peak>s), (list of supported
<mean>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of
supported <precedence>s), (list of supported
<delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s) ,
(list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported
<mean>s)
[…]]
OK
AT +CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14 OK
AT+CGQREQ=? +CGQREG:“IP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)
+CGQREQ:“PPP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)
OK
AT+CGQREQ? +CGQREQ: 1,1,4,5,2,14
OK

18.2.3 Defined values

<cid>: numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
Range of values is 1 to 3
<precedence>: numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class
0: Subscribed precedence (Subscribed by the Network by default if value
is omitted)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 356 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

1: High priority (Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of

precedence classes 2 and 3)
2: Normal priority (Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of
precedence class 3.)
3: Low priority (Service commitments shall be maintained after
precedence classes 1 and 2)
<delay>: numeric parameter which specifies the delay class
0: Subscribed
1: Delay class 1
2: Delay class 2
3: Delay class 3
4: Delay class 4
Delay (maximum values)

SDU size: 128 bytes SDU size: 1024 bytes

Mean 95 percentile Mean 95 percentile

Transfer Delay (sec) Transfer Delay (sec)
Delay Class Delay (sec) Delay (sec)

0 Subscribed Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value

is omitted

1. (Predictive) < 0.5 < 1.5 <2 <7

2. (Predictive) <5 < 25 < 15 < 75

3. (Predictive) < 50 < 250 < 75 < 375

4. (Best Effort) Unspecified

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 357 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<reliability>: numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class

0: Subscribed
1: Up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s).
2: Up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s).
3: Up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s).
4: Up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s).
5: Up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s).
6: Up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s).
7: Up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s).
8: Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s).
9: Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s).

Reliability GTP Mode LLC Frame LLC Data RLC Block Traffic Type
Class Mode Protection Mode
0 Subscribed Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted

1 Acknowled Acknowledged Protected Acknowledged Non real-time traffic,

ged error-sensitive
application that cannot
cope with data loss.

2 Unacknowl Acknowledged Protected Acknowledged Non real-time traffic,

edged error-sensitive
application that can
cope with infrequent
data loss.

3 Unacknowl Unacknowledge Protected Acknowledged Non real-time traffic,

edged d error-sensitive
application that can
cope with data loss,
GMM/SM, and SMS.

4 Unacknowl Unacknowledge Protected Unacknowledge Real-time traffic, error-

edged d d sensitive application
that can cope with data
loss.

5 Unacknowl Unacknowledge Unprotecte Unacknowledge Real-time traffic, error

edged d d d non-sensitive
application that can
cope with data loss.

NOTE: For real-time traffic, the QoS profile also requires appropriate settings for delay and
throughput.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 358 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<peak>: numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class

0: Subscribed
1: Up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s).
2: Up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s).
3: Up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s).
4: Up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s).
5: Up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s).
6: Up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s).
7: Up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s).
8: Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s).
9: Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s).
<mean>: numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class
0: Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted
1: 100 (~0.22 bit/s).
2: 200 (~0.44 bit/s).
3: 500 (~1.11 bit/s).
4: 1 000 (~2.2 bit/s).
5: 2 000 (~4.4 bit/s).
6: 5 000 (~11.1 bit/s).
7: 10 000 (~22 bit/s).
8: 20 000 (~44 bit/s).
9: 50 000 (~111 bit/s).
10: 100 000 (~0.22 kbits/s).
11: 200 000 (~0.44 kbits/s).
12: 500 000 (~1.11 kbits/s).
13: 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbits/s).
14: 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbits/s).
15: 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbits/s).
16: 10 000 000 (~22 kbits/s).
17: 20 000 000 (~44 kbits/s).
18: 50 000 000 (~111 kbits/s).
31: Best effort.
If a value is omitted for a particular class, then it is considered to be
unspecified.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 359 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.3 Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)

+CGQMIN

18.3.1 Description
This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is
checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP
Context Accept message.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local
context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that
is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMIN command is an extension
to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile consists of a number of
parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value.
A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum
acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become undefined. In this case
no check is made against the negotiated profile.
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context.
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT
supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are
returned on a separate line.

18.3.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

AT+CGQMIN=[<cid> OK
[,<precedence > [,<delay> ERROR
[,<reliability.> [,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>,
<reliability>, <peak>, <mean> [<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:
<cid>, <precedence >, <delay>, <reliability.>, <peak>,
<mean>[…]]
OK
AT+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported <mean>s) [<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:
<PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of
supported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s) ,
(list of supported <peak>s), (list of supported
<mean>s) […]]
OK
AT +CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,31 OK
AT+CGQMIN=? +CGQMIN:“IP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)
+CGQMIN:“PPP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)
OK
AT+CGQMIN? +CGQMIN: 1,1,4,5,2,14
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 360 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.3.3 Defined values

<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context .
<precedence>: a numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class.
<delay>: a numeric parameter which specifies the delay class.
<reliability>: a numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class.
<peak>: a numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class.
<mean>: a numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class.
If a value is omitted for a particular class then this class is not checked.

18.4 GPRS attach or detach +CGATT

18.4.1 Description
The execution command is used to attach the MT to, or detach the MT from
the GPRS service. After the command has completed, the MT remains in
V.25ter command state. If the MT is already in the requested state, the
command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested state
cannot be achieved because the GPRS is not supported by the MT, an ERROR
or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled
by the +CMEE command.
Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the
attachment state changes to detached.
The read command returns the current GPRS service state.
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS
service states.

18.4.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

AT+CGATT= [<state>] OK
ERROR
AT+CGATT? +CGATT: <state>
OK
AT+CGATT=? +CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK
AT +CGATT=1 OK

18.4.3 Defined Values

<state>: indicates the state of GPRS attachment
• 0: detached
• 1: attached

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 361 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

• 2: combined detach (GPRS and GSM detach in the same network

request)
• Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the
execution command.

18.5 PDP context activate or deactivate +CGACT

18.5.1 Description
The execution command is used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP
context(s). After the command has completed, the MT remains in V.25ter
command state. If any PDP context is already in the requested state, the state
for that context remains unchanged.
If the requested state for any specified context cannot be achieved, an ERROR
or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled
by the +CMEE command.
If the MT is not GPRS attached when the activation form of the command is
executed, the MT first performs a GPRS attach and them attempts to activate
the specified contexts. If the attach fails then the MT responds with ERROR or,
if extended error responses are enabled, with the appropriate failure-to-attach
error message.
If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates the
first possible within the defined contexts.
If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command deactivates all
active contexts.
One PDP contexts can be activated through WAVECOM software at the same
time.
The read command returns the current activation states for all the defined PDP
contexts.
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported PDP
context activation states.

18.5.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

AT+CGACT=[<state> [,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]] OK
ERROR
AT+CGACT? +CGACT: <cid>, <state>
[<CR><LF>+CGACT: <cid>, <state>
[...]]
OK
AT+CGACT=? +CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 362 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Command Possible Response(s)

AT +CGACT=1,1 OK
AT+CGACT? +CGACT: 1, 1
OK
AT+CGACT=? +CGACT: (0-1)
OK

18.5.3 Defined Values

<state>: indicates the state of PDP context activation
• 0: deactivated
• 1: activated
• Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the
execution command.
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context.
Before the activation of the context, the MT has to attach itself to the GPRS
network if necessary.
Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data
call) is not supported.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 363 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.6 Enter data state +CGDATA

18.6.1 Description
This command causes the MT to perform the necessary actions to set up
communication between the TE and the network. This may include performing
a GPRS attach and one PDP context activation.
If the <cid> value is not defined to the MT, it will return an ERROR or +CME
ERROR response. Otherwise, the MT issues the intermediate result code
CONNECT and enters V.25ter online data state.
GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior
to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the
+CGATT and +CGACT commands.
If no <cid> is given, the MT attempts to activate the context with available
information. The other context parameters are set to their default values (No
APN, default QOS parameters, dynamic IP address requested).
If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.
After data transfer and layer 2 protocol termination procedure completion, the
V.25ter command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code
OK.
In case of abnormal termination or start up, the V.25ter command state is re-
entered and the MT returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled,
+CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other errors may be reported.
This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.
Notes:
• This command has the same effects than ATD*99***.
• If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM
data call) is not supported.

18.6.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

AT+CGDATA=[<cid>] CONNECT
ERROR
AT+CGDATA=? +CGDATA:
OK
AT+CGDATA=? +CGDATA:
OK
AT +CGDATA=1 CONNECT

18.6.3 Defined Values

<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 364 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.7 GPRS mobile station class +CGCLASS

18.7.1 Description
The set command is used to set the MT to operate according to the specified
GPRS mobile class. If the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME
ERROR response is returned.
The read command returns the current GPRS mobile class.
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS
mobile classes.

18.7.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

AT+CGCLASS= [<class>] OK
ERROR
AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS: <class>
OK
AT+CGCLASS=? +CGCLASS: (list of supported <class>s)
OK
AT +CGCLASS=”CG” OK
Note: Enter GPRS class C mode
AT +CGCLASS=”CC” OK
Note: Enter GSM mode
AT +CGCLASS=”A” +CME ERROR: 150
Note: Chosen class not supported.
AT+CGCLASS=? +CGCLASS: ("CG","CC")
OK
AT+CGCLASS? +CGCLASS: "CC"
OK

18.7.3 Defined Values

<class>: a string parameter which indicates the GPRS mobile class (in
descending order of functionality)
• A class A (highest)
• B class B
• CG class C in GPRS only mode
• CC class C in circuit switched only mode (lowest)
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the set
command.
If the MT is GPRS attached when the set command is issued with a <class> =
CC specified, a GPRS detach request is sent to the network.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 365 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

If the MT is GSM attached when the set command is issued with a <class> =
CG specified, a GSM detach request is sent to the network.
Class A is not supported by WAVECOM GPRS software.
Remark: During switch-On in CG class, the MS always performs an automatic
GPRS attach (the ATTACH-STATUS parameter of +WGPRS is ignored).
But if the MS is not already GPRS attached when switching from B/CC class to
CG class then no automatic GPRS attach is performed.
Example about automatic attachment (see remark above):
AT+CGCLASS?
+CGCLASS: “B”
OK
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 0
OK
AT+CGCLASS=”CG”
OK
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 0
OK
AT+CGATT=1
OK
AT+CPOF
OK
AT+CFUN=1
OK
AT+CGCLASS?
+CGCLASS: “CG”
OK
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 1
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 366 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.8 Select service for MO SMS messages +CGSMS

18.8.1 Description
The set command is used to specify the service or service preference that the
MT will use to send MO SMS messages.
The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference.
The test command is used for requesting information on the currently available
services and service preferences.

18.8.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

+CGSMS= [<service>] OK
ERROR
+CGSMS? +CGSMS: <service>
OK
+CGSMS=? +CGSMS: (list of currently available <service>s)
OK
AT +CGSMS=0 OK
AT+CGSMS=? +CGSMS: (0-3)
OK

18.8.3 Defined Values

<service>: a numeric parameter which indicates the service or service
preference to be used
• 0: GPRS
• 1: Circuit switched
• 2: GPRS preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS is not available)
• 3: Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS if circuit switched not available)
• Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the
set command.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 367 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.9 GPRS event reporting +CGEREP

18.9.1 Description
Set command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV:
XXX from MT to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the GPRS MT or
the network.
<mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within
this command.
Read command returns the current mode and buffer settings
Test command returns the modes and buffer settings supported by the MT as
compound values.

18.9.2 Syntax

Command Possible response(s)

+CGEREP=[<mode>] OK
ERROR
+CGEREP? +CGEREP: <mode>,<bfr>
OK
+CGEREP=? +CGEREP: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of
supported <bfr>s)
OK

18.9.3 Defined values

<mode>:
• 0: buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT; if MT result code buffer is
full, the oldest ones can be discarded. No codes are forwarded to the TE.
• 2: buffer unsolicited result codes in the MT when MT-TE link is reserved
(e.g. in on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE when MT-TE link
becomes available; otherwise forward them directly to the TE
<bfr>
• 0: MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is
cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 entered. Only this case is supported by
WAVECOM.
• 1: MT buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is
flushed to the TE when <mode> 2 is entered. This case is not
supported by WAVECOM.
With WAVECOM's software, a combination of all modes is implemented. When
serial link is available, indications are forwarded directly to the TE. If serial link
is reserved ( e.g. in on-line data mode ), if MT result code buffer is full, the
oldest ones can be discarded.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 368 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

Defined events
The following unsolicited result codes and the corresponding events are
defined:
+CGEV: REJECT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>
A network request for PDP context activation occurred when the MT was
unable to report it to the TE with a +CRING unsolicited result code and
was automatically rejected.
+CGEV: NW REACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The network has requested a context reactivation. The <cid> that was
used to reactivate the context is provided if known to the MT.
+CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used
to activate the context is provided if known to the MT.
+CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The mobile equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that
was used to activate the context is provided if known to the MT.
+CGEV: NW DETACH
The network has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active
contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately.
+CGEV: ME DETACH
The mobile equipment has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all
active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately.
+CGEV: NW CLASS <class>
The network has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class
is reported.
+CGEV: ME CLASS <class>
The mobile equipment has forced a change of MS class. The highest
available class is reported.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 369 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.10 GPRS network registration status +CGREG

18.10.1 Description
The set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code
+CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the MT's GPRS
network registration status, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when
<n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.
The read command returns the status of result code presentation and an
integer <stat> which shows whether the network has currently indicated the
registration of the MT. Location information elements <lac> and <ci> are
returned only when <n>=2 and MT is registered in the network.

18.10.2 Syntax

Command Possible response(s)

AT+CGREG=[<n>] OK
+CGREG: stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
AT+CGREG? +CGREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
AT+CGREG=? +CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 370 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.10.3 Defined values

<n>:
0: disable network registration unsolicited result code
1: enable network registration unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>
2: enable network registration and location information unsolicited result
code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
<stat>:
0: not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to register
to
1: registered, home network
2: not registered, but ME is currently searching a new operator to register
to
3: registration denied
4: unknown
5: registered, roaming
<lac>:
string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format.
<ci>:
string type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 371 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.11 Request GPRS IP service 'D'

18.11.1 Description
This command causes the MT to perform whatever actions are necessary to
establish communication between the TE and the external PDN.
The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the MT to enter the V.25ter online data
state and, with the TE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The MT return
CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the command prior to entering the V.25ter
online data state. No further commands may follow on the AT command line.
The detailed behavior after the online data state has been entered is described
briefly in clause 9, for IP, of GSM 07.60. GPRS attachment and PDP context
activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP startup if they
have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands.
If <cid> is supported, its usage is the same as in the +CGDATA command. The
+CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. commands may then be used in the modem
initialization AT command string to set values for PDP type, APN, QoS etc…
If <cid> is not supported or is supported but omitted, the MT attempt to
activate the context using the 'Empty PDP type' (GSM 04.08). (No PDP address
or APN is sent in this case and only one PDP context subscription record is
present in the HLR for this subscriber.)
Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data
call) is not supported.

18.11.2 Syntax

Command Possible Response(s)

D*<GPRS_SC_IP>[***<cid>]# CONNECT
ERROR

18.11.3 Defined Values

<GPRS_SC_IP>: (GPRS Service Code for IP) a digit string (value 99), which
identifies a request to use the GPRS with IP (PDP types IP and PPP)
<cid>: a digit string which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
Example
ATD*99***1#
CONNECT
ATD*99***2#
ERROR

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 372 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.12 Network requested PDP context activation

In this mode of operation, the MT behaves like an answering modem and

accepts the normal V.25ter commands associated with answering a call. If
GPRS-specific configuration commands are required, they may be sent to the
MT as part of the modem initialization commands.
The +CGAUTO command is used to select modem compatibility mode.

18.12.1 Automatic response to a network request for PDP context

activation 'S0'
The V.25ter 'S0=n' (Automatic answer) command may be used to turn off (n=0)
and on (n>0) the automatic response to a network request for a PDP context
activation.
When the 'S0=n' (n>0) command is received, the MT attempt to perform a
GPRS attach if it is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR being
returned to the TE. Subsequently, the MT will announce a network request for
PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING to the TE,
followed by the intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters
V.25ter online data state and follows the same procedure as it would after
having received a +CGANS=1 with no <L2P> or <cid> values specified.
Note: The 'S0=n' (n=0) command does not perform an automatic GPRS detach.

18.12.2 Manual acceptance of a network request for PDP context

activation 'A'
The V.25ter 'A' (Answer) command may be used to accept a network request
for a PDP context activation announced by the unsolicited result code RING.
The MT responds with CONNECT, enters V.25ter online data state and follows
the same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no
<cid> value specified. It is an error to issue the 'A' command when there is no
outstanding network request.

18.12.3 Manual rejection of a network request for PDP context

activation 'H'
The V.25ter 'H' or 'H0' (On-hook) command may be used to reject a network
request for PDP context activation announced by the unsolicited result code
RING. The MT responds with OK. It is an error to issue the 'H' command when
there is no outstanding network request.
Note: This is an extension to the usage of the 'H' command that is described in
ITU-T V.25ter.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 373 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.13 Automatic response to a network request for PDP

context activation +CGAUTO

18.13.1 Description
The set command disables or enables an automatic positive response (auto-
answer) to the receipt of a Request PDP Context Activation message from the
network. It also provides control over the use of the V.25ter basic commands
'S0', 'A and 'H' for handling network requests for PDP context activation. The
setting does not affect the issuing of the unsolicited result code RING or
+CRING.
The test command returns values of <n> supported by the MT as a compound
value.
When the +CGAUTO=0 command is received, the MT will not perform a GPRS
detach if it is attached. Subsequently, when the MT announces a network
request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING
or +CRING, the TE may manually accept or reject the request by issuing the
+CGANS command or may simply ignore the network request.
When the +CGAUTO=1 command is received, the MT will attempt to perform
a GPRS attach if it is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR or, if
enabled, +CME ERROR being returned to the TE. Subsequently, when the MT
announces a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the
unsolicited result code RING or +CRING to the TE, this is followed by the
intermediate result code CONNECT. The MT then enters V.25ter online data
state and follows the same procedure as it would after having received a
+CGANS=1 with <cid> values specified.

18.13.2 Syntax

Command Possible response(s)

+CGAUTO=[<n>] OK
ERROR
+CGAUTO? +CGAUTO: <n>
OK
+CGAUTO=? +CGAUTO: (0-3)
OK

18.13.3 Defined values

<n>:
0 turn off automatic response for GPRS only
1 turn on automatic response for GPRS only
2 modem compatibility mode, GPRS only
3 modem compatibility mode, GPRS and circuit switched calls (default)

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 374 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

For <n> = 0 GPRS network requests are manually accepted or rejected by the
+CGANS command.
For <n> = 1 GPRS network requests are automatically accepted according to
the description above.
For <n> = 2, automatic acceptance of GPRS network requests is controlled by
the 'S0' command. Manual control uses the 'A' and 'H' commands, respectively,
to accept and reject GPRS requests. (+CGANS may also be used.) Incoming
circuit switched calls can be neither manually nor automatically answered.
For <n> = 3, automatic acceptance of both GPRS network requests and
incoming circuit switched calls is controlled by the 'S0' command. Manual
control uses the 'A' and 'H' commands, respectively, to accept and reject GPRS
requests. (+CGANS may also be used.) Circuit switched calls are handled as
described elsewhere in this specification.

Note: In class C GPRS the modem can’t receive simultaneously GPRS and GSM
incoming calls.
Example
AT+CGAUTO=?
+CGAUTO: (0-2)
OK

AT+CGAUTO?
+CGAUTO: 2
OK

AT+CGAUTO=0
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 375 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.14 Manual response to a network request for PDP

context activation +CGANS

18.14.1 Description
The execution command requests the MT to respond to a network request for
GPRS PDP context activation which has been signaled to the TE by the RING or
+CRING: unsolicited result code. The <response> parameter allows the TE to
accept or reject the request.
If <response> is 0, the request is rejected and the MT returns OK to the TE.
If <response> is 1, the following procedure is followed by the MT.
PDP context activation procedures take place prior to or during the PDP
startup.
One <cid> may be specified in order to provide the values needed for the
context activation request.
During the PDP startup procedure the MT has the PDP type and the PDP
address provided by the network in the Request PDP Context Activation
message.
If a <cid> is given his information must matching with the PDP type and PDP
address in the network request as follows -
The PDP type must match exactly.
The PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if the
address in the context definition is unspecified.
If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail.
The context is activated using the values for PDP type and PDP address
provided by the network, together with the other information found in the PDP
context definition. An APN may or may not be required, depending on the
application.
If no <cid> is given, the MT will attempt to activate the context using the
values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the network, together with
any other relevant information known to the MT. The other context parameters
will be set to their default values.
If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.
After data transfer is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure
has completed successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the
MT returns the final result code OK
In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to startup, the V.25ter
command state is re-entered and the MT returns the final result code
NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other errors
may be reported. It is also an error to issue the +CGANS command when there
is no outstanding network request.
This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 376 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.14.2 Syntax

Command Possible response(s)

+CGANS=[<response>, [<cid>]] OK
ERROR
+CGANS=? +CGANS: (list of supported
<response>s), (list of supported
<L2P>s)
OK

18.14.3 Defined values

<response>: is a numeric parameter which specifies how the request should
be responded to.
0 reject the request
1 accept and request that the PDP context be activated
If <response> is omitted it is assumed to be 0. Other values are reserved
and will result in the ERROR response.
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.

Example
+CRING: GPRS "IP", "122.41.74.238"
AT+CGANS=1
CONNECT
AT+CGANS=?
+CGANS: (0-1)
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 377 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.15 Show PDP address +CGPADDR

18.15.1 Description
The execution command returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified
context identifiers. The test command returns a list of defined <cid>s

18.15.2 Syntax

Command Possible response(s)

+CGPADDR=[<cid> [,<cid> [,…]]] +CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>

[<CR><LF>+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>
[...]]
OK
+CGPADDR=? +CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)
OK

18.15.3 Defined values

<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
If no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned.
<PDP_address>: a string that identifies the MT in the address space applicable
to the PDP. The address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will
be the one set by the +CGDCONT command when the context was defined.
For a dynamic address it will be the one assigned during the last PDP context
activation that used the context definition referred to by <cid>. <PDP_address>
is omitted if none is available.

Example
In this example 3 CIDs are defined.
AT+CGPADDR=1
+CGPADDR=1,"107.210.5.4"
OK
AT+CGPADDR=?
+CGAPDDR: (1,2,4)
OK
AT+CGPADDR
+CGPADDR: 1,
+CGPADDR: 2,"10.3.73.151"
+CGPADDR: 4,

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 378 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.16 Cellular result codes +CRC

18.16.1 Description
This command enables a more detailed ring indication, in case of incoming call
(voice or data). Instead of the string “RING”, an extended string is used to
indicate which type of call is ringing (e.g. +CRING: VOICE).
These extended indications are:
+CRING: ASYNC for asynchronous transparent
+CRING: REL ASYNC for asynchronous non-transparent
+CRING: VOICE for normal speech.
+CRING: FAX for fax calls
+CRING: GPRS GPRS network request for PDP context activation

If the MT is unable to announce to the TE the network's request (for example it

is in V.25ter online data state) the MT rejects the request. No corresponding
unsolicited result code is issued when the MT returns to a command state.

18.16.2 Syntax
See 11.5

18.16.3 Defined values

No parameter.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 379 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.17 Service reporting control +CR

18.17.1 Description
This command enables a more detailed service reporting, in case of data
incoming or outgoing call. Before sending the CONNECT response to the
application, the GSM module will precise the type of data connection that have
been established.
These report types are:
+CR: ASYNC For asynchronous transparent
+CR: REL ASYNC For asynchronous non-transparent
+CR: GPRS For GPRS

18.17.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CR

Command Possible responses

AT+CR=0 OK
Note: Extended reports disabled Note: Command valid
AT+CR=1 OK
Note: Extended reports enabled Note: Command valid

18.17.3 Defined values

No parameter.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 380 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.18 Extended error report +CEER

18.18.1 Description
This command gives the reason of the call release when the last call setup
(originating or answering) failed.
New indication for GPRS is the reason of the last unsuccessful PDP context
activation and the last GPRS detach or PDP context activation.

18.18.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+CEER

Command Possible responses

ATD123456789 ; NO CARRIER
Note: Outgoing voice call Note: Call setup failure
AT+CEER +CEER: Error <xxx>
OK
Note: Ask for reason of release Note: <xxx>is the cause information element values
form GSM recommendation 04.08 or specific Call
accepted

The cause information element from GSM 04.08 is given below in §20 Codes
and values for specific GPRS failure causes (values 224 to 238).
The “NO CARRIER” indicates that the AT+CEER information is available for a
failure diagnostic.

18.18.3 Defined values

No parameters.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 381 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.19 GPRS parameters customization: +WGPRS

18.19.1 Description
This command modifies some WAVECOM GPRS parameters:
• the ATTACH-STATUS (the ME does or not perform automatically a
GPRS attachment after initialization),
• the PDP-INIT-STATUS (activates automatically or not some
defined PDP contexts after initialization) and
• the user-defined multislot class. This parameter represents the
GPRS class chosen by the user to perform power saving (by
reducing TX (or uplink) time slots).
In addition, this command allows to
• set automatically “ACTIVABLE” some defined PDP contexts after
initialization
• set some parameters for PALM® OS software: PPP Silent Mode
(PPP waits for PPP Client to start the dialog) and Slow CONNECT
(due to the delay of the processing of PALM® OK, the CONNECT is
sent one second after the dialing command request)
IMPORTANT NOTE: The WISMO module must be rebooted to activate the new
setup except for <mode> 3, 5 and 6 (please refer to Defined Values paragraph).

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 382 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.19.2 Syntax
Command syntax: AT+WGPRS=<mode>,<parameter>,[<cid>],[<class>]

Command Possible responses

AT+WGPRS=? +WGPRS: <mode>, <parameter1>,[<cid>]

[<CR><LF>+WGPRS: <mode>,
<parameter>,[<cid>]
[...]]
OK
AT+WGPRS? +WGPRS:<mode>(list of supported
<parameter>),[(list of supported
<cid>)][<CR><LF>+WGPRS:<mode>(list of
supported <parameter>),[(list of supported
<cid>)] [...]]
OK
AT+WGPRS=2,1,3 OK
Note: set ACTIVABLE to ON on PDP
context 3
AT+WGPRS=4,,,8 OK
Note: choose GPRS multislot class
8

AT+WGPRS=? +WGPRS: (0-6),(0-1),(0-4),(2,8,10)

Note: Request ranges of values OK
Note : If class10 is activated
AT+WGPRS=? +WGPRS: (0-6),(0-1),(0-4),2
Note: Request ranges of values OK
Note : If class10 is not activated
AT+WGPRS? +WGPRS: 0,0
+WGPRS: 1,0
+WGPRS: 2,1,1
+WGPRS: 2,0,2
+WGPRS: 2,0,3
+WGPRS: 2,0,4
+WGPRS: 3,1
+WGPRS:4,8
+WGPRS:5,1
+WGPRS:6,1
OK

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 383 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.19.3 Defined Values

<mode>: a numeric parameter which specifies a WAVECOM GPRS parameter.
0 ATTACH-STATUS (the ME don’t make automatically a GPRS attachment
after init)
1 PDP-INIT-STATUS (declare some PDP contexts liable to be activated
automatically after initialization by <mode>=2)
2 Set ACTIVABLE automatically after init a define PDP context
3 PPP silent mode
4 definition of the GPRS multislot class.
5 Slow CONNECT for PALM® OS
6 PPP Filtering

Notes:
• If <mode>=0, 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6, <cid> and <class> values will be ignored.
• If <mode>=0, 1, 2, 3, 5 or 6, <class> value will be ignored.
• If <mode>=4, <parameter> and <cid> values will be ignored. WISMO
module must be restarted to take the modification into account.
• PPP Filtering is a test-purpose functionality. It avoids sending on the
radio link some OS-specific frames, for accurate transfer rate
measurements.

<parameter>: a numeric parameter that controls the operation defined by

<mode> if it is equal to 0, 1, 2 or 3.
0 operation OFF (disabled)
1 operation ON (enabled)

<cid>: (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which specifies a

particular PDP context definition. The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface
and is used in other PDP context-related commands. Range of values is 0 to 4.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 384 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

<class>
GPRS multislot class number. It may be lower than the maximum possible
class. Possible values are 2, 8, 10. Refer to doc ref [6] for more information
about GPRS multislot classes. Note that the range of values is also WISMO-
module-dependant.
Multislot Maximum number of Minimum number of slots Type
class slots of MS
Rx Tx Sum Tta Ttb Tra Trb
2 2 1 3 3 2 3 1 1
8 4 1 5 3 1 2 1 1
10 4 2 5 3 1 2 1 1

NB: Type 1 MS are not required to transmit and receive at the same time.

Remark
When the module is set in “CG” class, the ME always make automatically a
GPRS attachment after init, so AT+WGPRS? always give +WGPRS: 0,0 for the
parameter 0.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 385 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

18.20 Full AT GPRS commands examples

18.20.1 Activation of an IP PDP context

Example 1:
AT +CGDCONT=1, "IP", "internet"; +GCDCONT=2, "IP", "abc.com"
OK
ATD*99***1#
CONNECT

Example 2:

AT +CGCLASS=”CG”
OK
+CGREG: 1
AT +CGDCONT=1, "IP", "internet"
OK
AT +CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14
OK
AT +CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,14
OK
AT +CGATT=1
OK
AT +CGACT=1,1
OK

Remark about +CGDATA: the goal of this command is the same than
ATD*99***
AT +CGDATA=1
CONNECT
…….
Data transfer
…….
+CGEV: NW DETACH

18.20.2 Network request

AT+CGAUTO=0

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 386 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

OK
+CRING: GPRS "IP", "211.45.89.152"
AT+CGANS=1
CONNECT
…….Data transfer

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 387 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

19 Other AT commands

19.1 V.25 ter recommendation

The commands not listed in this document are not supported. For these
commands, the product will then answer with "ERROR".
All modulation control, error control and data compression commands are not
recognized. An "ERROR" string will be returned.

19.2 GSM 07.05 recommendation

All the 07.05 commands not described in this manual are not implemented.
The product will then answer "ERROR" to these commands.

19.3 GSM 07.07 recommendation

All the 07.07 commands not described in this manual are not implemented.
The product will then answer "ERROR" to these commands.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 388 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

20 Codes and values

See appendixes document.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 389 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

21 Examples
See appendixes document.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 390 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

22 Technical appendixes
See appendixes document.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 391 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

23 Command execution and dependence to

SIM
See appendixes document.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 392 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

24 Interoperability
See appendixes document.

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 393 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

25 Alphabetical Index for AT commands and

responses

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

\N Data 11.12
%C Data 11.9
%D Call Control 5.8
&C V24-V25 14.4
&D V24-V25 14.5
&F V24-V25 14.14
&S V24-V25 14.6
&T V24-V25 14.12
&V V24-V25 14.15
&W V24-V25 14.11
+ADC Specific 15.3
+CACM Supplementary services 10.9
+CALA General 4.17
+CAMM Supplementary services 10.10
+CAOC Supplementary services 10.8
+CBST Data 11.2
+CCED Specific 15.1
+CCFC Supplementary services 10.1
+CCID General 4.8
+CCLK General 4.16
+CCUG Supplementary services 10.16
+CCWA Supplementary services 10.4
+CEER Call Control, GPRS 5.5, 19.18
+CIEV Specific 15.4
+CFUN General 4.12
+CGACT GPRS 19.5
+CGANS GPRS 19.14
+CGATT GPRS 19.4
+CGAUTO GPRS 19.13
+CGCLASS GPRS 19.7
+CGDATA GPRS 19.6
+CGDCONT GPRS 19.1
+CGEREP GPRS 19.9
+CGMI General 4.1
+CGMM General 4.2

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 394 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

+CGMR General 4.3

+CGPADDR GPRS 19.15
+CGQMIN GPRS 19.3
+CGQREQ GPRS 19.2
+CGREG GPRS 19.10
+CGSMS GPRS 19.8
+CGSN General 4.4
+CHLD Supplementary services 10.12
+CICB Call Control 5.10
+CIMI General 4.7
+CIND General 4.23
+CKEV Specific 15.4
+CKPD General 4.15
+CLCC Supplementary services 10.13
+CLCK Security, 7.4,
Supplementary services 10.2
+CLIP Supplementary services 10.6
+CLIR Supplementary services 10.5
+CMEC General 4.22
+CMEE General 4.14
+CMER Specific 15.4
+CMGD Short Messages 9.16
+CMGF Short Messages 9.5
+CMGL Short Messages 9.11
+CMGR Short Messages 9.10
+CMGS Short Messages 9.12
+CMGW Short Messages 9.13
+CMSS Short Messages 9.14
+CMUT Call Control 5.13
+CNMA Short Messages 9.3
+CNMI Short Messages 9.9
+CNUM Phonebook 8.8
+COLP Supplementary services 10.7
+COPN Network services 6.7
+COPS Network services 6.2
+CPAS General 4.13
+CPBF Phonebook 8.5
+CPBN Phonebook 8.7
+CPBP Phonebook 8.5

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 395 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

+CPBR Phonebook 8.3

+CPBS Phonebook 8.2
+CPBW Phonebook 8.4
+CPHS Specific 15.27
+CPIN Security 7.1
+CPIN2 Security 7.2
+CPINC Security 7.3
+CPLS Network services 6.5
+CPMS Short Messages 9.4
+CPOF General 4.11
+CPOL Network services 6.6
+CPUC Supplementary services 10.11
+CPWD Security 7.5
Supplementary services 10.3
+CR Data 11.4
GPRS 19.17
+CRC Data 11.5
GPRS 19.16
+CREG Network services 6.3
+CRES Short Messages 9.7
+CRLP Data 11.7
+CRMP General 4.18
+CRSL General 4.19
+CRSM General (RIL) 4.21
+CSAS Short Messages 9.6
+CSCA Short Messages 9.17
+CSCB Short Messages 9.18
+CSCS General 4.5
+CSDH Short Messages 9.8
+CSIM General (RIL) 4.20
+CSMP Short Messages 9.15
+CSMS Short Messages 9.2
+CSNS Call Control 5.11
+CSQ Network services 6.1
+CSSN Supplementary services 10.14
+CSVM Phonebook 8.11
+CUSD Supplementary services 10.15
+DOPT Data 11.8
+DR Data 11.11

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 396 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

+DS Data 11.10

+ECHO Call Control 5.15
+FBOR Class 2 13.6
+FBUF Class 2 13.7
+FCLASS Data 11.3
+FCFR Class 2 13.14
+FCON Class 2 13.14
+FCQ Class 2 13.8
+FCR Class 2 13.9
+FCSI Class 2 13.14
+FDCC Class 2 13.11
+FDCS Class 2 13.14
+FDIS Class 2 13.10, 13.14
+FDR Class 2 13.2
+FDT Class 2 13.1
+FET Class 2 13.3, 13.14
+FHNG Class 2 13.14
+FPTS Class 2 13.4, 13.14
+FTSI Class 2 13.14
+FK Class 2 13.5
+FLID Class 2 13.12
+FPHCTO Class 2 13.13
+FRH Fax 12.4
+FRM Fax 12.2
+FRS Fax 12.6
+FTH Fax 12.3
+FTM Fax 12.1
+FTS Fax 12.5
+GCAP General 4.9
+ICF V24-V25 14.2
+IFC V24-V25 14.3
+ILRR Data 11.6
+IPR V24-V25 14.1
+SIDET Call Control 5.16
+SPEAKER Call Control 5.14
+STCR SIM toolkit (unsolicited
response) 18.3.4
+STGI SIM Toolkit 18.3.3
+STGR SIM Toolkit 18.3.5
+STIN SIM Toolkit 18.3.2

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 397 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

+STSF SIM Toolkit 18.3.1

+VGR Call Control 5.12
+VGT Call Control 5.12
+VIP Call Control 5.17
+VTD Call Control 5.6
+VTS Call Control 5.6
+W32K Specific 15.22
+WAC Specific 15.10
+WAIP Phonebook 8.9
+WALS Specific 15.40
+WATH Specific 15.48
+WBCI Specific 15.36
+WBCM Specific 15.33
+WBHV Specific 15.54
+WBM Specific 15.47
+WBR Specific 15.45
+WBW Specific 15.46
+WCCS Specific 15.25
+WCBM Short Messages 9.19
+WCDM Specific 15.23
+WCDP Specific 15.38
+WCFM Specific 15.36
+WCPI Specific 15.31
+WCSP Specific 15.32
+WCTM Specific 15.53
+WDCI Specific 15.29
+WDCP Phonebook 8.10
+WDOP Specific 15.17
+WDR Specific 15.15
+WDTMF Specific 15.12
+WDWL Specific 15.13
+WFM Specific 15.35
+WGPRS GPRS 18.19
+WHWV Specific 15.16
+WIMEI Specific 15.49
+WIND Specific 15.2
+WIOM Specific 15.9
+WIOR Specific 15.7
+WIOW Specific 15.8

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 398 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

+WLCK Specific 15.26

+WLOC Specific 15.44
+WLPR Specific 15.5
+WLPW Specific 15.6
+WMBN Specific 15.39
+WMBS Specific 15.51
+WMGO Short Messages 9.21
+WMIR Specific 15.37
+WMSC Short Messages 9.20
+WMSN Specific 15.52
+WMUX V24-V25 14.17
+WNON Specific 15.30
+WOPEN Specific 15.41
+WOPN Network services 6.4
+WPCS General 4.6
+WRIM Specific 15.21
+WRST Specific 15.42
+WSCAN Specific 15.20
+WSST Specific 15.43
+WSSW Specific 15.24
+WSTR Specific 15.19
+WSVG Specific 15.18
+WSVN Specific 15.50
+WTONE Specific 0
+WUSS Short Messages 9.22
+WVMI Specific 15.28
+WVR Specific 15.14
A Call Control 5.3
GPRS 18.12.2
A/ General 4.10
D Call Control 5.1
GPRS 18.11
DL Call Control 5.7
E V24-V25 14.13
H Call Control 5.2
GPRS 18.12.3
I V24-V25 14.16
O V24-V25 14.7
Q V24-V25 14.8

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 399 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
 WM_ASW_OAT_UGD_016 – 005

28th June 2005

AT command / response Type of Command Paragraph Nb

S0 Call Control 5.9

GPRS 18.12.1
V V24-V25 14.9
Z V24-V25 14.10
+WMFM Specific 15.56
+WAGR Agenda 16.2
+WAGD Agenda 16.4
+WAGW Agenda 16.3

+WOPENRES Specific 15.57

+WMCP Short messages 9.23
+WPGW Phonebook groups 8.13
+WPGR Phonebook groups 8.14
+WPGS Phonebook groups 8.15
+WCOS Phonebook 8.12

All rights reserved

© 2003-2005 Wavecom Confidential & Proprietary Information Page: 400 / 400
This document is the sole and exclusive property of WAVECOM. Not to be distributed or divulged
without prior written agreement.
plaquette MUSE AT 3/11/03 15:38 Page 1

®, WAVECOM®, WISMO®, MUSE Platform®, and certain other trademarks and logos appearing on this document, are filed or registered trademarks of Wavecom S.A. in France or in other countries.
All other company and/or product names mentioned may be filed or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

WAVECOM S.A. - 3, esplanade du Foncet - 92442 Issy-les-Moulineaux Cedex - France - Tel: +33 (0)1 46 29 08 00 - Fax: +33 (0)1 46 29 08 08
WAVECOM, Inc. - 4810 Eastgate Mall - Second Floor - San Diego, CA 92121 - USA - Tel: +1 858 362 0101 - Fax: +1 858 558 5485
WAVECOM Asia Pacific Ltd. - 5/F, Shui On Centre - 6/8 Harbour Road - Hong Kong, PRC - Tel: +852 2824 0254 - Fax: +852 2824 0255

www.wavecom.com